visit our website at

www.mitsubishi-tv.com
TM
5.
WD-62827
WD-62927
WD-73827
WD-73927
Projection Televi sion
Owner’ s Gui de
TV Information
Use this space to record the model number and serial
number of your television. This information is on the back
of your TV.
Model Number
Serial Number
Purchase Date
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user of
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER: THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER’S
ATTENTION TO ARTICLE 820-40 OF THE NEC THAT PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR THE PROPER GROUNDING AND,
IN PARTICULAR, SPECIFIES THAT THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF
THE BUILDING, AS CLOSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE ENTRY AS PRACTICAL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This TV is heavy! Exercise extreme care when lifting or moving. Lifting or moving the TV requires a minimum of two
adults. To prevent damage to your TV, your TV should not be jarred or moved while it is turned on. Power off your TV
before moving it.
Portions of the advanced circuitry of this TV must continue to operate even when the TV is turned off. Some of these
circuits therefore need to be cooled at all times. A low power standby fan may be heard in a quiet environment. This is
normal operation.
Custom cabinet installation must allow for proper air circulation around the television.
TV Guide On Screen® Access Requirements
TV Guide On Screen listings are not provided by Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. Operation of TV Guide On
Screen requires over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide On Screen program listings. If listings are
not available in your area or become discontinued by the local provider, TV Guide On Screen will not operate. TV Guide
On Screen does not provide program listings for satellite TV systems.
Stand Requirement
CAUTION: Use these Mitsubishi TV models only with
the Mitsubishi stand models shown here. Use with other
stands can result in instability and possibly cause injury.
TV Model Number Stand Model Number
WD-62827 MB-62827
WD-62927 MB-62927
WD-73827 MB-73827
WD-73927 MB-73927
LAMP REPLACEMENT
The image on this TV is produced by a powerful lamp that will operate for many hours. Eventually, however, this lamp
will need to be replaced. It is designed to be easily replaced by the TV owner. Front panel indicators and/or on-screen
messages will assist you in determining when the lamp needs to be replaced. Please see Appendix G for details on
lamp replacement.
To order a new lamp:
While Under Warranty After Warranty
Call (800) 332-2119. Please have model number, serial
number, and TV purchase date available.
Call (800) 553-7278. Order lamp part number
915P027010.
FCC Declaration of Conformity
Product: Projection Television Receiver
Models: WD-62827, WD-62927, WD-73827, WD-73927
Responsible Party: Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.
9351 Jeronimo Road
Irvine, CA 92618-1904
Telephone: 949-465-6000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: To ensure continued FCC compliance, the user must use a shielded video interface
or HDMI cable with bonded ferrite cores at both ends when using the PC input.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Mitsubishi could cause harmful interference and would
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Please read the following safeguards for your TV and retain for future reference. Always follow all warnings
and instructions marked on the television.
1. Read, Retain and Follow All Instructions
Read all safety and operating instructions before operating the TV. Retain the safety and operating instructions
for future reference. Follow all operating and use instructions.
2. Heed Warnings
Adhere to all warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions.
3. Cleaning
Unplug the TV from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid, abrasive or aerosol cleaners. Cleaners
can permanently damage the cabinet and screen. Use a lightly dampened cloth for cleaning.
. Attachments and Equipment
Never add any attachments and/or equipment without approval of the manufacturer as such additions may
result in the risk of fire, electric shock or other personal injury.
5. Water and Moisture
Do not use the TV where contact with or immersion in water is possible. Do not use near bath tubs, wash
bowls, kitchen sinks, laundry tubs, swimming pools, etc.
6. Accessories
Do not place the TV on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, or table. The TV may fall, causing
serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the TV. Use only with a cart, stand,
tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the TV. Any mounting
of the TV should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use mounting accessories
recommended by the manufacturer.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force,
and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.
7. Ventilation
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the TV and
to protect it from overheating. Do not block these openings or allow them to be obstructed by placing the TV
on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. Nor should it be placed over a radiator or heat register. If the TV
is to be placed in a rack or bookcase, ensure that there is adequate ventilation and that the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
8. Power Source
This TV should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not
sure of the type of power supplied to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.
9. Grounding or Polarization
This TV is equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug having one blade wider than the other. This
plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do
not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
10. Power-Cord Protection
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed
upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the TV.
11. Lightning
For added protection for this TV during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long
period of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the TV due to lightning and power-line surges.
5
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS, continued
12. Power Lines
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
13. Overloading
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
1. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into this TV through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
short-out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on or into the TV.
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the TV, be
sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-2002,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead in wire to an
antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of
antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and
requirements for the grounding electrode.
16. Servicing
Do not attempt to service this TV yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
17. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the TV from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
(a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
(b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the TV.
(c) If the TV has been exposed to rain or water.
(d) If the TV does not operate normally by following the operating instructions, adjust only those controls that
are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the TV to its normal operation.
(e) If the TV has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
(f) When the TV exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service.
18. Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
19. Safety Check
Upon completion of any service or repair to the TV, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.
20. Heat
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
ANTE NNA
LE AD IN WIR E
ANTE NNA
DIS CHAR GE UNIT
(NE C AR TICLE 810-20)
GR OUNDING
CONDUCTOR S
(NE C AR TICLE 810-21)
GR OUND CLAMPS
POWE R S E R VICE GR OUNDING
E LE CTR ODE S YS TE M
(NE C AR T 250, PAR T H)
GR OUND CLAMP
E LE CTR IC
S E R VICE
E QUIPME NT
NE C — NATIONAL E LE CTR ICAL CODE
E XAMPLE OF ANTE NNA GR OUNDING
Contents
Chapter 1: Television Overview
TV Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Special Features of Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Memory Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TV Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 2: Connecting
External Devices and NetCommand® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Standard Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
A/V Receiver (Stereo System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DVI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
HDMI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MonitorLink Control/RS-232C Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IR Emitter NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 3: NetCommand® Setup and Editing
NetCommand® Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the Remote Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NetCommand® Setup On-Screen Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3D Graphical Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NetCommand® Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Adding an A/V Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adding Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing or Deleting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
IEEE 1394 Devices and NetCommand® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding IEEE 1394 Devices Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter 4: NetCommand® Functions
Device Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the Device Menu Button to Display Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the GUIDE Button to Display ChannelView™ and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using TV Disc and A/V Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Peer-to-Peer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 5: TV Menu Operations
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
NetCommand® Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Captions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
V-Chip Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Audio/Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 6: Additional Features
CableCARD™ Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
MediaCommand™ and Memory Card Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Operation of PIP and POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
TV Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
On-Screen Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter 7: Using the TV with a PC
Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Computer with a DVI Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Computer with a 15-Pin Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
PC Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Appendices
Appendix A: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Appendix B: NetCommand® Specialized Device Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Appendix C: Bypassing the V-Chip Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Appendix E: Device Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Appendix F: Cleaning and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Appendix G: Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Appendix I: Recording and Viewing Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Appendix J: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Trademark and License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Mitsubishi DLP™ Projection Television Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8
Our Thanks...
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi as your premier Home Entertainment provider
This Owner’s Guide describes the features and functions of your Mitsubishi
widescreen, high definition TV. We urge you to examine this Owner’s Guide to
become familiar with the innovative features and operations this unique television
offers.
The very core of our corporate philosophy is to provide our customers with the
very best. Our development team at Mitsubishi has worked to provide you with
a television that defines “state-of-the-art,” with the capability to meet your needs
now and in the future.
Whether this is your first Mitsubishi electronic product, or an addition to your
Mitsubishi collection, we believe you and your family will continue to enjoy your
Mitsubishi home theater for many years.
Thank you,
Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.
Chapter
1
Television Overview
TV Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Special Features of Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Memory Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TV Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TV Reset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
10 Chapter 1. Television Overview
TV Accessories
Please take a moment to review the following list of items
to ensure that you have received everything.
POWER
PAUSE REC
3
6
9
Qv
DEvlCE
MENU HOME
1
7
SQv
4
SUB/CANCEL
2
5
8
0
TvMENU GUlDE
MUTE CH vOL
REW/REv FF/FWD
PLAY
STOP
SLEEP
lNFO v-CHlP AUDlO vlDEO
CONNECT
Tv AUDlO
CABLE/DBS/DTv DvD vCR
FORMAT
PlP CH PlP/POP EXCH
PlPDEvlCE
PAGE
DEvlCE
AA
AA
1. Remote Control 2. Two AA Batteries
6. Product registration card (not pictured)
7. Owner’s Guide (not pictured)
8. Quick Reference Guide (not pictured)
9. TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide
User’s Manual (not pictured)
3. One digital audio cable (sends the audio of digital
channels to a digital audio/video receiver).
4. One two-headed IR emitter cable (allows
NetCommand to control other devices)
5. One four-headed IR emitter cable (allows
NetCommand to control other devices)
10. Four-piece TV trim kit (pictured above)
Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 also include:
Chapter 1. Television Overview 11
Your new high-definition widescreen television has many special features that make it the perfect center of your home
entertainment system, including:
High Definition DLP™ Display System
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV uses Texas Instruments most advanced Digital Light Processing™ technology for
rear-projection televisions. This TV is truly a high-performance multimedia monitor uniquely capable of both stunning
high-definition video images and clear, detailed, high-resolution PC images. Your TV can accept video signals from an
antenna or direct cable service in standard video scanning rates of 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i and 1080p. It is also able
to accept, through the HDMI 2 connection, signals with PC resolutions from VGA (640 x 480) through XGA (1024 x 768).
When used with a compatible graphics card and controlling software, this TV is also able to accept the custom PC
resolution of 720p (1280 x 720). To connect a PC to HDMI 2, your PC must have a video card with DVI or HDMI output.
You also need to perform NetCommand setup for the HDMI 2 PC input so that the TV knows to apply the correct PC-
signal processing. All of the compatible video and PC signals will be converted to 1080p for final display; some signals
will, however, result in the addition of black side bars, top and bottom bars, or both, to fill the screen, and some signals
will display standard video overscan.
TV Disc Internal Digital Video Recorder (DVR)
TV Disc is an internal high-definition hard disk drive recorder, also known as a digital video recorder or DVR. In models
WD-62827 and WD-73827, this disc has a capacity of 160 gigabytes and can record up to 16 hours of high-definition
programming. Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 contain a 250-gigabyte disc that can record up to 25 hours of
high-definition programming. TV Disc can record digital and analog programs received from CableCARD™ channels,
Antenna 1, Antenna 2, devices connected to Input 1–3, or IEEE 1394 devices. This exciting feature makes possible
live TV pause with instant replay. Now you can record a high-definition program and watch it later without any loss
of picture quality and without a VCR. Recordings on the TV Disc can be sent by an IEEE 1394 connection to D-VHS
VCRs or to other IEEE 1394-compatible TVs and analog VCRs. When recording analog programs, TV Disc will use
Dolby Digital recording technology to convert the analog stereo to high-quality digital stereo compatible with Dolby
Digital decoding surround receivers. Note that a portion of the hard disc capacity is reserved for the TV Pause feature
and is not available for video recording.
Dual Digital Tuners
Dual digital tuners give you a high level of flexibility when using TV Disc. For example, you can record one analog or
digital channel from CableCARD™ on one antenna input (Ant-1) while viewing a different non-scrambled analog or
digital channel on the other antenna input (Ant-2). You can record a non-scrambled analog or digital channel from
Ant-2 while viewing an analog or digital channel from CableCARD™. Or you can view a device connected to a different
input while recording a channel from CableCARD™, Ant-1, or Ant-2. Note that due to the unidirectional nature of
CableCARD service, it is not possible to view one CableCARD channel and record another CableCARD channel at the
same time.
Digital Cable Ready (CableCARD™)
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV is “Plug-and-Play” ready. It can descramble a cable provider’s one-way digital
signals with the use of a CableCARD security module. The CableCARD is used in place of a traditional cable box
to access digital cable programming (including high definition). Contact your local cable provider for availability
information and service details.
NetCommand
®
Home Network Control System
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV offers a new level of networking that can seamlessly integrate selected older A/V
products with new and future digital products. NetCommand supports IEEE 1394 connections, Audio Video Control
system (AV/C), 5C copy protection, and IR (infrared) control of selected older products, such as VCRs, DVD players,
cable boxes, and satellite receivers. NetCommand has the capability of learning remote control signals directly from
many devices, allowing you to create a customized NetCommand home-theater system that works best for your
viewing.
Special Features of Your TV
12 Chapter 1. Television Overview
16:9 Widescreen Picture Format
Enjoy a full theatrical experience in the comfort of your home. View pictures as film directors intended them. Digital TV
broadcasts, DVDs and newer video game consoles support this widescreen format.
Memory Card Reader
You can display a slide show of your favorite JPEG pictures or listen to MP3 or WMA audio selections that have been
recorded on compatible memory cards.
TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide System
An eight-day on-screen program guide that can be used with cable, over-the-air and CableCARD™ reception. The
subscription-free guide system lists regular, digital and high-definition programming. This system offers multiple
sorting options to help you find the programs you want to watch and gives you easy program recording. Program
listings are downloaded while your TV is turned off, so that you have current program information available every day.
Note that when the system is first set up, it may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings and then it
may take up to one week to receive all eight days of TV program listings.
Multiple Options for Connecting a Home Theater Personal Computer
(Models WD-62927 and WD-73927)
In addition to the PC input available on HDMI-2, models WD-62927 and WD-73927 also have a 15-pin PC monitor
input. In addition to the resolutions available via HDMI-2, This input also accepts 1920 x 1080, 60-Hz signals to provide
maximum performance when used with Home Theater PC/Media Centers.
Chapter 1. Television Overview 13
Memory Card Reader and Front-Panel Inputs
Memory Card Reader
Figure 1
The memory card reader has four card slots that accept
a variety of popular memory card types. The reader
lets you view JPEG pictures from many digital cameras
and allows you to listen to MP3 or WMA audio
files recorded from computers or other digital
recording devices.
The card slots are designed for the specific types
of cards listed below. Other cards or objects
should not be inserted into the slots as this may
damage the TV. See the discussion of memory
cards in chapter 6 for details about JPEG, MP3
and WMA file types that are compatible with the
TV.
Card Compatibility
CARD 1 CARD 2
SmartMedia™
MultiMediaCard™
Secure Digital (SD)
CARD 3 CARD 4
CompactFlash®
(Types I and II)
Memory Stick PRO™
Microdrive® Memory Stick™
CARD 1 SmartMedia
TM
CARD 3 CompactFlash
®
MicroDrive
®
CARD 4 PRO
TM
%*%#4
CARD 2 Multimedia Card
TM
SD Card
1

2
3
Figure 1. Memory Card Reader
|LLL-l394 S-v|DLO v|DLO L - AUD|O - P
Figure 2. Input 3 and IEEE 1394 input/output on front panel
Input 3 and IEEE 139 Input/Output
Figure 2
These jacks allow for convenient connection of audio/
video devices to the front of the TV.
Note that if you connect to the S-VIDEO terminal, the
VIDEO terminal is deactivated. The VIDEO terminal is
active only when there is no S-Video connection.
Use the IEEE 1394 input/output to connect IEEE 1394
devices, such as some camcorders. This connection
works the same as the rear IEEE 1394 connections.
Please refer to the NetCommand® information in
Chapter 3 for details.
Lift cover to access
card reader and front
input jacks.
1 Chapter 1. Television Overview
Front Control Panel
The shaded buttons on the front control panel are duplicated on the remote control. The top row of labels shows the
control functions when there are no TV menus displayed on the screen. The bottom row of labels shows the control
functions when the TV menus are displayed on the screen or when a special function has been activated. See “Remote
Control Overview” for further details on the functions of these buttons.
4:45&.
3&4&5
If the TV does not respond to either the remote control or the front panel controls and/or
does not power off, press the SYSTEM RESET button with a pointed item, such as the end
point of a paperclip. The TV will turn off and the TIMER light will flash quickly for about one
minute. When the TIMER light stops flashing, you may again turn on the TV. The changes
you made the last time the TV was on before you used the SYSTEM RESET button may be
lost. Any changes that you previously saved are not lost.
A/ V Reset
There may be times when you wish to reset the A/V (Audio and Video) settings back to the factory defaults. To return
all the settings at once, press GUIDE and FORMAT on the front panel at the same time. To reset the defaults for
individual devices, use the A/V Memory Reset selection on the Audio/Video menu.
Front-Panel Indicator Lights
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Color TV Condition Additional Information
None (indicator off) Normal TV on or standby condition. Normal operation.
Green, rapid blinking TV just powered off and lamp is
cooling.
Begins to blink 30 seconds after turning off TV. TV
can be turned on before it begins to blink or after the
blinking stops, but not while the indicator is blinking.
Normal operation.
Yellow, steady Lamp nearing end of useful life. This is a recommendation to have a new lamp ready
before the current lamp stops illuminating. See
Appendix G for ordering information.
Yellow, blinking 1. Lamp access door is open or not
secure.
TV will not operate until lamp access door is secure.
See Appendix G for installation information.
2. No lamp installed. TV will not operate without a lamp. See Appendix G
for installation information.
Red, steady Lamp no longer illuminates and has
reached the end of the lamp life.
Replace the lamp. The TV will not operate when
the lamp no longer illuminates. See Appendix G for
installation information.
Front Control Panel
1. Shaded buttons are duplicates of buttons on the remote control 2. System Reset 3. Lamp indicator
4. Status indicator 5. Power/Timer indicator
1 1 1 2 3 55
Chapter 1. Television Overview 15
Power/Timer Indicator
Indicator Color TV Condition Additional Information
None (indicator off) TV is powered OFF. Normal operation.
Green, steady TV is powered ON. Normal operation.
Green, rapid blinking 1. TV just plugged into AC outlet. Wait until blinking stops before turning on
(approximately 1 minute). Normal operation.
2. AC just restored after power
failure.
Wait until blinking stops before turning on
(approximately 1 minute). Normal operation.
3. TV Rebooting after System Reset
used.
Wait until blinking stops before turning on
(approximately 1-2 minutes). Normal operation.
4. TV Rebooting after power
fluctuation or receiving abnormal
digital signals from digital channel,
CableCARD™, or digital device.
Wait until blinking stops before turning on
(approximately 1 minute). Normal operation.
5. You have begun the procedure
to update software from an
authorized flash memory device.
For detailed information, see the instructions
that accompany the authorized software update.
Important: Do not use non-authorized software at
any time.
Green, slow blinking TV powered off and automatic-on
timer is set.
Normal operation. TV can be turned on at any time.
Status Indicator
Indicator Color TV Condition Additional Information
None (indicator off) Normal TV on or standby condition. Normal operation.
Yellow, steady Room temperature is too high. TV will not operate when the ambient room
temperature is too high. Turn off the TV and wait
until the room temperature drops.
Red, either steady or
blinking
TV may require service. Turn off the TV and unplug the set from the AC power
source. Wait one minute and then plug the set back
in.
If the LED is still on, contact your dealer or a
Mitsubishi Authorized Service Center. See
www.mitsubishi-tv.com or call 1-800-332-2119 to
receive Authorized Service Center information.
Front Control Panel, continued
16 Chapter 1. Television Overview
Remote Control
Overview
Figure 1, next page
1. Slide Switch: Selects the A/V product to be controlled
by the remote control. Select TV for NetCommand®
device control.
2. Numbers: Individually select channels or enter
information into menus.
3. SQV (SuperQuickView™): Scans through memorized
lists of favorite channels.
. CH(ANNEL)/PAGE: Scans up or down through
memorized channels. Pages up and down through
screens when used with TV Guide On Screen®,
ChannelView™, a satellite receiver, some cable boxes,
memory card playlists and JPEG thumbnails. Skips
through DVD chapters.
5. DEVICE: Displays the Device Selection menu in which
you can select the device to view (ANT-1 and ANT-2, TV
Disc, or devices connected to the TV’s inputs, including
IEEE 1394 devices).
6. ADJUST: Press to navigate menus, change
settings, and move the PIP on-screen location.
Operates many NetCommand® functions. Navigate TV
Guide On Screen® and change settings. Performs skip
forward and backward functions during TV Pause.
7. TV MENU: Displays the on-screen menu
system.
8. ENTER: Selects a channel number or menu item.
9. DEVICE MENU: Displays the menu for devices
connected to the TV, including CableCARD™. For VCR
or DVDs, press once to display the transport menu,
press again to display the VCR or DVD menu. Displays
and removes options menus for TV Guide On Screen.
Opens the Media Dialog Box for memory cards.
10. INFO: Press to display an on-screen summary of the
current device used and any broadcast information
available (including current V-Chip information). See
chapter 6 for details on the on-screen display.
While in TV Guide On Screen, press repeatedly to cycle
through the available info box sizes.
Press twice to display the TV Pause slider when this
feature is active.
11. V-CHIP: Turns the V-Chip Lock on or off.
12. PIP/POP: Turns on PIP and cycles through PIP and
POP display choices.
13. PIP CH: Scrolls up or down through memorized
channels for PIP
1. PIP DEVICE: Displays PIP Selection menu to select the
PIP or POP image source device
15. REC (Record): Displays the Record menu for setting
up recordings to TV Disc or other recordable device.
Sets up recordings while in ChannelView or the TV
Guide On Screen Listings screen. Records with a VCR.
16. REW/REV: Reverse scans in TV Pause or TimeShuttle.
Rewinds a VCR. Reverse scans TV Disc, DVD, A/V Disc,
or memory card file.
17. POWER: Turns power on and off for the TV and other
A/V products.
18. QV (QuickView™): Switches between the current
channel and last channel viewed.
19. SUB/CANCEL: For digital channels, adds separator
between main and sub-channel numbers. Clears SQV
and some menu entries, and cancels recordings.
20. VOLUME: Changes sound level.
21. MUTE: Turns sound off or back on.
22. GUIDE: Press to display or remove TV Guide On
Screen or ChannelView for ANT-1 and 2. Displays
Track List for TV Disc and A/V Disc. Displays program
guide for satellite receiver, or DVD Disc menu. Displays
thumbnails or playlists for memory card files.
23. Light: Located on the right side of the remote control,
this feature illuminates buttons or labels.
2. HOME: Exits TV on-screen menus displays; exits the
TV Guide On Screen system and returns to TV viewing.
25. AUDIO: Selects individual audio settings for
adjustment.
26. VIDEO: Selects individual video settings for adjustment.
27. EXCH: Exchanges PIP or POP and main TV picture.
28. SLEEP: Sets the TV to turn off within 2 hours. See the
next page for setup instructions.
29 CONNECT: Initiates IEEE 1394 peer-to-peer
connections.
30. FORMAT: Changes the shape and size of the main TV
picture.
31. PAUSE: With TV Pause enabled (with the Always
or On Request option), pauses program viewing and
activates TV Pause to allow forward/backward scans
in a broadcast program (when no PIP/POP image is
displayed). Returns to TV viewing from TV Pause. With
TV Pause disabled (Off), operates as standard pause
by freezing a broadcast TV picture (when no PIP/POP
image is displayed). When PIP/POP is displayed,
freezes that image. Pauses TV Disc, a VCR, DVD, A/V
Disc, or memory card file playback.
32. PLAY: Plays the TV Disc, a VCR, DVD, A/V Disc, or
memory card file.
33. FF/FWD: Forward scans in TV Pause. Fast forwards
a VCR. Forward scans TV Disc, DVD, A/V Disc, or
memory card file.
3. STOP: Stops play of the TV Disc, a VCR, DVD, A/V Disc,
or memory card file.
Chapter 1. Television Overview 17
Remote Control, continued
POWER
PAUSE REC
3
6
9
Qv
DEvlCE
MENU HOME
1
7
SQv
4
SUB/CANCEL
2
5
8
0
Tv MENU GUlDE
MUTE CH vOL
REW/REv FF/FWD
PLAY
STOP
SLEEP
lNFO v-CHlP AUDlO vlDEO
CONNECT
Tv AUDlO
CABLE/DBS/DTv DvD vCR
FORMAT
PlP CH PlP/POP EXCH
PlP DEvlCE
PAGE
DEvlCE
10
11
12
13
1
15
16
1
2
3

5
6
7
8
9
25
2
23
22
21
20
26
27
28
29
30
17
18
19
31
32
33
3
Figure 1. Remote Control Overview
Battery Installation
Figure 2
Installing the Batteries:
1. Remove the remote control’s back cover by gently
pressing the ribbed tab in the direction of the arrow
and sliding off the cover.
2. Load the batteries, making sure the polarities (+) and
(-) are correct. For best results, insert the negative (-)
side first.
""BMLBMJOF
CBUUFSJFT
Figure 2. Operation: Installing the Batteries
Care
For Best Results from the Remote Control:
• Be within 20 feet of the equipment.
• Do not press two or more buttons at the same time
unless instructed.
• Do not allow unit to get wet or become heated.
• Avoid dropping on hard surfaces.
• Do not use harsh chemicals to clean. Use only a soft,
lightly moistened cloth.
• Do not mix new and old batteries.
• Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.
• Use only AA alkaline batteries.
Hint: If the remote is in the TV layer and does
not function, press POWER and 935 to reset the
remote.
Sleep Timer
Setting the Sleep Timer:
1. Press SLEEP on the remote control.
2. Each additional press of SLEEP increases the time
displayed by 30 minutes up until the maximum value
of 120 minutes.
3. After five seconds of inactivity, the message will
disappear.
4. Press SLEEP to view the time remaining before the
timer turns the TV off.
Cancelling the Sleep Timer:
1. Press SLEEP to display the on-screen message.
2. Press SLEEP repeatedly until OFF is displayed.
Note: After fve seconds of inactivity, the mes-
sage box disappears.
18 Chapter 1. Television Overview
TV Back Panel
1. Antenna (ANT-1 MAIN, ANT-2 AUX)
ANT-1 MAIN and ANT-2 AUX can each receive both digital
and analog over-the-air channels from a VHF/UHF antenna
or non-scrambled digital/analog cable source.
Your primary viewing signal source should be connected to
ANT-1 MAIN. ANT-1 MAIN must be used to view premium
subscription cable TV service authorized by the CableCARD™
access card. The CableCARD access card is provided by
your local cable company. ANT-2 AUX can continue to receive
over-the-air or non-scrambled cable signals.
2. IR EMITTER NetCommand
®
IR Emitters connected to these jacks are used by the
NetCommand system of the TV to control external analog
devices such as cable boxes, VCRs, DVDs, satellite
receivers and audio receivers. This system is also
coordinated with the TV Guide On Screen® system for the
control of cable boxes and to activate the record feature of
your VCR. Either connection can be used for
NetCommand functions.
3. INPUT 1 and 2
( Audio/ Video 1 and 2)
Inputs 1 and 2 can be used for the connection of a VCR,
Super VHS (S-VHS) VCR, DVD player, standard satellite
receiver or other A/V device to the TV. Please note that
if S-VIDEO and VIDEO are available for the input, you
must choose to connect only one. They cannot both be
connected at the same time.
. COMPONENT 1–3 Inputs
YPbPr (80i/80p/720p/1080i)
These inputs can be used for the connection of devices with
component video outputs, such as a DVD player, external
HDTV receiver, or compatible video game system. Please see
Appendix A for signal compatibility.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i)
lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
CableCARD¹ USEWlTH ANT 1 CARD TOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE 1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lR EMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
PC lNPUT - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA, SvGA,
W-SvGA, XGA, W-XGA,
1280 X 720, 1920 X 1080
10
1
2
3

5
8
7
11
12
9
6
Note: 15-pin D-subminiature PC
input (item 6) offered on models
WD-62927 and WD-73927 only.
Chapter 1. Television Overview 19
TV Back Panel, continued
5. DVI Analog Audio
Unlike HDMI, DVI does not carry audio information on the
same cable. Use these analog stereo audio inputs when
using the HDMI input with a device that outputs DVI instead of
HDMI, such as DVI output from a DVD player.
6. PC Input (models WD-62927, WD-73927 only)
(VGA/W-VGA/SVGA/W-SVGA/XGA/W-XGA/1280 x
720, 1920 x 1080, 60 Hz)
This input can be used to connect a personal computer.
Please see Appendix A for signal compatibility. For audio,
use DVI Analog Audio 2 input.
7. AUDIO OUTPUT, RECORD OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT sends analog audio of the program
currently shown on the screen to an A/V surround sound
receiver or stereo system. Digital audio from digital
channels, FireWire® (DTVLink/IEEE 1394) devices and
HDMI devices is converted to analog audio by the TV. If
you do not have a digital A/V receiver, this should be the
only audio connection between the TV and your analog A/V
receiver or stereo system.
RECORD OUTPUT sends analog audio and video to a VCR
for recording purposes. The program on this output can
be either the one you are currently watching or a different
one. Signals from digital channels and FireWire (IEEE 1394)
devices are converted to analog signals. There is no video
signal when copy restrictions are in effect. Component,
HDMI, and PC inputs are not available for recording.
8. HDMI™ 1 and 2
The HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
uncompressed standard and high-definition digital video
formats and PCM digital audio format.
Use these inputs to connect to EIA/CEA-861 compliant
devices such as a high-definition receiver or DVD player.
These inputs support 480i, 480p, 720p and 1080i video
formats.
These inputs can also be used as a DVI connection with
separate analog audio inputs. An optional HDMI-to-DVI
adaptor or cable is necessary to make this connection and
may be available from your local electronics retailer. When
using the optional HDMI-to-DVI adapter, the DVI analog
audio inputs on your TV allow you to receive left and right
stereo audio from your DVI device.
This input is HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Copy
Protection) compliant.
HDMI 2
HDMI 2 also allows the TV to display DVI or HDMI output
from a PC. To view PC video on the TV, you must activate
the PC option in NetCommand. You can do this during
initial NetCommand setup by selecting the PC option in the
Device Setup screen. To do this at any time afterwards,
use the NetCommand Add function.
To listen to audio from a PC when using PC DVI output, you
must connect the PC audio output to the TV’s DVI Analog
Audio 2, located above the HDMI 2 input.
9. MonitorLink/RS-232C Control
When used as a MonitorLink port with a Mitsubishi
receiver/controller, provides enhanced functions such as
automatic power on/off and input-port selection.
When used as an RS-232C connection, provides a port
for an external controller that uses RS-232C signals for
communication. For RS-232C-compatible signal protocols,
please visit www.mitsubishi-tv.com.
10. DTVLink™/IEEE 139
These jacks allow the TV to connect to external IEEE 1394
digital products by means of a single cable. Two jacks are
provided for this purpose, which allow for a high degree
of flexibility for connecting your NetCommand-controlled
system. Detailed information regarding IEEE 1394
connection requirements is in Chapter 2, “Connecting.”
11. CableCARD™ Slot
The CableCARD access card from your cable TV service
provider is inserted into this slot. The top of the card
should face in the direction indicated by CARD TOP .
CableCARD is a nationwide standard system that allows
your local cable TV provider to supply you with an access
card customized to your account. This card allows the
TV to receive, decode and unscramble the premium
digital channels included in your cable TV subscription
without the use of a cable box. See page 84 for additional
CableCARD information and activation instructions.
If your cable company is not currently offering CableCARD
access cards, you will need to use a cable box provided
and authorized by your local cable company to view
scrambled channels.
12. Digital Audio Output
This output sends Dolby® Digital or PCM digital audio to
your digital A/V surround sound receiver. Analog audio
from analog channels and devices is converted by the TV
to PCM digital audio. If you have a digital A/V receiver,
in most cases this should be the only audio connection
between the TV and your A/V receiver. If you have MP3
audio sources, however, you need to connect the TV’s
analog AUDIO OUTPUT (left and right) to your A/V receiver.
20 Chapter 1. Television Overview
Additional Information
Do not attempt to update the software of this TV with software or cards that are not provided
by or authorized by Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. Non-authorized software may
damage the TV and will not be covered by the warranty.
IMPORTANT
Demo Track
The TV Disc in some TVs comes a with a demo track that
plays in a continuous loop. To delete the demo track:
1. Select the TV Disc as the viewing source.
2. Press GUIDE to display the Track List.
3. Highlight the track name “demo track” and press
CANCEL.
4. Press CANCEL again to confirm the deletion.
System Reset Button
If the TV doesn’t respond to either the remote control
or the front panel controls or will not power off, press
the SYSTEM RESET button on the front panel with a
pointed item such as the point of a ball point pen or
end tip of a paperclip.
The TV will turn off and the green LED will flash
quickly for about one minute. When the green LED
stops flashing, you may turn on the TV again. The
changes you made while the TV was most recently
on, before you used the SYSTEM RESET button, may
be lost; the changes you made previously, however,
are not lost. Only those changes since the last power
on may be lost when the system reset button is
pressed. All other settings are retained.
Using the Reset Menu for
Reset of the TV or TV Disc
Select any device from the Device Selection menu,
except for TV Disc. Press TV MENU followed by
1,2,3 to see the RESET SERVICE MENU to reset the
TV or TV Disc.
Read on-screen warnings before
proceeding, as some user data or
settings may be erased.
Your choices are:
Reset System Defaults (CAUTION: All settings,
except V-Chip, will be reset to the original
factory defaults).
Reset TV Disc (Track List will not be affected).
Erase TV Disc (CAUTION: Track List will be
cleared).
Reformat TV Disc (CAUTION: Track List will be
cleared).
Portions of the advanced circuitry of this TV must continue to operate even when the TV is turned
off. Some of these circuits therefore need to be cooled at all times. A low-power standby fan may
be heard in a quiet environment. This is normal operation.
IMPORTANT
Chapter
2
Connecting
External Devices and NetCommand® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Standard Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . 25
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
A/V Receiver (Stereo System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DVI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video . . . . 29
HDMI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MonitorLink Control/RS-232C Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IR Emitter NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Compatible IEEE 139 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
22 Chapter 2. Connecting
Connecting External Devices and NetCommand® Setup
Mode|
M-VR800 &
M-VR1000
Mode|
M-VR900 &
M-VR700
Mode|
L|festy|e ®28
Mode|
AVR-2700
Mode|
DTR-9.1
Mode|
VR-2080
Mode|
SR8200
Mode|
VSX-D557
Mode|
VSX-49TX
Mode|
RSX-1065
Mode|
STR-DE825
Mode|
RX-V2095
Mode|
RX-V2200
Dev|ce Aud|o Output to AV Rece|ver Inputs by Name
vCR vCR 1 vCR vCR vCR-1 video 1 video 1 vCR1 vCR/Tape vCR 1/DvR video 2 video 1 vCR 1 vCR 1
Satellite Receiver Aux Cable/DBS AUX CD video 3 video 3 DSS CD SAT video 4 Tv/DBS Tv/DBS D-Tv/LD
DvD Player DvD DvD (built-in) DvDvDP DvD video 4 DvD LD/SAT DvD/LD video 5 TAPE/MD CD DvD
Tv Monitor Output
(& Digital Audio)
Tv Tv Tv Tv/DBS video 4 video 4 Tv DvD/Tv Tv video 1 DvD/LD DvD/LD CBL/SAT
$IBSU
M|tsub|sh| 1 M|tsub|sh| 2 Bose Denon Integra Kenwood Marantz P|oneer 1 P|oneer 2 Rote| Sony Yamaha 1 Yamaha 2
AV
Receiver
TV
Device to be
connected
stereo and/or digital
audio cables
video and stereo
audio cables
stereo and/or digital audio cables
*3&NJUUFST
NetCommand is able to control many current audio and video devices by sending remote control signals from the TV
to each device through IR emitters. Additionally, it is also able to learn the remote control signals used by most audio
video devices not already in the TV’s memory. NetCommand can automatically switch the TV and compatible or
learned Audio/Video (A/V) Receivers to the correct input used with each device. It is important that the inputs on the
TV and A/V receiver back panels match the NetCommand setup that is displayed on screen.
To simplify the installation of NetCommand, there is a step-by-step on-screen NetCommand Setup procedure in this
chapter, which details the type and brands of devices you are connecting to the TV. The NetCommand Setup also
assigns preset TV and
A/V receiver inputs for
each device. You should
connect each device to
the TV input (both audio
and video) and to the A/V
receiver (audio) as shown
in the figure below. If you
connect devices to inputs
other than the ones shown
as presets, you must
change the NetCommand
setup accordingly. See the
Edit NetCommand information starting on page 43.
The following charts show which preset inputs you should use on the TV and A/V receiver.
Chart 1 shows the default TV inputs existing in NetCommand.
Chart 2 shows the A/V receiver inputs used by A/V receiver models already known by NetCommand.
Chart 1
NetCommand Default Device Audio and Video Outputs to TV Inputs
Cable for CableCARD™ Service ANT-1
Antenna/Cable (digital/analog) ANT-1 if primary viewing source,
ANT-2 if secondary viewing source
Cable box COMPONENT-1
VCR Input-1
Satellite Receiver (SAT) Input-2
Camcorder Input-3 (on front panel)
DVD Player COMPONENT-2
PC (models WD-62827, WD-73827) HDMI-2
PC (models WD-62927, WD-73927) PC INPUT
After using NetCommand Setup, you may go to the NetCommand menu at any time to change the inputs you used for
connecting each device, custom name devices, add devices not included in the presets above or delete devices no
longer used. See Edit NetCommand. See Helpful Hints at the end of this chapter for additional information on device
setup.
Chapter 2. Connecting 23
Additional connection cables are
not provided with the TV. They are
available at most electronics stores.
IMPORTANT
Connecting a Wall Outlet Cable or Cable Box
Wall Outlet Cable
(can be used with a CableCARD™)
Figure 1
It is very important to connect the incoming cable
for your primary viewing source to ANT-1, especially
for CableCARD™ use and to download TV Guide On
Screen® listings.
1. Connect the primary incoming coaxial lead cable to
ANT 1/MAIN on the TV back panel.
2. For an optional secondary antenna source, connect
an antenna (or cable) to ANT 2/AUX.
3. If you have subscribed to a CableCARD™ service,
the CableCARD can now be inserted into the
CableCARD SLOT. Using a Phillips screwdriver,
remove the CableCARD cover screws. Insert the
CableCARD, then replace the cover and screws. The
top of the card should face in the direction the CARD
TOP arrow indicates.
Additional CableCARD information is on page 84.
Detailed TV Guide On Screen information is in the
separate User’s Manual.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i)
lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
To ANT 1/MAIN
To ANT 2/AUX
TV back pane|
deta||
3. Cab|eCARD
TM
SLOT
(cover removedj
1. Pr|mary Wa||
Out|et Cab|e
2. Opt|ona|
Secondary
Antenna or
Cab|e
Figure 1. Wall Outlet Cable
Standard Cable Box
(cable box, other than an HDTV cable box; this setup
allows two-channel PIP)
Figure 2
3 coaxial cables and one two-way RF splitter are required.
These are not included with the TV.
Note: See page 29 to connect an HDTV cable box.
1. Connect the incoming cable to IN on an RF splitter.
2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF
splitter to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel.
3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF
splitter to IN on the standard cable box.
4. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the cable
box to ANT-2 AUX on the TV back panel.
5. After the cable box is connected to ANT-2 AUX as
shown, use the NetCommand menu Change option
to change the default connection for the cable box,
go to the RF Connection for Cable screen and do the
following:
a. Check the RF check box.
b. For antenna, select ANT-2.
c. For Channel, select the channel to which the TV
must be tuned for your cable box. The default
channel is 3.
When this setup is complete, you can use the TV remote
control to change channels on the cable box.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
lN OUT
IN
O
U
T
O
U
T
T
W
O
W
A
Y
S
P
L
IT
T
E
R
TV back pane|
Cab|e box
back pane|
deta||
RF
Sp||tter
To ANT 1/MAIN
To ANT 2/AUX
Incom|ng
Cab|e
Figure 2. Connecting a Cable Box
Note: To use a cable box connected to ANT-2 as shown
above, you must make the noted NetCommand changes.
The changes are required to change the NetCommand
cable-box default connection (Component-1) to the
actual connection (ANT-2).
2 Chapter 2. Connecting
Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF
Leads
Figure 4
A UHF/VHF combiner is required. This is not included with the
TV, but is available at most electronics stores.
1. Connect the UHF and VHF antenna leads to the UHF/
VHF combiner.
2. Push the combiner onto ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back
panel.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080iï lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
External
Antenna
or Cable
Back
view
Side
view
UHF Antenna
(Channels 14-69ï
vHF Antenna
(Channels 2-13ï
300-Ohm-to-
75-Ohm
Combiner
Flat Twin Lead
UHF
vHF

4O!.4-!).
Tv back panel
Figure 4. Connecting separate UHF and VHF Antennas
Connecting an Antenna with a Single Lead or Antennas with
Separate UHF and VHF Leads
Antenna with a Single Lead
(not for use with CableCARD™)
Figure 3
For antennas with flat twin leads
A 300-ohm-to-75-ohm transformer is required. This is not
included with the TV, but is available at most electronics stores.
1. For an antenna with flat twin leads, connect the
300-ohm twin leads to the 300-ohm-to-75-ohm
transformer.
2. Push the 75-ohm side of the transformer onto ANT-1
MAIN on the TV back panel.
For cable or antenna with coaxial lead
Connect the coaxial lead directly to ANT-1 MAIN on
the TV back panel.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080iï lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
300-Ohm
Flat Twin
Lead
Optional 300-Ohm-
to-75-Ohm
Matching Transformer
75-Ohm
Coaxial
Cable

Tv back panel detail
Figure 3. Connecting a Single Antenna
Mitsubishi strongly recommends you avoid using
antennas with flat twin leads. Flat twin lead
antenna wires are subject to interference which
may adversely affect the performance of the TV.
We recommend using coaxial antenna cable.
Chapter 2. Connecting 25
Connecting a VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable
Connecting VCR Audio and Video to the TV
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet
Cable (Audio & Video)
Figure 5
A two-way RF splitter, 3 coaxial cables, right and left audio
cables, and an S-video or video cable are required. These are
not included with the TV but are available at most electronics
stores.
1. Connect the incoming cable or Antenna to IN on the
RF splitter.
2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF
splitter to ANTENNA IN on the VCR back panel.
3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF
splitter to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel. This
connection also allows you to use the TV Guide On
Screen® feature.
4. To use the TV speakers with the VCR, connect a set
of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the VCR back
panel to INPUT-1 AUDIO-LEFT (MONO) and AUDIO-
RIGHT on the TV back panel. The red cable connects
to the R (right) channel and the white cable connects
to the L (left) channel. If your VCR is mono (non-
stereo), connect only the white (left) cable.
Figure 5. Connecting a VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable
5. Connect either an S-Video or Video cable from
VIDEO OUT on the VCR back panel to INPUT-1
VIDEO on the TV back panel. Only one type of
video cable should be connected. S-Video is
recommended, if available.
6. For NetCommand®-controlled recordings (including
TV Guide On Screen), connect a set of audio cables
from AUDIO IN on the VCR back panel to RECORD
OUTPUT/AUDIO-LEFT and AUDIO-RIGHT on the TV
back panel. The red cable connects to the R (right)
channel and the white cable connects to the L (left)
channel.
7. Complete the NetCommand controlled recordings
connections by connecting a Video cable from
VIDEO IN on the VCR back panel to RECORD
OUTPUT/VIDEO on the TV back panel.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080iï lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080iï
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONOï
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 2 / AUX
ANTENNA
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
lN
lN
R R
L L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO S-VIDEO
4.
4.
IN
O
U
T
O
U
T
T
W
O
W
A
Y
S
P
L
IT
T
E
R
5.
5.
lncoming
Cable
RF Sp||tter
1.
VCR back pane|
6.
6.
3.
3.
2.
7.
7.
2.
lf your vCR has a video
channel or RF ON/OFF
switch, set it to OFF.
Attach on|y one type of
v|deo cab|e. S-v|deo
recommended |f
ava||ab|e.
video cable
(composite videoï
S-video cable
TV back pane|
Note:
NetCommand® will assume your VCR is connected
to inputs as shown on this page. If you use any other
inputs for your VCR or add a second VCR, this change
must match in the NetCommand system. See Edit
NetCommand... in Chapter 3 for more information.
26 Chapter 2. Connecting
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video)
Figure 6
A two-way RF splitter, 4 coaxial cables, right and left audio
cables and an S-Video or Video cable are required. These are
not included with the TV but are available at most electronics
stores.
1. Connect the incoming cable to IN on the RF splitter.
2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF
splitter to ANTENNA IN on the cable box back panel.
3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF
splitter to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel. This
connection also allows you to use the TV Guide On
Screen® feature.
4. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the cable
box to ANTENNA IN on the VCR back panel.
5. Connect one coaxial cable from ANTENNA OUT on
the VCR back panel to ANT-2 AUX on the TV back
panel (optional).
6. To use the TV speakers with the VCR, connect a
set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the VCR
back panel to INPUT-1 AUDIO-LEFT (MONO) and
AUDIO-RIGHT on the TV back panel. The red cable
connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable
Figure 6. Connecting a VCR to a Cable Box
Note: NetCommand®
will assume your
VCR is connected
to inputs as shown
on this page. If you
use any other inputs
for your VCR or add
a second VCR, this
change must match
in the NetCommand
system. See Edit
NetCommand... in
Chapter 3 for more
information.
Connecting a VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video)
connects to the L (left) channel. If your VCR is mono
(non-stereo), connect only the white (left) cable.
7. Connect either an S-Video or composite video cable
from VIDEO OUT on the VCR back panel to INPUT 1
VIDEO on the TV back panel. Connect only one type
of video cable. S-Video is recommended, if available.
8. For NetCommand®-controlled recordings (including
TV Guide On Screen)
a. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO IN on
the VCR back panel to RECORD OUTPUT/AUDIO-
LEFT (MONO) and AUDIO-RIGHT on the TV back
panel. The red cable connects to the R (right)
channel and the white cable connects to the L
(left) channel.
b. Connect a video cable from VIDEO IN on the VCR
back panel to RECORD OUTPUT/VIDEO on the
TV back panel.
Note: With this connection configuration, it is
possible to view live cable programs through the VCR.
For best picture quality, however, always view live
cable programs directly from the cable box instead of
the VCR.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i)
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
3
lNPUT
HS-U748
Cable Box
back panel section
4.
IN
O
U
T
O
U
T
TW
O
W
AY SPLITTER
lN
OUT
lncoming
Cable
RF Splitter
1.
vCR back panel
3.
3.
2.
5.
7.
7.
8b.
2.
6.
6.
4.
8a.
8a.
lf your vCR has a
video channel or RF
ON/OFF switch, set it
to OFF.
Attach only one video
cable type (step 7).
S-video recommended
if available.
8b.
TV back
pane|
5.
Chapter 2. Connecting 27
A/V Receiver (Stereo System)
Figure 7
Most setups require either a digital audio cable or stereo audio
cables. In some circumstances, you may need to connect both
digital audio and stereo audio. A digital audio cable is provided
with the TV. Stereo audio cables are not included.
• To connect an analog A/V receiver:
Connect a set of stereo audio cables from AUDIO
OUTPUT on the TV back panel to the TV AUDIO
INPUT on the back of the A/V receiver. The red cable
connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable
connects to the L (left) channel.
• To connect a digital A/V receiver with Dolby®
Digital surround sound:
Connect one end of the digital audio cable supplied
with the TV to DIGITAL AUDIO on the back of the
TV. Connect the other end to the COAXIAL DIGITAL
INPUT on the back of the A/V receiver.
lN
lNPUT-2
(COAXlAL)
T
lN
lNPUT-2
(COAXlAL)
COMPONENT YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
COMPONENT YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
A/v Receiver Rear Panel
Tv Back Panel

Use only if
connecting a
Dolby digital
A/v receiver.
Figure 7. Connecting an A/V receiver
On rare occasions, an HDMI signal may be copy-
restricted and cannot be output from the TV as a digital
signal. To hear these copy-protected signals through the
A/V receiver, use connections for analog A/V receivers.
MP3 audio from memory cards cannot be connected
to digital audio. To listen to MP3 playback from the TV
memory card player through your A/V receiver, use the
connections for an analog A/V receiver
Check the A/V receiver’s Owner’s Guide for information
concerning use of the digital input and switching between
digital sound and analog stereo sound from the TV.
Satellite Receiver or Other Device with
S-Video
Figure 8
An S-Video cable and audio cables are required. These are not
included with the TV.
1. Connect an S-Video cable from VIDEO OUT on the
satellite receiver back panel to INPUT-2 S-VIDEO on
the TV back panel.
2. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on
the satellite receiver back panel to INPUT-2 AUDIO
on the TV back panel. The red cable connects to the
R (right) channel and the white cable connects to the
L (left) channel.
Note: Refer to the Satellite Receiver Owner’s Guide
for Dish Antenna connections
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) INPUT
1 2
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDIO-
RIGHT
DTV/CABLE/
VHF/UHF
ANT1 / MAIN ANT2 / AUX
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUTPUT CableCARD™USEWITH ANT1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDIO-
RIGHT
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
DVI
Analog Audio
1 2
VIDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDIO-
RIGHT
MONITORLINK™/HDMI
VIDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDIO PCM LINEAR
1 2
IEEE1394
INPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
IREMITTER
¸
',INK¸

INPUT
PC - 60Hz
VGA, W-VGA,
SVGA, W-SVGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) INPUT
1 2
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDIO-
RIGHT
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDIO-
RIGHT

(Y/Cï
L
R
L
R
1 2
vlDEO OUT AUDlO OUT AUDlO lN
Tv back panel
Any S-video Device
White
Red
White
Red
Figure 8. Connecting a Satellite Receiver with S-Video
Note: NetCommand® assumes you connected your
satellite receiver to Input-2. If you add a second
satellite receiver or use any other inputs for your
satellite receiver, this change must match in the
NetCommand system. See Editing NetCommand
Setup in Chapter 3 for more information.
Connecting an A/V Receiver (Stereo System)
Connecting a Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S -Video
28 Chapter 2. Connecting
Connecting a DVD Player with Component Video
Connecting a DVI Device
DVD Player with Component Video
Figure 9
Component video cables and audio cables are required.
These are not included with the TV.
1. Connect the Component Video cables from Y/Pr/
Pb VIDEO OUT on the back of the DVD player to
COMPONENT-2 on the TV back panel, matching the
correct connection:
• Y to Y (Green)
• Pr to Pr (Red)
• Pb to Pb (Blue)
2. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT
on the back of the DVD player to COMPONENT-2
AUDIO Input on the TV back panel. The red cable
connects to the R (right) channel, and the white cable
connects to the L (left) channel.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
OUTPUT
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
OUTPUT
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
vlDEO
S
Y
CB
CR
vlDEOOUT
BlTSTREAM/PCM 5.1 CH SURROUND 2CH
L
R
CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND FRONT COAXlAL OPTlCAL
AUDlOOUT
AC lN MITSUBISHI
DVD PLAYER
MODEL DD-5000
POWER SUPPLY 120V~ 60Hz
POWER CONSUMPTION 20W
MlTSUBlSHl DlGlTAL ELECTRONlCS
DlSTRlBUTED BY
9351 JERONlMO ROAD
lRvlNE, CA 92618
MADE lN JAPAN
AMERlCA, lNC.
SERlAL NO.
MANUFACTURED
1.
1.
2.
2.
vlDEO
S
DvD Player
Tv Back Panel
Red
White
BlTSTREAM/PCM MITSUB
DVD PLAYER
MODEL DD-5000
White
OPTlCAL lRvlNE, CA 92618
MADE lN JAP
Red
Figure 9. Connecting a DVD Player with Component
Video
Note: NetCommand® assumes you connected your
DVD player to Component-2. If you add a second DVD
or use any other inputs for your DVD, this change must
be reflected in the NetCommand system. See Edit
NetCommand... in Chapter 3 for more information.
IMPORTANT
See Appendix A for component video signal
compatibility information.
For digital audio connections to your
A/V receiver, see your DVD player and A/V
receiver Owner’s Guides.
DVI Device
Figure 10
A DVI-to-HDMI cable or DVI/HDMI adaptor and HDMI cable and
audio cables are required. These are not included with the TV.
They may be available at your local electronics retailer.
1. Connect the DVI-to-HDMI cable (recommended) or
HDMI cable with DVI/HDMI adaptor from the DVI
device’s back panel to the TV back panel.
NOTE: If you are using a DVI/HDMI adaptor, it is
important to connect the adaptor to the DVI device
for best performance.
2. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on
the DVI device back panel to the INPUT/DVI Analog
Audio on the TV back panel. The red cable connects
to the R (right) channel, and the white cable connects
to the L (left) channel.
NOTE: The HDMI connection supports copy
protection (HDCP). Some devices require connecting
to an analog input first, in order to view on-screen
menus and select DVI as the ouput. Please review
your equipment instructions for DVI connectivity and
compatibility.
R
L
AUDlO OUT
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT Analog Audio
2
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 2 / AUX
Dvl Device

Dvl-to-HDMl Cable

Tv Back
Panel

Figure 10. Connecting a DVI Device
Chapter 2. Connecting 29
Connecting an HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with
Component Video
Connecting an HDMI Device
H DTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver
with Component Video
Figure 11
A coaxial splitter, RCA component video cables, and audio
cables are required. These are not included with the TV.
1. Connect the outside antenna, cable, or satellite to
ANT or SATELLITE IN on the cable box or satellite
receiver. See your device’s owner’s guide for
instructions and cable compatibility.
2. Connect the incoming terrestrial antenna or cable (not
satellite) to ANT-1 on the TV back panel (a coaxial
splitter, available at most electronic supply stores,
may be required to complete this installation). This
connection is used by TV Guide On Screen® to
download program listings.
Y
Pr
Pb
AUDIO
L
R
SATELLITE IN IN FROM ANT
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
3
lNPUT
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 2 / AUX
1.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
Red
White
Red White
To antenna,
cable, or
satellite
or
lncoming
Antenna or
Cable
HDTv Receiver with
Y Pr Pb Connections
Tv Back Panel
Figure 11. Connecting an External HDTV Receiver with
Component Video Connections
3. Connect RCA-type cables from the YPrPb outputs on
the HDTV receiver to Component-1 on the TV back
panel, matching the correct connections:
HDTV Receiver to TV Back panel
• Y to Y
• Pr to Pr
• Pb to Pb
4. Connect L (left) and R (right) audio cables from the
DTV receiver to Component-1 AUDIO on the TV back
panel.
5. If you are using a satellite receiver, you must
change the input through NetCommand. Open the
NetCommand Connection for [Device] screen (see
page 48) to make the change.
Note: To receive the benefits of a digital A/V receiver,
connect your cable box or satellite receiver’s digital audio
out to a digital input on your digital A/V receiver.
HDMI Device
Figure 12
An HDMI-to-HDMI cable is required. This is not included with
the TV. It may be available at your local electronics retailer
Connect an HDMI cable from the TV back panel to the
HDMI device output. HDMI devices provide video and
audio through this cable, so no other connection is
required. You can connect two HDMI devices to the TV
back panel through the HDMI connections.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
HDMl Device
Tv Back Panel
Figure 12. Connecting an HDMI Device
Note: To use the benefits of digital surround sound from
the HDMI device, connect the digital audio output of the
HDMI device directly to the A/V receiver.
30 Chapter 2. Connecting
MonitorLink Control/ RS-232C Device
Figure 13
A 9-pin RS-232C cable is required. This is not included with
the TV. It may be available at your local electronics retailer
When used as an RS-232C port, you can connect to
other external controllers. See mitsubish-tv.com for RS-
232C command protocols. Connect a 9-pin RS-232C
cable from the TV back panel to the MonitorLink or RS-
232C jack on the external control device.
When used for MonitorLink Control, you can connect to a
Mitsubishi HD Receiver/Controller, such as the HD-5000
or HD-6000. When connected in this way, it provides
coordinated power on/off between the TV and the
receiver/controller.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
TV
RS-232C Dev|ce
Figure 13. RS-232C connection
Connecting a MonitorLink™ Control/RS-232C Device
Chapter 2. Connecting 31
Connecting the IR Emitter NetCommand
®

IR Emitter NetCommand®
Figures 14 and 15
An IR emitter cable is included with the TV.
The NetCommand system uses emitters connected to
these jacks to control other devices such as VCRs, DVD
players, cable boxes and satellite receivers.
1. Connect the plug end of the supplied IR emitter cable
to either of the IR Emitter NetCommand jacks on the
TV back panel.
2. Run the cable for each of the emitter ends under,
alongside, or over the top of each device to be
controlled so that the emitter end is in front of the
area where the remote control sensor is located.
3. Position the emitter end with the emitter bulb facing
the remote control sensor. The bulb emits infrared
light in a cone-shaped pattern (see figure 15). Place
the bulb far enough from the remote control sensor to
allow the cone pattern to reach the sensor.
The remote control sensor is usually behind the
plastic window of the front display panel. It is
sometimes visible when you look through the display
plastic using a flashlight and is normally a round or
square cutout behind the plastic. If you cannot see
the sensor and the device’s Owner’s Guide does not
specify the location, you can find it by following these
steps using the device’s remote control:
a. Hold the remote about one-half inch from the
front of the device. Starting from one end of the
display window plastic, press the POWER button.
b. If the device does not respond, move the remote
control one inch toward the center and try again.
c. Repeat this until the device responds.
d. Note this location and then start over from the
other end of the display window plastic, repeating
until the device responds again.
The remote control sensor is somewhere between
these two positions. This is usually enough
accuracy for the placement of the IR emitters.
• With some devices, the emitter works better facing
downward from the top of the device. Some
experimentation may be needed.
• Secure the emitter ends in place using double-sided
tape.
• Place any unused ends behind the devices to prevent
unnecessary signals from reaching the remote
control sensors.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
1
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
TV
D I G I T A L
S U R R O U N D
S CH
A/V Rece|ver
Other A/V dev|ce
Other A/V dev|ce
1.
3.
3.
2.
3.
Figure 14. Connecting IR Emitter NetCommand
In front of a
s|ng|e average-
s|zed dev|ce
On top of a s|ng|e
ta|| dev|ce
In front, shared
by two average-
s|zed dev|ces
IR sensor
IR sensor
IR sensor
IR sensor
Figure 15. Place IR emitters so the signal can be “seen”
by the IR sensor on each device.
IMPORTANT
Position IR emitters so that each device’s
sensor “sees” the signal from only one
emitter. Otherwise, a device receiving signals
from multiple sources (remote controls, IR
emitters) may not respond at all.
32 Chapter 2. Connecting
-Pin-Style vs. 6-Pin-Style Connectors
There are two different types of connectors used for IEEE
1394 terminals and cables: a 4-pin and a 6-pin style.
pin connector
The 4-pin connector sends digital
audio signals, digital video signals,
and digital control signals back and
forth between devices. Your TV
has three 4-pin-type connection
jacks available. One is on the front
panel and two are on the back.
6 pin connector
The 6-pin connector can send
the same digital audio, video,
and control signals as the 4-pin
connector, but the 6-pin connector
can also send low-voltage electrical
power. This TV does not have 6-pin
connectors.
The purpose of this low-voltage electrical power is to
provide the needed operating power to a device that is
not connected directly to the household AC power, such
as a camcorder. A device with a 6-pin connector can
send this electrical power to another device, or receive
electrical power from another device, or simply use a 6-
pin connector without using the two additional pins.
6 pin to pin adaptor
A 6-pin connector cannot be
connected directly to a 4-pin jack,
and vice versa. To connect a 6-pin
device to a 4-pin device, you need
to obtain a 6-pin-to-4-pin adaptor
or adaptor cable. These cables
are available from electronic and
computer stores.
When connecting a 6-pin device (such as a camcorder)
to the TV, (if it is designed to receive electrical power
from another 6-pin device) you will need to connect
the camcorder directly to the household AC, or use the
camcorder’s battery for power. If this is not possible,
then the camcorder will need to be connected directly to
another 6-pin device in the network that can provide the
electrical power.
Connection Styles
There are two different connection styles that can be
used when connecting IEEE 1394 devices. Use the style
that fits your network of audio/video products.
Direct Device-To-Device Style
The IEEE 1394 interface allows you to chain devices,
unlike previous audio and video connections with which
you had to individually connect each device directly to
the TV. For example, you can connect your D-VHS to
your 1394 DVD Player and then connect the 1394 DVD
Player to the TV. The resulting IEEE 1394 chain will allow
you to add more devices to the chain. You will be able to
see each video device on the TV’s Device Selection Menu
and send information from any IEEE 1394 device to other
compatible devices.
Digital
DVD
Digital
VCR
TV
Hub Connection Style
The IEEE 1394 also offers you the capability to connect
your devices using the TV as a hub within the audio/video
network. Each device can send information, which
may include audio and video, to any other device in the
network.
Digital
DVD #1
Digital
VCR #1
D I G I T A L S U R R O U N D
S CH
Digital DVD #2
Digital VCR #2
Other 1394 Device #2
1394
Monitor
Digital
VCR #3
Other
1394 Device #1
TV
Connecting Compatible IEEE 139 Devices, continued
Chapter 2. Connecting 33
When Connecting IEEE 139 Devices
• Do not loop the last device in the chain back to the
TV. When the device chain is looped, the TV may not
be able to work with the other devices.
%JHJUBM
%7%
%JHJUBM
7$3
57
• Place devices that have only a mechanical (two-
position) power switch at the end of the chain or
leave the power switch in the On position. When
turned Off, IEEE 1394 signals may not be able to
pass through the device to other devices.
• Place devices with the slowest communication
speed at the end of the chain. Sometimes the
communication speed will be marked near the IEEE
1394 connector with an “S” number. The higher the
number, the faster the communication speed. This
TV has a communication speed of S400. Devices
with slow communication speed can interfere with
IEEE 1394 signals from faster devices. When using
NetCommand to set up a digital recording between
a faster device and a slower device, make the slower
device the source and make the faster device the
recorder.
• Do not use an IEEE 1394 cable over 15 feet in length
between each device.
• This TV is an IEEE 1394a device. It can be used
with a 1394b system when an IEEE-1394a-to-1394b
convertor is used. 1394b systems are capable of
greater distances and multi-room applications.
Connecting Compatible IEEE 139 Devices
Compatible IEEE 139 Devices
Compatible A/V devices include some, but not all, cable
boxes, D-VHS VCRs, A/V discs, and future products. It
is also possible to connect devices to the TV that have
IEEE 1394 connectors but are not compatible with the
TV or with the NetCommand
®
control system. Areas of
compatibility to consider are:
1. Digital Video Signals
The TV is able to decode MPEG2 and DV video as
provided by some camcorders. If the TV is unable to
decode the digital signal supplied by your camcorder, try
S-video and analog audio connections instead. Other
types of digital video, such as PC video provided by
some computers, must be decoded by the source device
and sent to the TV as analog video, S-video, or HDMI
video.
2. Digital Audio Signals
When received with video signals, the TV is able to
decode Dolby Digital signals and MPEG audio signals.
Other types of digital audio as provided by some digital
recording devices, such as MP3 audio and DTS audio,
cannot be decoded by the TV when received over IEEE
1394
The TV may not be able to pass incompatible digital audio
signals on the coaxial digital audio output, however, these
signals may pass on the IEEE 1394 cable to other devices.
3. Digital Control Signal
The TV can serve as the control center for IEEE 1394
audio/video devices, such as VCRs, A/V Discs, tuners,
cable boxes and amplifiers that are compatible with the
following IEEE 1394 control standards.
• EIA-775 is designed for tuning devices such as cable
boxes, allowing the device to send simple graphics.
This standard does not, however, allow the TV to
control the cable box by IEEE 1394.
• AV/C (Audio Video Control) is designed to provide
basic controls such as play, stop, channel selection,
and volume, as appropriate for the device.
The IEEE 1394 interface may not provide reliable control
signals for some DV camcorders, especially older models.
If your camcorder operates incorrectly or not at all, use
the camcorder’s control buttons instead of the IEEE 1394
connection.
Some devices may be a combination of two or more
types of devices. For example, there may be a recording
device that is also a tuning device. Each portion of the
device is called a sub-unit. When you select a device on
the Device Selection menu that has sub-units, a pop-
up menu will appear so you can select which sub-unit
section you wish to use.
IMPORTANT
DV Camcorder Notes
A. When viewing DV camcorders, it is normal for
temporary audio and video distortion to occur
under conditions such as:
• Playback start and stop
• Playback pause
• Forward or reverse picture search
B. Some DV Camcorder models are not compatible
with this TV’s IEEE 139 system and the “New
139 Device” screen will not appear when
the camcorder is connected. For playback of
incompatible DV camcorders, try S-video and
analog audio connections instead.
C. TV Disc cannot record DV video. Record DV
video on an IEEE 139 device designed to record
DV video.
3 Chapter 2. Connecting
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections
Q. My VCR (or other device) does not have two sets of stereo audio outputs. How can I connect this device’s
audio to both the TV and the A/V Receiver?
A. Connect the single set of stereo audio outputs to the TV only. Use Edit NetCommand® to change the setup of this
device. In the Connection screen of “Change” make sure both audio and video for the TV input are check marked
and the audio for the AVR input is not check marked. This will allow the NetCommand system to use the TV
outputs to transfer the device’s audio to the A/V Receiver. See Edit NetCommand in the next chapter for details.
Q. I have both the TV stereo audio output and TV digital audio output connected to the same input
designations on my A/V Receiver. How do I switch between analog audio and digital audio?
A. In most setups, analog audio is also output as digital audio, so no switching is required, and there is no need to
connect the analog output. In some circumstances, however, you may also need analog audio from the TV. For
example, MP3 audio is only output in analog format, so you must connect the TV’s analog AUDIO OUTPUT to the
A/V Receiver if you want to hear MP3 audio through the A/V receiver. Refer to your A/V Receiver user’s guide to
find out how analog/digital audio switching works.
• If your A/V Receiver’s remote control has an Analog/Digital Audio key, you can use the GUIDE key with the
following models to control switching:
Mitsubishi M-VR900 Integra DTR-9.1
Denon AVR-2700 Kenwood VR-2080
To make the switch, press the Device key on the TV’s remote control, and from the Device Selection menu,
press the Audio key. Then, with the A/V Receiver highlighted, press the GUIDE key to make the switch.
• If you have some other A/V Receiver model, use the TV’s learn function to learn the analog/digital audio
code for the GUIDE key. Follow the instructions above for using the GUIDE key.
• If your A/V Receiver has an Analog/Digital selection key on the front panel only, and not on the remote,
then your only option is to use that key to perform switching.
Q. The front panel of my A/V Receiver is too tall or too convex for the IR emitter signal to reach the remote
control sensor of the A/V Receiver. What can I do?
A. There are several possible solutions.
1. Mount the IR Emitter on the top, front edge of the A/V Receiver over the remote control sensor. Use tape to
secure it in place.
2. Mount the IR Emitter on the underside of the shelf above the A/V Receiver (if the A/V Receiver is in a cabinet).
Use double sided tape to secure it in place.
3. Some small stick-on emitters from other manufacturers may be compatible with this TV’s IR Emitter jacks.
These may be used instead of the supplied IR Emitters.
Q. I occasionally need to see the menu from my A/V Receiver. How can I connect it to the TV for this purpose?
A. You can connect the video output of the A/V Receiver to an unused input on the TV. Then use Edit NetCommand
to “Add” this as an “Other” device, not an A/V Receiver. On the “Connection” screen, indicate which TV input was
used and check mark the video box. Make sure the TV input audio box and both the audio and video boxes for
the AVR input are not check marked. You should also name this device so you can easily identify it on the Device
Selection Menu. You can also use Input 3 on the front panel.
Q. I have a high definition receiver I would like to connect and it also has an S-video output I would like to be
able use as well. Is there any way to connect this receiver both ways?
A. Yes, this item will appear twice in the Device Selection Menu. Just add this unit once using the Component-1 and
once using one of the S-video inputs. Make sure you indicate that this is the same manufacturer for both. We
suggest that you connect stereo audio outputs with the S-video to the TV so that you do not need to use two inputs
on the A/V Receiver. If this is a NetCommand compatible HDTV receiver and HD or SD outputs can be switched by
remote control, see Edit NetCommand in the next chapter for NetCommand control of this feature.
Chapter
NetCommand® Setup and Editing
NetCommand® Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the Remote Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NetCommand® Setup On-Screen Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3D Graphical Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NetCommand® Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Adding an A/V Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Adding Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Changing or Deleting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
IEEE 139 Devices and NetCommand® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3
36 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
NetCommand makes your TV the heart of your Home Theater
NetCommand® is an intelligent control system that makes your Mitsubishi TV the
heart of your home theater. With NetCommand, the TV sends signals to the other
devices in the system via the IR emitters, telling the devices to play, record, change
inputs, adjust volume, change channels and many more functions. All of this is
accomplished with one remote control and without changing control layers.
IR Learning and IEEE 139 Support
The IR “Learning” feature of NetCommand allows the TV to learn the remote control signals for new devices that the
TV is not preprogrammed to operate. NetCommand® also includes the capability of controlling IEEE 1394 devices by
sending control signals on a FireWire® cable.
Using NetCommand is completely optional
When you first turn on the TV, the NetCommand Setup Wizard launches. If you decide to use NetCommand, follow
the on-screen instructions. If you choose not to use it right away, simply quit the Setup Wizard and NetCommand will
remain inactive. Later, if you decide to use NetCommand, you can easily access the Setup Wizard.
NetCommand and Levels of Control
When you set up NetCommand, you decide how much control you want the TV to have over your home theater system.
You have the choice of performing a basic, limited, or complete NetCommand setup.
• Basic Setup
In a basic setup, NetCommand will:
◊ automatically switch to the correct TV input when you want to view programming from a different device. All
you do is select the device from the on-screen device selection menu. This saves you from having to search for
the correct input every time you want to change devices. Unused inputs are automatically deactivated so that
you don’t see them in the menu.
◊ show an on-screen icon for each device connected to the TV so you always know what devices are available.
Note that with a basic setup, you still need to use the remote control specific to each device.
• Limited Setup
In a limited setup, you get the benefits of the basic setup plus NetCommand control over the specific devices you
have chosen. Use this type of setup if you:
◊ only want NetCommand to control a few devices, such as the TV, a playback device (like a DVD player), and a
cable box. With this setup, you can use the TV’s remote to control these devices.
◊ want to use TV Guide On Screen® to control your cable box and VCR and/or A/V disc. After performing this
setup, you can use the TV’s remote to control these devices.
◊ want the ease and flexibility of NetCommand-controlled recording, with seamless setup of time-delayed or
immediate recordings among networked devices.
• Full Setup
Perform a full setup if you want NetCommand to:
◊ control a surround sound A/V receiver.
◊ automatically change input selections for the A/V receiver.
◊ control all devices with the TV’s remote, including the A/V receiver.
◊ provide seamless setup of time-delayed or immediate recordings among networked device.
NetCommand Helps You Manage Your Home Theater
With the NetCommand Review screen you can:
• view a summary of all devices connected to the TV and the input used for each device.
• deactivate or turn off unused input connections, then reactivate or turn them on when needed.
If you need to change your setup, the NetCommand sub-menu lets you easily
• add new devices.
• delete devices you have disconnected.
• change device and input selections.
NetCommand® Introduction
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 37
Using the Remote Control with NetCommand®
Below is a list of several manufacturers’ devices tested and shown to be compatible with NetCommand. These devices
can be controlled without changing the setting of the remote control from TV to another product. NetCommand may
be able to operate additional models, since many manufacturers use the same control signals to operate some or all
of the models they offer. This chart lists only the models that have been tested with NetCommand. The NetCommand
Learning feature is able to learn the remote control signals of most audio/video devices. For devices not listed in the
table, or if your device does not operate using the same remote control as the models listed below, use the learning
feature by selecting “Other” at the [Device] screen. See the Edit NetCommand section of this Guide.
NOTE: There are many different types of remotes and not all of them may be compatible with the learning feature.
Bright light near the TV screen can also adversely affect the learning feature. If it is not possible to learn a device, you
will need to use the original remote control of the device, or program the TV remote to operate these devices in the
traditional manner.
NetCommand Pre-Memorized Devices
DEVICE
A/V receiver Cable Box SAT Satellite
Receiver
DVD Player VCR
Mitsubishi M-VR800,
M-VR900
SR-HD5 DD-6000, DD-8020 HS-U795,
HS-U778
Bose Lifestyle® 28 Lifestyle® 28
Denon AVR-2700
Echostar 6000
Funai F260LA
General
Instruments
CFT2200
Hitachi DV-P415U VT-FX665A
Hughes HIRD-E45,
HIRD-E86
Integra DTR-9.1 DPS-9.1
Jerrold Not
specified
JVC XV-S65GD HR-VP 650U
Kenwood VR2080
Marantz SR8200
Microsoft XBox™ (requires the DVD kit from
Microsoft)
Motorola DCT2244
Panasonic TU-HDS20 DVD-A310 PV-8662
Philips VR620CAT
Pioneer VSX-D557,
VSX-49TX
DV-414
RCA DRD480RE,
DTC-100
Rotel RSX-1065
Scientific Atlanta 8600
Sharp VC-H810U
Sony STR-DE825 SAT-A55 DVP-S500D, PlayStation® 2
(Playstation® 2 requires the DVD Remote
Controller kit from Sony; DVD Player
software disc version 2.10)
SLV-778HF
Toshiba DTS-3000 SD-9200, SD-5109 W-717
Yamaha RX-V2095,
RX-V2200
DVD-S520, DVD-C996
Zenith DTV1080
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
R
38 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
On your remote control, the ADJUST or buttons allow
you to navigate left and right to different selections on the
screen. The ADJUST or buttons allow you to:
• Change the radio button
• Change current text box selection
• Navigate up and down on the screen
The ENTER button allows you to:
• Confirm the selected character when naming a
device
• Add or delete check marks in check boxes
• Select on-screen buttons to change screens
Text Box
Press ADJUST or to make a selection.
Check Box
Check marks indicate the item or input is added or turned
On. Press ENTER when the check box is highlighted to
add or delete a check mark. When viewing the Review
screen, a check box reflects which devices are turned On
or Off, or connected to the TV.
Radio Buttons
The setting changes when one of the choices is
highlighted.
Control Buttons
Much like the software on your computer, you will use
graphic buttons to navigate through the NetCommand
Setup screen. Highlight the button and press ENTER to
select the function.
<Back Button
Use the <Back button to navigate back to the previous
screen.
Next> Button
Use the Next> button to navigate forward to the next
screen.
Cancel Button
The Cancel button will cancel out any changes you
are currently making without saving them into memory.
When you select the Cancel key, NetCommand will
prompt you to confirm that you want to cancel the
changes you are currently making. If you select Cancel
during Initial Setup, you can set up NetCommand later by
selecting the NetCommand menu, then choosing Initial.
NetCommand® Setup On-Screen Buttons
To use the TV’s NetCommand feature, you need to provide some detailed information during the setup of your
Mitsubishi TV. You must define the manufacturer of the devices that are connected to the television, or learn the IR
code remote control signals for the device connected. For each device, the input to the TV and A/V receiver, and the
names for the device are pre-set during Initial NetCommand setup. You may change those inputs or names using the
Edit NetCommand or Learn screens. The buttons described below will help you navigate the screens.
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 39
Remote Control Buttons
The following buttons on your remote control help you
navigate within the system:
1. ADJUST or to select the menu item you want to
change.
2. ADJUST or to change the settings.
3. ENTER to open a menu, start an automatic function,
or select a check box.
4. TV MENU to display the main menu or move back
one menu screen at a time.
5. CANCEL to clear a setting or stop an automatic
function.
6. HOME to exit all menus and return to TV viewing.
POWER
PAUSE
REC
3
6
9
Qv
DEvlCE
MENU HOME
1
7
SQv
4
SUB/CANCEL
2
5
8
0
Tv MENU GUlDE
MUTE CH vOL
REW/REv FF/FWD
PLAY
STOP
SLEEP
lNFO v-CHlP AUDlO vlDEO
CONNECT
Tv
AUDlO
CABLE/DBS/DTv DvD vCR
FORMAT
PlP CH PlP/POP EXCH
PlP DEvlCE
PAGE
DEvlCE
Press ADJUST or to change text boxes. Some text
boxes have preset labels. Other boxes allow you to select
letters, numbers or characters to customize names.
Menu Screens
A picture (icon) is highlighted on the menu
screen when selected with the ADJUST
arrows. You may then make changes
within the menu or access sub-menus, if
available.
You can also access sub-menus from a
button. Sometimes when you select a
button, an automatic function begins.
The system includes the following special
features:
• The currently selected icon or button is
highlighted with a yellow outline; the text color is
yellow.
• On-screen instructions, shown in the message
line at the bottom of the menu, provide feature
selection and adjustment information.
• Some on-screen menu options must be set
before other options are available.

Main Menu: This screen is always the first to appear
when you press the remote’s TV MENU button.
3D Graphical Menu System
Your TV also has Mitsubishi’s exclusive 3D Graphical on-screen operating system, which provides on-screen
information for menu choices and changes, using the TV’s remote control.
0 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
NetCommand® Initial Setup
The initial setup screens that appear when you first power
on your new Mitsubishi TV guide you through setup of
NetCommand and the TV Guide On Screen® system.
Most IR remote control signal formats can be learned by
NetCommand.
Welcome Screen
Figure 1
When you first turn on your TV, the NetCommand
Welcome screen displays and asks you to select either
English or Spanish as the language for the on-screen
menus. The default language is English. To change
Language later, select Setup in the Main Menu. Selecting
Cancel at this screen will cause the default language
(English) to be selected.
Figure 1. Welcome screen
NetCommand (Information) Screen
Figure 2
The NetCommand (Information) Screen describes how
to start or delay the initial NetCommand and TV Guide
On Screen setup. This screen displays automatically the
first time you power On your new TV, after the Welcome
screen.
Figure 2. Information screen
Select Next> and press ENTER to start the initial setup.
If the NetCommand Setup is cancelled before it’s
completed, you can restart the NetCommand setup from
the Setup Reminder screen (see page 42) or by doing the
following:
1. Press TV MENU on the remote control to display the
TV Main menu.
2. Select NetCommand. The available options will be
Add, Review, Guide or Initial. Change and Delete will
be grayed out.
3. Press ADJUST to select Initial.
4. Press ENTER. The Device Setup screen (shown on
the next page) displays.
IMPORTANT
You may use your TV without setting up
NetCommand or the TV Guide On Screen®
system. To set up at a later time, choose the
NetCommand menu from the Main menu,
then select Initial. The TV Guide On Screen
system is set up from the NetCommand
menu.
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 1
NetCommand must be set up and the IR
emitters properly placed for your cable box
and VCR so the TV Guide On Screen system
can control these devices.
IMPORTANT
NetCommand
®
Initial Setup, continued
Device Setup Screen
Figure 3
If the devices connected to the TV are already in
NetCommand memory, you can quickly select them
at this screen. Press ADJUST or to move to each
device type. Press ADJUST or to select the
manufacturer. Select “Other” if the manufacturer is not
listed. Later, you can use the Change setting in the Edit
NetCommand menu to learn the remote control signals
for this device. Select “None” for device types that are
not connected.
For the A/V Receiver, if the manufacturer is not listed, you
cannot select “Other.” Instead, select “None”. Later, you
can use the “Add” feature in the NetCommand menu to
have the TV add and learn the remote control signals for
this device.
If you have a camcorder connected, check the
Camcorder box. NetCommand will not be able to
control it, but will reserve the front input to use with
the camcorder. Check the PC box if you have a PC
connected. After completing your choices, select Next>
and press ENTER.
Figure 3. Device Setup screen
Note: If you selected “Other” for any of the device
names, you can direct the TV to “Learn” the connected
device by following the Edit NetCommand instructions.
For many device types, non-listed models will operate in
the same way as the listed models and you can still use
the pre-loaded setting.
TV Guide On Screen® System Setup
Figure 4
The TV Guide On Screen option allows you to select
whether you want to enable the TV Guide On Screen
system and, if so, which devices to include. To receive
the correct program listings for your area, you will need
to enter your five-digit ZIP code.
You can select one over-the-air source and one cable
source for TV Guide On Screen. If, however, you have
multiple cable sources, the channel-number assignments
may not match up correctly. See the table below for the
preferred connection combinations.
If One Source Is:
The Other Source Can Be:
Ant-1 Air Ant-2 Air
Cable Box
Cable Card N/A
Ant-1 Channels via Cable N/A
Ant-2 Channels via Cable N/A
For detailed information on using the TV Guide On
Screen system, please see the separate TV Guide On
Screen Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual.
Figure 4. TV Guide On Screen
Note:
• Inputs to TV Guide On Screen can include:
- Only one over-the-air source
- Only one cable source
• An antenna input is required for downloading TV
Guide On Screen schedules. If your cable box is
connected using HDMI or IEEE-1394, you must also
connect an antenna input.
• If your cable box is connected to a Component input,
be sure the box is set to send analog channels as
480i. If this is not possible, add an antenna input.
2 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
Review Screen
Figure 5
After you have made your device choices, the Review
Screen will display. It is important to review the settings
to ensure that they are correct. If necessary, you can
use <Back to return to the Device Setup screen to make
changes.
Figure 5. Review screen
Note: The Review screen lists the TV input and A/V
receiver input used with each device. You must
correctly identify the inputs you used when you
connected the devices. If you have not connected
your devices, write down these inputs as a guide. If
you cannot use these inputs, or if you would like to
change the name of a device, use the instructions in
Edit NetCommand to make necessary changes.
Note: If you select Next> on the Review screen, all
selections made are finalized.
On the Review screen, adding or deleting check marks
will turn the adjacent devices or inputs On or Off. 1394
device names only appear on the Review screen when
the devices are connected to the TV.
Finish Screen
Figure 6
To complete the NetCommand setup, select Finish from
the Finish screen.
If you wish to change any of the pre-configured inputs
or names for the devices, or add devices not in the
pre-configured setup, select Edit to display Edit
NetCommand menu.
If your A/V receiver was not listed, select Edit to add the
AVR and then assign all devices to new AVR inputs.
Figure 6. Finish screen
It may still be necessary to memorize the available
channels for Antenna-1 (and Antenna-2, if used). You
may do that by going to the TV Main menu and
selecting Setup. Instructions to memorize channels are
found in the Setup menu section.
NetCommand
®
Initial Setup, continued
Setup Reminder
Setup Reminder
Figure 7
This screen only appears if you did not set up
NetCommand when the TV was first turned on. The
Setup Reminder screen displays the next six times you
power on the TV if you do not perform setup.
If you want to set up NetCommand and/or the TV Guide
On Screen system, select Next and press ENTER. If you
do not wish to perform setup, select Cancel and press
ENTER.
Figure 7. Setup Reminder screen
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 3
Edit NetCommand®: Adding an A/V Receiver
A/V Receiver Screen
Figure 8
If your A/V Receiver manufacturer was not listed, and you
selected “None” during the initial NetCommand setup,
you may add the A/V Receiver and have NetCommand
learn its remote control’s functions.
• If you are in the Finish screen for initial setup, select
Edit.
• If you have already finished initial setup, change the
audio source to TV speakers. Press the DEVICE
key to verify the current audio source. To change,
press the AUDIO key to acess the audio section
and change the source. Next open the Main menu,
select NetCommand, then press ENTER. The Edit
NetCommand screen will display.
Highlight Add and press ENTER. When the New Device
screen displays (see figure 16), press ADJUST or
until you see A/V Receiver as the device type. Highlight
Next and press ENTER to open the A/V Receiver screen
(figure 8).
IMPORTANT
To make changes to the A/V receiver setup,
first ensure that the current audio source is
the TV speakers.
Figure 8. A/V Receiver screen
Choose ONE of these options:
• Select a recognized manufacturer. The model
number optimized for NetCommand will display at
the bottom of the screen. If a number follows the
manufacturer’s name, (example: Mitsubishi 1), this
indicates additional models are optimized for that
manufacturer. For many device types, non-listed
models will operate in the same way as the listed
models and you can still use the pre-loaded setting.
After selecting Next>, the screens that follow are:
the Name Screen (Figure 12), Audio Output to AVR
screen (Figure 13), ending with the Finish screen
(Figure 14).
• Select “Other,” then highlight “Learn” and press
ENTER. This will allow you to have NetCommand
learn the remote control signals of this new device.
After selecting “Learn” and pressing ENTER, the
screens that follow are: the A/V receiver Inputs
screen (Figure 9), A/V Receiver Input Learn screen
(Figure 10), A/V Receiver Learn screen (Figure 11),
Name screen (Figure 12), Audio Output to AVR
screen (Figure 13), ending with the Finish screen
(Figure 14).
• Select “Other,” skip Learn and select Next>. This
will allow the device to appear and will allow
NetCommand to switch inputs to use this device.
However, NetCommand will not be able to control
this device. Later you may use the “Change” option
in the NetCommand menu to learn the remote control
signals.
After selecting Next>, the screens that follow are: the
A/V Receiver Input screen (Figure 9), Name screen
(Figure 12), Audio Output to AVR screen (Figure 13),
ending with the Finish screen (Figure 14).
A/V Receiver Inputs
Figure 9
Figure 9. A/V receiver Input screen
If you select “Other” as the manufacturer and then
“Learn,” you will see the A/V Receiver Input screen. After
selecting the number of inputs, this screen will not appear
again.
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
Edit NetCommand®: Adding an A/V Receiver, continued
A/V Receiver (AVR) Learn Screen
Figure 11
1. Press ADJUST or on the TV remote to select the
check box for each function to be learned.
2. Press ENTER and the function name will begin to flash
to confirm the ready-to-learn status.
3. Press the button on the A/V receiver’s remote control
that corresponds to the selected function, A check
mark will appear and the function name will stop
flashing. This confirms the signal learned status.
4. To test the learned command, press ENTER on the TV
remote. The A/V receiver will perform the selected
function. The A/V receiver needs to be turned on
and the IR emitters properly placed for the test to be
successful (see page 31 for IR emitter placement).
5. Repeat for each function to be learned.
6. To erase a learned function, highlight the check box
for that function and press CANCEL.
7. When the function signals have been learned, press
ADJUST to select Next> and move to the Name
screen.
Figure 11. A/V receiver Learn screen
A/V Receiver (AVR) Input Learn Screen
Figure 10
Figure 10. A/V receiver Input Learn screen
NetCommand can now learn the remote control signals
used to select each input on the A/V receiver.
1. Press ADJUST or on the TV remote to select the
check box for each function to be learned.
2. Press ENTER and the function name will begin to
flash to confirm the ready-to-learn status.
3. Press the button on the A/V receiver’s remote control
that corresponds to the selected function. A check
mark will appear and the function name will stop
flashing. This confirms the signal learned status.
4. To test the learned command, press ENTER on the TV
remote. The A/V receiver will perform the selected
function. The A/V receiver needs to be turned on
and the IR emitters properly placed for the test to be
successful (see page 31 for IR emitter placement).
5. To customize the input names, press ADJUST to
move to the Input Name text box and then press
ADJUST or and ENTER to select each letter of
the name. These names will appear on the Review
screen as the A/V receiver’s input names, and should
match the names the A/V receiver shows in its own
display.
6. To erase the learned input signal, highlight the check
box for that input and press CANCEL.
IMPORTANT
When learning remote control signals, point
the device’s remote at the TV screen
Depending on your A/V Receiver’s capability, you may
connect up to seven A/V inputs. Select the number of
inputs by pressing ADJUST or .
If the number of connected inputs changes, you will need
to delete the A/V receiver through Edit NetCommand and
add it again, as described above.
7. Repeat for each connected input.
8. When the input selection signals have been learned
and the inputs named, press ADJUST to select
Next> and move to the A/V receiver Learn screen.
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 5
Edit NetCommand®: Adding an A/V Receiver, continued
Audio Output to AVR Screen
Figure 13
Use this screen to select which A/V Receiver input is
connected to AUDIO OUTPUT on the TV back panel.


Press ADJUST to select Next> and move to the Finish
screen.
Figure 13. Audio Output to AVR screen
Finish Screen
Figure 14
To finalize your selections and complete the A/V
receiver setup, select Finish from the Finish screen.
Note: If you connected the audio output of other
devices directly to the A/V Receiver, you must use
the “Change” function of the Edit NetCommand
menu and select each device to assign the correct
A/V Receiver input to be used with each device.
Figure 14. Finish screen
Name Screen
Figure 12
The Name screen allows you to change the default name
for the A/V receiver to a custom name of up to eight
characters (including a blank space), selecting from
letters, numbers, and nine different characters. Using
the TV’s remote, press ADJUST or to select each
letter, then press ENTER to move to the next position.
Press CANCEL to delete the current letter and move back
one character position. When in the first position, the
CANCEL button will return the name to the default name.
Figure 12. Name screen
Note: To change any of the inputs or names for the
devices, or add devices not included in the initial
settings, select Edit to display the Edit NetCommand
menu.
IMPORTANT
To make changes to the A/V receiver setup,
first ensure that the current audio source is
the TV speakers. Press the DEVICE key to
verify the current audio source. To change,
press the AUDIO key to acess the audio
selection window.
6 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
Edit NetCommand Screen
Figure 15
If you selected Edit when you were at the Finish screen,
the Edit NetCommand screen displays. Your choices are:
Add
Add a new device to the NetCommand setup. “Learn” the
remote control signals of devices listed as “Other” brands.
See Figure 16.
Change
Change the brand/model, input connections, or name of
a device already listed in the configuration. “Learn” the
remote control signals of devices listed as “Other” brands.
See Figure 25.
Guide
Edit TV Guide On Screen® ZIP code and input selections.
See the separate TV Guide On Screen Interactive
Program Guide User’s Manual for more information about
customizing the Guide. See Figure 4.
Review
View a list of all devices and input connections in the
NetCommand home theater configuration, including the
A/V receiver. This is also where you can turn On or Off
unused TV inputs or devices. See Figure 5.
Delete
Remove a device or erase the complete NetCommand
home theater configuration. The learned remote control
signals are erased when the associated device is deleted.
See Figure 26.
Initial
Start the setup at the beginning. This button only
becomes available after deleting the complete
configuration, or if NetCommand was not set up when the
TV was first powered On. See Figure 2.
Figure 15. Edit NetCommand screen
New Device Screen
Figure 16
Select “Add” from the Edit NetCommand screen, and the
New Device screen will display. Select the Device type
that you would like to add. You may add your A/V receiver
(if not added in Initial setup), Cable Box, Camcorder, SAT
(satellite), DVD, Laser Disc, PC and VCR.
At the next screen, choose the manufacturer. If you
choose “Other” for the manufacturer, the device (A/V
receiver, Cable, SAT, DVD or VCR) can be learned. For
device types Laser Disc, Camcorder, Game and PC, the
“Learn” screen is skipped. There is no NetCommand
support or learning for these devices.
At the next screen, you can keep the default Name or
select a custom Name for the device, using ADJUST
or to select letters A–Z, numbers 0-9, and/or symbols
(!.&’/:*- and blank) for each character of the name you
would like for the selected channel.
Figure 16. New Device screen
Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices
Mitsubishi’s NetCommand allows you to edit your home theater configuration. You can add new devices, change
device settings and connections, delete devices and learn remote control IR signals not already in NetCommand
memory.
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 7
[Device] Screen
Figure 17
If you selected “None” for a device type during initial
setup, you can later select the Add option and add a
device with this screen. This screen also opens when
you select the Change option in the Edit NetCommand
screen.
The sample screens here show the choices for adding a
VCR; similar screens will appear for any satellite receiver,
DVD player, or cable box.
Figure 17. [Device] screen
Choose ONE of these options:
• Select a recognized manufacturer. The model
number optimized for NetCommand will display at
the bottom of the screen. If a number follows the
manufacturer’s name, (example: Mitsubishi 1), this
indicates additional models are optimized for that
manufacturer. For many device types, non-listed
models will operate in the same way as the listed
models and you can still use the pre-loaded setting.
After selecting Next>, the screens that follow are: the
Name Screen (Figure 20), Connection screen (Figure
21) and specialized device screens (Figures 22-24),
ending with the Finish screen (Figure 27).
• Select “Other,” then highlight “Learn” and press
ENTER. This will allow you to have NetCommand
learn the remote control signals of this new device.
After selecting “Learn” and pressing ENTER, the
screens that follow are: [Device] Learn screen (Figure
18), [Device] Advanced Learn screen (Figure 19),
Name screen (Figure 20), Connection screen, (Figure
21) and specialized device screens (Figures 22-24),
ending with the Finish screen (Figure 27).
Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices, continued
• Select “Other,” skip Learn and select Next>. This
will allow the device to appear and will allow
NetCommand to switch inputs to use this device.
However, NetCommand will not be able to control
this device. Later you may use the “Change” option
in the Setup menu to learn the remote control signals.
After selecting Next>, the screens that follow are: the
Name Screen (Figure 20), Connection screen (Figure
21) and specialized device screens (Figures 22-24),
ending with the Finish screen (Figure 27).
Hint: The cable box and satellite receiver learn screens
include PVR functions.
[Device] Learn Screen
Figure 18
Shown only if “Learn” was selected
1. Press ADJUST to select the check box for
each function to be learned.
2. Press ENTER and the function name will begin to
flash to confirm the ready-to-learn status.
3. Press the button on the device’s remote control that
corresponds to the selected function. A check mark
will appear and the function name will stop flashing.
This confirms the signal learned status.
4. To test the learned command, press the ENTER
button on the TV remote while the learned function
is still highlighted. The device should perform the
selected function. The device needs to be turned on
and the IR emitters properly placed for the test to be
successful (see page 31 for IR emitter placement).
5. Repeat for each function to be learned.
6. To erase a learned function, highlight the check box
for that function and press CANCEL.
7. When the function signals have been learned, press
ADJUST to select Next> and move to the [Device]
Advanced Learn screen.
NOTE: When learning the device’s remote control
signals, point the device’s remote control at the TV
screen.
Hint: If the device’s remote control uses a single button
for both Power On and Power Off, don’t learn the Power
Off function.
8 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
Connection for [Device] Screen
Figure 21
Select the TV and A/V receiver inputs to which the device
is connected.
• To hear the device’s audio through the TV speakers,
check the Audio box in the TV Input section of the
screen.
• To hear the device’s audio through the A/V receiver,
check the Audio box in the AVR section.
For best video quality, make only audio connections to
the A/V receiver and avoid routing video signals through
the unit. The A/V receiver may need configuring for
digital audio.
Figure 21. Connection for [Device] screen
Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices, continued
Name Screen
Figure 20
The Name screen allows you to change the default
name for each device to a custom name of up to eight
characters (including a blank space), selecting from
letters, numbers and nine different characters. Press
[Device] Advanced Learn Screen
Figure 19
After learning the basic device keys, the [Device]
Advanced Learn screen allows you to learn any special
keys for your device. Most common IR remote control
signal formats can be learned by NetCommand.
A table of specialized device keys is shown in Appendix
B. You only need to learn the functions your devices
respond to and can ignore the functions that do not apply
to your device.
Figure 19. [Device] Advanced Learn screen
ADJUST or to select each letter, then press ENTER to
move to the next position. Press CANCEL on the remote
to delete the current letter and move back one character
position. When in the first position, the CANCEL button
will return the name to the default name.
Figure 20. Name screen
Figure 18. [Device] Learn screen
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 9
The screens described below may not be necessary for your device setup. If they do not
display automatically on screen, they are not required.
VCR for Recordings Screen
Figure 22
Select the VCR to use for making analog recordings
through NetCommand or the TV Guide On Screen®
system. The VCR inputs must be connected to RECORD
OUT on the TV, which outputs analog signals converted
from digital.
Figure 22. VCR for Recordings screen
Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices, continued
RF Connection for Cable Screen
Figure 23
Use the RF Connection for Cable screen to enable the
TV’s remote control to change channels on the cable box
and to enable VCR recording from the cable box. This
screen displays only when adding or changing a cable
box. If your cable box is connected to a TV antenna
input, check the RF check box. Select the TV antenna
input that is used with the cable box. Select the channel
number used for output by your cable box from the
choices listed (003, 004, 005); you can now change
channels on the cable box using the TV’s remote control.
If the cable box is also connected to a VCR for recording,
select that VCR.
If your cable box is connected using audio/video or
component cables, make sure the RF check box is
unchecked. Then the next screen will be Connection
(Figure 21), to allow selection of the TV input used with
the cable box.

Figure 23. RF Connection for Cable screen
IR Code for [Device] Screen
Figure 24
This screen only displays if an added device has the
same IR code as a previously added device of the same
type and manufacturer. You can specify the IR setting for
the new device. For example, for the second Mitsubishi
VCR you can specify the IR Code setting to VCR-B, if the
primary Mitsubishi VCR is using the VCR-A IR code.
Figure 24. IR Code for [Device] screen
50 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
Edit NetCommand®: Changing or Deleting Devices
Finish Screen
Figure 27
To finalize your selections and complete the NetCommand
setup, select Finish from the Finish screen.
Note: To change any of the inputs or names for the
devices, or add devices not included in the initial
settings, select Edit to display the Edit NetCommand
menu.
Figure 27. Finish screen
Change Device Screen
Figure 25
Selecting Change from the Setup menu screen displays
the Change screen. To change a device, select the
device by name, not type. You can change the name or
input connections to the TV and A/V receiver. If “Other”
was selected for the manufacturer then you can also
“Learn.” The rest of the screens that follow are the same
as when you Add a device.
Figure 25. Change screen
Delete Device Screen
Figure 26
Selecting Delete from the Setup menu displays the Delete
screen. You can choose to delete a single device by
selecting the device you would like to delete, or you can
delete the entire NetCommand configuration. After you
have chosen the device, or the entire configuration, you
will be prompted to confirm your choice to delete. If you
select the Entire Configuration, the Initial button becomes
available on the Edit NetCommand screen. If you delete a
device that you learned the remote control signals for the
learned signals are erased.

Figure 26. Delete screen
IMPORTANT
To delete a device or change connections for
a device (like a VCR or a DVD player), you must
first switch the TV to a different input device.
Press the DEVICE key and select a different
input device from the Device Selection menu.
To make changes to the A/V receiver setup,
first ensure that the current audio source is
the TV speakers. Press the DEVICE key to
verify the current audio source. To change,
press the AUDIO key to acess the audio
selection window.
IMPORTANT
NetCommand must be set up and the IR
emitters properly placed for your cable box
and VCR so the TV Guide On Screen system
can control these devices.
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 51
IEEE 139 Devices and NetCommand® Control
See pages 32 and 33 for information regarding compatible IEEE 1394 devices and connection styles. The TV is not able
to control IEEE 1394 devices that use other types of control protocols. Incompatible digital audio, video and/or control
information will still be able to pass from one device through the TV to another device on the network. These incompatible
devices may not appear on the Device Selection menu or in the Review screen of the Edit NetCommand menu.
NetCommand Control of Digital Devices Using the “Learn” Feature.
Some IEEE 1394 devices, such as cable boxes or satellite receivers, will not have compatible digital control signals
or require the use of the device’s own remote control. Some of these IEEE 1394 devices will not display on-screen
information through the IEEE 1394 connection and will require using an analog connection for on-screen displays. In
many cases, to control these digital devices, the Learning feature of NetCommand can be used.
1. Place an IR Emitter for NetCommand in front of the
device’s remote control sensor (see IR Emitters, page
31).
2. On the Name for 1394 Device screen (Figure 29,
page 52) use ADJUST and ENTER to check mark the
Analog Connection box.
3. Select the device type on the IEEE 1394 Device Type
screen (Figure 30, page 53) of SAT or similar tuning
device
4. If desired, using the ADJUST buttons enter a custom
Name on the Name screen (Figure 20, page 48).
5. At the Device screen, Select “Other” as a
manufacturer and then highlight “Learn” and press
Next (Figure 31, page 53).
6. Follow the device learning instructions found on
the screen(s) or in the Edit NetCommand section of
Chapter 3.
7. The Connection screen (Figure 32, page 53) follows
the learning screens. If analog connections are used,
select the correct inputs. If only digital connections
are used, do not check the video or audio boxes.
8. Proceed with the Finish screen.
This will allow NetCommand to use the learned remote
control signal to control these IEEE 1394 devices.
Note: When using the NetCommand learning
feature for IEEE 1394 devices that do not have
analog connections, the GUIDE function will require
pressing GUIDE twice. The first press of GUIDE will
display the TV’s digital channel guide. The second
press will display the program guide for the device if
an IEEE 1394 Guide is available.
52 Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing
Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically
Name for 139 Device Screen
Figure 29
If you choose to add the discovered IEEE 1394 device,
the Name for 1394 Device screen appears. Enter a new
name for the device or use the default name that appears
automatically. The name used in this screen is the name
that appears in the Device Selection menu.
The DV option applies only to digital camcorders at
this time and is typically detected automatically by the
TV. If your camcorder uses DV formatting but the box is
unchecked, add the check mark manually.
To use the analog capability of some IEEE 1394 devices,
such as some DVCRs and cable boxes, check the Analog
Connection box.
• Some DVCRs, for example, can record and play
as VHS or S-VHS in addition to D-VHS. This
allows you to play analog rental tapes or analog
tapes from your established library or to make
analog recordings from an antenna or cable
system.
• Some cable boxes with IEEE 1394 connections
require an analog connection for on-screen
guides and emergency notices.
Note: You never need to check both the DV and Analog
Connection check boxes for a device.
Figure 29. Name for 1394 Device screen
Adding IEEE 139 Devices
Automatically
Addition of IEEE 1394 devices is a special case of
NetCommand setup because the devices are detected
automatically. You review, edit, and delete these devices
through NetCommand just as you would any other
devices.
When you connect an IEEE 1394 device to the TV network
and power it on, the new device automatically announces
its presence. This process is called device discovery and
can take up to one minute.
Some non-audio/video or incompatible IEEE 1394
devices, such as personal computers (PCs), may not
announce their presence to the TV. The TV is not able
to show these devices in the Device Selection menu.
They can, however, coexist and are still available to other
devices on the IEEE 1394 network that are compatible
with these non-audio/video devices.
Try using the Cable/SAT/DTV position of the TV remote
control to see if it can control operation of IEEE 1394
cable boxes and satellite receivers. If not, use the remote
control that came with the device.
New 139 Device Screen
Figure 28
When your TV discovers a new IEEE 1394 device, the
New 1394 Device screen appears. Select “Add” or “Do
Not Add” depending on whether or not you want the
device added to the Device Selection menu. If the IEEE
1394 device does not provide audio and video, you may
not want to add that device to the TV’s Device Selection
menu. Devices that were discovered but not added to
the Device Selection menu will still be listed in the Review
screen of the Edit NetCommand
®
menu.
Figure 28. New 1394 Device screen
Chapter 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing 53
Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically, continued
Connection Screen
Figure 32
Select the TV input that you used when you connected
the video or S-Video cables. You may also select the TV
or A/V receiver input you used when you connected the
stereo audio cables.
The playback and record control of some devices may
still operate via the IEEE 1394 cable automatically, even
though you must use the video or S-video cable for the
picture. In this case, when you select the device, be sure
to select analog (not digital) from the pop-up that opens
when the device is selected from the Device Selection
menu. With this setup, the picture is shown via the
analog connection but control is through the IEEE 1394
connection.
Figure 32. Connection screen
IEEE 139 Device Type Screen
Figures 30 and 31
If the new IEEE 1394 device is also connected using
analog inputs, you will need to define the device type.
Select the type of device, such as a VCR.
Figure 30. IEEE 1394 Device Type screen
Once the device type is selected, then the Device screen
is displayed so the manufacturer can be selected. If the
manufacturer is listed, then you may be able to control
this device while it is operating as an analog VCR. For
example, if the IEEE 1394 device you have added is
a Mitsubishi DVCR, and you have selected an analog
connection as a second connection, then you will select
Mitsubishi for the manufacturer. If the manufacturer is
not listed, select “Other” and use the Learn screens
Be sure to place an IR Emitter in front of the remote
control sensor, just as you have done for other
NetCommand® devices. It is necessary to use the IR
Emitter only when the DVCR is being used as an S-VHS
or VHS VCR. When the DVCR is playing or recording
digital signals in D-VHS, the TV will control the VCR
through the IEEE 1394 cable.
Figure 31. Device screen
Finish Screen
Figure 33
To finalize your selections and complete the
NetCommand setup, select Finish from the Finish
screen.
Figure 33. Finish screen
Chapter
NetCommand® Functions
Device Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the Device Menu Button to Display Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the GUIDE Button to Display ChannelView™ and Menus . . . 58
NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using TV Disc and A/V Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Peer-to-Peer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

56 Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions
Device Selection Menu
Audio Section
When a NetCommand pre-memorized or learned IR
controlled A/V receiver has been connected to the TV
and added to NetCommand Setup, an AVR icon will
appear in the audio section. Press AUDIO to change
navigation to the audio section. Then press ADJUST
to select the TV speakers icon or the A/V receiver
icon. Press ENTER to change the audio selection. Press
DEVICE to return the navigation to the Device Section.
Video
Section
Connection
Section
Audio
Section
Device
Section
Figure 1. Device Selection Menu with NetCommand
Power On/Off Devices (NetCommand devices only)
Devices that have separate On and Off remote control
buttons will power On automatically when you select
the device and will power Off when you turn off the TV.
For devices that do not power On or Off automatically,
display the Device Selection menu, press ADJUST
or to highlight the device icon and press POWER on
the remote control. For the A/V receiver, press AUDIO
to move the navigation to the Audio Section. Highlight
the A/V receiver icon and press POWER. If you press
POWER on the remote control when the Device Selection
menu is not displayed, the TV will turn Off.
Device Section
To select another device or input, press ADJUST
on the TV’s remote to move the highlight. Press ENTER
to select the device to view and hear. The TV inputs are
automatically changed. If NetCommand is set up, the
inputs on compatible A/V receivers are automatically
changed at the same time.
Video Section
The destination of the device highlighted in the Device
Section is displayed here as a TV icon.
Connection Section
The Connection Section shows the recording in progress
and the device that is recording from the source. For
example, if the Digital VCR (D-VCR) is currently recording,
when you move the highlight to the Ant-1 icon, the D-VCR
icon appears in the Connection Section. This icon
disappears when you move the highlight to another icon
or press CANCEL to stop recording.
When you press DEVICE on the TV’s remote control, the Device Selection menu (Figure 1) displays. If NetCommand®
has not been set up, the Device Selection menu allows you to select an input for viewing. If NetCommand is set up, the
Device Selection menu allows you to select the device for viewing, select audio from the TV speakers or A/V receiver,
power compatible devices On or Off, and verify the destination of signals. On the Device Selection menu, the device or
input currently displayed appears as a gold-colored icon.
PIP Device Selection Menu
Figure 2
The PIP Selection menu displays when you press the PIP
DEVICE button on the remote control. This menu has the
same general format as the Device Selection menu. The
source for the Video Section is the sub picture and the
Audio and Connection Sections are not available.
Use ADJUST to move the highlight to the
device to show in the PIP or POP screen, then press
ENTER. Device icons that are grayed out are not
available for use as PIP or POP sources or with the
current source.
Video
Section
Device
Section
Figure 2. PIP Device Selection Menu
IMPORTANT
If a device does not respond to separate
On or Off remote control signals, the
manufacturer has not provided that
capability for the device.
Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions 57
CableCARD™ Menu
Figure 4
Press HOME key to exit
Figure 4. Possible Device Menu for CableCARD
When viewing a CableCARD channel, pressing DEVICE
MENU will display a list of up to 8 links to applications
that contain basic CableCARD information made
available from your cable provider. Press ADJUST
or to move through the application links. To select a
link (blue text) to an application, press ADJUST or
to highlight the link, then press ENTER to access the
linked page. Pressing DEVICE MENU will return to the
CableCARD menu screen and pressing HOME will return
Device Menu
If the input is a VCR or DVD, and NetCommand is set up,
press DEVICE MENU once to display the transport menu
for the current device (figure 3). Press DEVICE MENU a
second time to display the menu for the current device
source, if available.
Figure 3. Transport menu
When used with the TV Guide On Screen, DEVICE MENU
displays or removes TV Guide’s menu information. See
the TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide
User’s Manual for detailed information.
IR Controlled Devices
For a NetCommand compatible traditional IR controlled
device, pressing DEVICE MENU once or twice will display
the menu for that device. While the menu for the device
is displayed, press ADJUST and ENTER to
navigate the screen. For some NetCommand traditional
devices, you will also be able to use the number buttons
and other additional buttons on the TV remote. For
traditional DVD players, DEVICE MENU is also known as
the setup menu.
Using the Device Menu Button to Display Menus
to TV viewing. The screen shown is an example of the
type of screen that may display. Specific screen menus
are sent by your cable provider.
If there are technical problems with the CableCARD, an
error screen will automatically display with information
that may be needed by your Cable provider when you call
them for assistance.
Moving Through Other CableCARD Screens
In addition to CableCARD menus, other CableCARD
application screens may display and require you to make
additional selections. While CableCARD application
screens are customized in each area, some general rules
apply in using these screens on your Mitsubishi television.
1. Blue text denotes a link to another screen. Press
ENTER to move to the next application. When
screens do not have blue text, there are no more
links.
2. You cannot move backward through the links. If you
want to exit the CableCARD system, press HOME to
exit and return to TV viewing. CANCEL may not work
with some CableCARD screens.
All information on these application screens is provided
by your local cable company. Please contact your cable
provider if you have any problems with the application
screen displays.
IMPORTANT
Most CableCARD screens show only status
or diagnostic information and do not allow
you to make changes. These screens are
meaningful only to your local cable provider.
58 Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions
GUIDE and Devices (139 or IR Controlled)
For NetCommand-compatible satellite receivers and
some cable boxes, GUIDE displays the on-screen
programming guide for the receiver or cable box. Press
ADJUST and ENTER to navigate the displayed
Guide. For NetCommand-compatible satellite receivers,
you may also be able to use the number or other
additional buttons.
For NetCommand-compatible DVD players, GUIDE
displays the DVD disc “top” menu (not the setup menu).
For TV Disc and A/V Discs, press GUIDE to display the
Track List screen. For IEEE 1394 devices with digital
connections, press GUIDE twice to display the device’s
Guide. For memory cards, press GUIDE to display a
JPEG thumbnail menu (video) or a playlist menu (audio).
GUIDE and the Device Selection Menu
For compatible traditional VCRs, press GUIDE when
the VCR is highlighted on the Device Selection menu to
change the VCR’s input.
When the A/V Receiver icon is highlighted in the Audio
Section, pressing GUIDE switches the A/V Receiver from
analog audio to digital audio and vice versa, if supported.
GUIDE and the Recording Setup
Screen
When in the Recording Setup screen, pressing GUIDE will
display the current list of programmed recordings. Please
see Record List, page 59 for more information.
GUIDE and ChannelView
Figures 5 and 6
ChannelView is available for antenna inputs not
associated with TV Guide. Press GUIDE while viewing
ANT-1 or ANT-2 to display a list of available memorized
digital channels (D) and analog (A) channel information
(if available from the broadcaster). This list is called
ChannelView™
ChannelView for digital channels will show the major and
sub-channels (or bitstreams). Analog channel information
will display as sent. Press ADJUST or to scan
through all the channels in memory one by one. To cycle
through the choices quickly, press CH or .
For detailed program information, press ADJUST ,
to return to basic information press ADJUST . This
information is sent by the broadcaster. If limited data
is shown or no program data appears, it is because the
broadcaster is not sending the information. This is not a
defect of your TV.
Using the GUIDE Button to Display ChannelView™ and Menus
Recording a Current Program from ChannelView
To record a current program, press REC (record) when
your program choice is highlighted on the program list
in ChannelView. A red “R” will be added after the input
name. The TV will immediately switch to the selected
channel and start recording.
Figure 5. ChannelView screen, current programs
Recording Future Programs from ChannelView
To record a future program, press ADJUST or to
select the channel you want to record from. For detailed
program information, press ADJUST ; to return to basic
information press ADJUST . Press REC (record) when
your choice is highlighted. A red “R” will be added after
the input name. The message, The recording has been
added to the Record List will display. To view, change or
cancel a recording, use the Record List (page 59).

Figure 6. ChannelView screen, future programs
The GUIDE Button
Please refer to the separate TV Guide On Screen® User’s Guide for details about using the GUIDE button with TV
Guide On Screen. When you are not using GUIDE for the TV Guide screens, pressing GUIDE allows you to see
NetCommand®-controlled program guides or menus.
IMPORTANT
For complete ChannelView information to be
refreshed daily, the TV must be powered Off from
5 to 15 minutes a day, depending on the number
of channels in memory. If the TV loses power,
the program listings will be temporarily lost.
Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions 59
NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings
Setting up Recordings
Figure 7
Through NetCommand, you can automatically start and
stop recordings and send signals from one playback
device to a recording device. Recordings can be made
on recordable devices connected to the TV or to the
internal TV Disc. The TV Disc is an IEEE 1394 hard disk
drive and is available for all channels from CableCARD™,
Ant 1, Ant 2, and IEEE 1394 devices or tuning devices
(cable boxes or satellite receivers) connected to inputs
1–3. The capacity of the TV Disc is 160 GB on models
WD-62827/WD-73827 and 250 GB on models WD-
62927/WD-73927.
The TV can convert digital channels and IEEE 1394
digital signals to analog signals that can be recorded on
NetCommand-compatible analog VHS and S-VHS VCRs.
It can convert analog channels to digital signals for
recording on the TV Disc or other digital recording device.
You can schedule the recording to take place at a later
time and program the recording duration for a minimum
of 30 minutes and a maximum of six hours (in 30-minute
increments). The default is one hour. During the
recording, you can view a different device or power off
the TV.
Figure 7. Recording Setup screen
Recording Now
Can be used when viewing Antenna 1 or 2, an IEEE 1394
device, or a non-recording traditional device connected
to Inputs 1–3..
To initiate recording now:
1. Press REC (record) on the TV remote.
2. In the “Record to” section, review the destination
device and duration. Use ADJUST or to change,
if necessary.
3. Press a second time to start recording.
Time-Delayed Recording
1. Set the TV to the source you want to record.
2 Press REC (record) on the TV remote.
3. Press ADJUST to move the highlight to the
settings you wish to change. Press ADJUST to
change the source, channel (if available). Record To
device, duration, and day of the week. To change
the start time, highlight the Start Time box and press
ENTER to move among the hour, minute, and am/pm
settings. Use ADJUST to change the settings.
4. Highlight Add and press ENTER to add the recording
to the record list. If your selection is successful, a
confirmation message will be displayed. If you pick
overlapping times, day(s), or destination devices, you
will see a message stating there is a conflict.
5. To exit, press HOME on the TV remote after all
recordings have been added.
Record List
Figure 8
Press GUIDE while viewing the Recording Setup screen
to see a list of all currently scheduled recordings. A
maximum of 32 recordings can be scheduled.
Time-delayed recordings scheduled through TV Guide On
Screen® are not listed in this screen. See the TV Guide
On Screen User’s Manual for information on recording
using the TV Guide On Screen system.
To cancel a recording on the Record List, press ADJUST
or to select the recording, then press CANCEL. To page
through the list, press CH or .
Figure 8. Record List screen
IMPORTANT
• Signals from devices connected to the
HDMI, Component, or PC inputs cannot be
recorded.
• TV Disc cannot record DV video from a
camcorder.
60 Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions
Direct VCR Recording from an
Antenna or Cable Source
When your VCR is the current device, REC (record) on
the TV’s remote control functions the same as the record
button on the VCR’s remote control or front panel.
To record directly from antenna or cable:
• Method 1
1. Press DEVICE on the TV’s remote to display the
Device Selection menu. Highlight the traditional
VCR and press POWER to turn on the VCR. If
necessary, press GUIDE to select the input the
VCR is on, such as Antenna input (or line input).
2. Press ENTER to switch the TV to the VCR.
3. Select the correct channel for recording on the
VCR and then press REC to start recording. You
will need to manually stop the recording at the
end of the program
• Method 2
With the VCR as the current recording device, press
the DEVICE MENU button to display the VCR’s menu,
in which you can schedule a delayed recording
directly from antenna or cable.
To record from ANT-1, ANT-2 or other devices, see
NetCommand Controlled Recordings or refer to the TV
Guide On Screen® User’s Manual.
Copy-Protected Material
When attempting to record copy-protected material, the
Record functions of the NetCommand and IEEE 1394
systems may be prevented or stopped. If you have a
recording that is tagged “Record Once,” NetCommand
will change the tag to “Record No More.”
Restrictions for Traditional VCRs
with NetCommand- and TV Guide On
Screen-Controlled Recording
• Your VCR should be connected directly to the
RECORD OUTPUT AUDIO and VIDEO outputs.
• The VCR must be set manually to “Line Input.”
Display the Device Selection menu, highlight the VCR
and press GUIDE to change VCR inputs.
• If NetCommand is set up, the TV can select channels
on compatible cable boxes for recordings. Leave the
cable box turned on.
• If the source device or recording device does not
have separate power On and Off features, then leave
that device powered On.
NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings, continued
Using TV Disc and A/V Discs
TV Disc and A/V Disc Search by Time
NetCommand is able to search to a specific time in a
recording on TV Disc or an IEEE 1394 A/V Disc.
1. Start the desired track’s playback on the A/V disc.
2. Use the number buttons to enter the time code
position of hours followed by minutes. For example,
to enter one hour and twenty-two minutes (1:22) into
the track, enter 1, 2, 2.
3. Press ENTER to skip to the time code position.
4. To cancel the request or to start over, press CANCEL
instead of ENTER.
TV Disc and A/V Disc Track List
Screen
Figure 10
When viewing TV Disc or an A/V Disc, press GUIDE to
display its Track List. Tracks are listed in date and time
order and vary in size. Press ADJUST or to navigate
through the Track List. To play a track, select it on the
list, then press ENTER. Press INFO to see details for the
highlighted track. To change pages, press CH or . To
delete a track, select it on the list and press CANCEL.
Figure 10. Track List screen
IMPORTANT
The TV Disc is not intended for permanent
storage of recordings. Mitsubishi
recommends you transfer important
recordings to an external device such as a
VCR. If the TV Disc requires replacement or
repair, recordings stored on TV Disc will be
lost and cannot be recovered. Mitsubishi is
not liable for lost recordings.
• You cannot record from source devices connected
to the TV Component inputs or HDMI 1 or 2
connections.
Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions 61
Using TV Disc and A/V Discs, continued
Using the Remote Control with TV
Disc or an A/V Disc
You can use the following controls during playback:
GUIDE: displays the Track List of recorded programs.
INFO: • from within the Track List: displays program
description.
• from outside the Track List: displays disc
status.
PLAY: starts or resumes playback of paused program.
PAUSE: pauses or resumes playback of program.
FF/FWD: forward picture search, multiple presses increase
the speed.
REW/REV: reverse picture search, multiple presses increase
the speed.
ADJUST : skips backward 12 seconds per press.
ADJUST : skips forward 30 seconds per press.
ADJUST : skips to the end of the track.
ADJUST : skips to the beginning of the track.
REC: displays the Record Menu to schedule recordings.
CANCEL: deletes a highlighted track from the Track List.
CH Up/Dn pages through multiple screens of listed tracks.
Copying or Moving TV Disc or A/V
Disc Recordings
Tracks you record to disc may have copy restrictions
assigned to them. To learn a track’s copy status,
highlight a track in the Track List and press INFO. Tracks
are assigned one of these ratings:
COPY FREE
(or no status shown)
No copy restrictions apply.
COPY NEVER The track cannot be transferred to
another recording device. Tracks
of this type may have an assigned
retention period. See below for
more information.
COPY NEVER,
MOVABLE
You can transfer the track to a
different recording device. The
track on disc is deleted as it is
moved.
Retention Period
Some COPY NEVER tracks have a retention period
assigned by the content provider. The retention period is
the length of time you can keep and view the recording.
The initial retention period, if any, is shown next to the
copy status in the Track List INFO display (see figure 10).
To see how much time remains of the retention period,
start viewing the recording and press INFO.
Note: The retention period for all tracks on the disc
expires if there is any loss of power to the TV, even
momentary. For example, expiration of the retention
period will occur if you:
• Unplug the TV from the AC power source.
• Experience a power outage or power fluctuation.
Remember that you can safely turn off TV power
using the POWER button without affecting the
retention period.
To Copy or Move a Track
1. Press DEVICE on the remote control and select
TV Disc by pressing ADJUST and then
ENTER.
2. Press ADJUST or to select a track. Then press
ENTER to start playing.
3. Press PAUSE to pause the playback.
4. Press REC (record) on the TV remote. The Recording
Setup menu will display.
5. In the “Record to” section, review the destination
device (A/V Disc, DVCR, VCR). Change if necessary.
If moving, you do not need to change the other
settings.
6. Press REC a second time to initiate recording.
More about Moving Recordings
• Plan to move recordings at a time when you can
complete the move without interruption. If there is any
interruption (e.g., pressing CANCEL or a power loss)
while a COPY NEVER, MOVABLE recording is being
made, only the part not yet moved will remain on the
TV Disc.
• TV Disc and the destination device are unavailable
during a move operation. Press DEVICE and select a
different device from the Device Selection menu.
• You may lose the first 20 to 30 seconds of content
when the recording is moved.
• The move operation lasts as long as the full run-time
of the recording.
• If you interrupt the move, you may lose an additional
20 to 30 seconds of content each time the process is
restarted.
• Opening TV Guide On Screen during a move will
interrupt the move and result in loss of content. If
you wish to use TV Guide On Screen during a move,
be sure to lock the Video Window when you first
open the Guide. Please see the TV Guide On Screen
User’s Manual for instructions on locking the Video
Window.
62 Chapter 4. Netcommand Functions
2. Press RECORD or CONNECT on the TV remote
control to open the Recording Setup screen.
3. In the “Record To” section of the Recording Setup
screen, review the destination device and duration of
the connection. Change if necessary.
4. Press RECORD or CONNECT a second time to
establish the connection.
NOTE: Multiple peer-to-peer connections can
operate simultaneously, sometimes with the same
source device. Please note that peer-to-peer
connections are NOT listed on the Record List
screen.
Cancelling a Peer-to-Peer Connection
To cancel a peer-to-peer connection:
1. Press DEVICE to open the Device Selection menu.
2. Highlight the source device in the Device Selection
menu.
3. Confirm that the on-screen icon for the peer-to-peer
connection is in the Connection Section next to the
TV icon
4. Press CANCEL.
The peer-to-peer connection ends and the destination
icon is removed. If there is more than one peer-to-peer
connection for the same device, all the connections are
cancelled.
What is a Peer-to-Peer Connection?
Figure 9
A peer-to-peer connection allows the IEEE 1394 devices
in your TV network to talk to each other without the further
need of TV intervention once the peer-to-peer connection
is established. With the connection established, you can
turn off the TV or use it to watch another device.
For example, the TV can set up a connection for an IEEE
1394 cable box that sends a program to another device
for viewing. NetCommand establishes the connection
between the two devices. Set up a recording over a
peer-to-peer connection the same as you would any other
NetCommand-controlled recording.
NOTE: Analog or traditional (non-digital) devices can
not be used for peer-to-peer connections.
Figure 9. Recording Setup screen for peer-to-peer
connection
Setting up a Non-Recording Peer-to-
Peer Connection
To establish a peer-to-peer connection:
1. Select the source in the Device Selection menu.
Peer-to-Peer Connections
Chapter
5
TV Menu Operations
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
NetCommand® Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Captions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
V-Chip Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Audio/Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
Main Menu
Setup Menu
Figure 1
Use the Setup menu to select English or Spanish as
the language for the menus and on-screen displays.
Memorize the available channels for antennas or cable
connected to the ANT-1 and ANT-2 inputs. Manually
set the time for the TV, or select Auto and the TV will
automatically set the time based upon Extended Data
Service (XDS) time data. This time data is usually
broadcast by your local PBS station. This menu is also
used to set the TV timer and reset the lamp reminder.
The TV’s software version is displayed on this screen.
Figure 1. Main menu, Setup selected
Channel Menu
Figure 4
Edit channels for ANT-1 and ANT-2. After memorization,
if a channel displays as digital and analog, you can
choose to see the channel digitally every time it is
selected. Manually add or delete channels from memory,
name channels or add your favorite channels to a SQV
(SuperQuickView™) list. Displays signal strength of the
currently tuned digital channel.
Figure 4. Main menu, Channel selected
Captions Menu
Figure 5
Display Closed Captions if sent by the broadcaster,
select settings for analog or digital captions.
Figure 5. Main menu, Captions selected
V-Chip Lock Menu
Figure 6
Block or allow programing based upon rating signals sent
by the broadcast station, lock by time, or lock the front
panel buttons.
Figure 6. Main menu, V-Chip Lock selected
Audio/Video Menu
Figure 7
Reset the A/V Memory to return to the original factory
A/V settings for a selected device. Customize the
individual audio and video settings. Display a blue
screen when viewing a device with no signal, enable/
disable Film Mode, or turn the TV speakers on or off.
Figure 7. Main menu, Audio/Video selected
NetCommand Menu
Figure 2
Add, change, review or delete NetCommand® settings
and devices. Enable/disable TV Guide On Screen® or
change ZIP code and input selection settings. Change
the order of icons on the Device Selection menu. Turn
the transport menu off. Select the default setting for the
TV Pause feature and enable/disable the TimeShuttle
feature.
Figure 2. Main menu, NetCommand selected
Record Menu
Figure 3
Set up and view recordings and recording defaults. View
your customized Record List. If you have more than one
digital recording device connected, use this menu to
change the default digital Record To device. Set analog
recording picture format. Set analog recording quality for
programs recorded on the TV Disc.
Figure 3. Main menu, Record selected
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 65
Setup Menu
input are erased and the process starts over from the
beginning.
After memorizing channels, the channels in memory
can be accessed in ascending or descending order by
pressing CH or . Select the Channel Menu to access
further channel-editing features, such as channel add or
delete, channel name, and SQV custom favorite channel
memories.
When you use a CableCARD™, the complete list of
available channels is provided through the CableCARD.
As a result, the Ant-1 channel-memorization options are
not available and are shown grayed out on the screen.
In the TV Guide On Screen® system, the channels
displayed and the order in which they are displayed in
the Guide is independent of the channel-memorization
process. Refer to the TV Guide On Screen Interactive
Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed instructions
on editing channels shown in this guide.
Clock
Figure 9
You may choose to manually or automatically set
the clock that your TV will use for recording or timer
functions.
Manual
To manually set the clock, you need to select the current
time, current date, time zone for your area and the
Daylight Savings time setting.
Figure 9. Time Menu, Setting the Clock Manually
Time
Press ADJUST or repeatedly to slowly select the
hour or press and hold to quickly select the hour. Press
ENTER to move to the minutes options. Press ADJUST
or to select minutes.
Date
Press ADJUST or to select the correct date.
Setup Menu
Figure 8
Figure 8. Setup Menu
Language
Display the on-screen menus in either English or Spanish
(Español). The first time you powered on your TV, you
were requested to select an on-screen-menu language.
If you choose to change the selection, all menu text will
immediately switch to the language of your choice.
To listen to audio in other languages (when available), see
the section of this Owner’s Guide covering audio settings.
Memorize Channels
For Antenna 1 (Main) or Antenna 2 (Aux)
To start channel memorization, first select an input
according to the table below.
Input Condition
Ant-1 Air
When connected to an indoor/
outdoor antenna
Ant-2 Air
Ant-1 Cable
When connected to direct cable
Ant-2 Cable
Press ENTER to start the automatic channel-memorization
process. The memorization process is started separately
for each antenna selection.
During the memorization process, all possible channels
on the selected antenna are scanned twice. Analog
channels are scanned first and then the process is
repeated for digital channels.
To stop the automatic channel-memorization process
before it completes, press CANCEL. Channels
memorized before you pressed CANCEL are retained in
memory. If you start the memorization process again, all
previously memorized channels for the selected antenna
66 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
Setup Menu, continued
Timer
Figure 10
On/Off
The timer allows you to set up a time when the TV will
change the channel and turn on. You select the time and
day for the TV to turn on and the device and channel to
display. At your preselected time, the timer will turn the
TV on and this message will be displayed: “Press a button
for the TV to stay on.” Press any button on the remote
control within five minutes or the TV will turn itself off.
Figure 10. Timer Menu (Timer On/Off)
Set Day
Select the day or days that the TV will turn on
automatically. Press ADJUST or to select Daily,
Mon-Fri (Monday through Friday), or the individual days
of the week.
Set Time
Press ADJUST repeatedly to slowly select the hour or
press and hold to quickly select the hour. Press ENTER
to move to the minutes options. Press ADJUST or to
select minutes.
Device
Press ADJUST or to select the device to use when
the timer turns on the TV. If the TV is already on, the
timer will turn the TV to this selected device.
Channel
When an antenna is the selected device, you may select
any memorized channel. Press ADJUST or to
select the channel and the TV will tune to this channel in
memory when the timer turns it on. This includes sub-
channels for digital choices.
Lamp Reminder
Select to reset the lamp reminder message after you have
changed the lamp cartridge. Press ENTER, then press
ENTER again to confirm reset of the lamp reminder. To
have an accurate reminder that the lamp cartridge may
soon need replacement, reset the lamp reminder only
when you replace the lamp cartridge. See Appendix G
for detailed information about changing the lamp.
Software Version
For some service-related issues, it may be necessary to
know the software version in your TV. This information is
displayed on the Setup menu screen.
Time Zone
Select your correct time zone. Press ADJUST or to
select the time zone (Atlantic, Eastern, Central, Mountain,
Pacific, Alaska or Hawaii) for your area. Then press
ADJUST to move to the Daylight Savings time option.
Daylight Savings Time
Select the Daylight Savings time (DST) option that your
state uses. Press ADJUST or to select Applies if
your state or area uses DST, or Ignore if DST does not
apply.
Auto
Select the Time Zone and Daylight Savings time setting,
as noted above. You may then tune to a channel (on
ANT-1 or ANT-2) that uses Extended Data Service (XDS)
time data, typically a PBS channel. The Auto selection
will automatically retrieve the correct time and date
information from this channel. Be aware that if a channel
displays incorrect time information, it is because of
information sent from the broadcaster and is not a defect
of the TV.
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 67
NetCommand® Menu
Figure 12. Icon Order Menu
Transport Menu
Figure 13
Figure 13. Transport Menu
NetCommand uses the Transport menu to control VCRs,
DVDs, IEEE 1394 A/V Discs, digital VCRs, and similar
devices. If you choose to turn off this menu when
viewing the devices, the transport buttons (rewind, play
forward, stop, pause and record) on the TV’s remote
control will continue to operate these devices. In the
Device Selection menu selecting a VCR or DVD Player will
automatically display the Transport menu. You can re-
display this menu by pressing DEVICE MENU.
Select Transport menu functions by pressing ADJUST
, , , and then ENTER. For example, to pause
playback, press ADJUST or to move to PAUSE,
then press ENTER. If a function is not possible, such as
record for a DVD Player, the Transport menu button will
be grayed out.
Remote Control Transport Buttons
Transport buttons (rewind,
play forward, stop, pause
and record) on the remote
control are located in the
bottom section of the
remote control.
POWER
PAUSE REC
3
6
9
Qv
DEvlCE
MENU HOME
1
7
SQv
4
SUB/CANCEL
2
5
8
0
Tv MENU GUlDE
MUTE CH vOL
REW/REv FF/FWD
PLAY
STOP
SLEEP
lNFO v-CHlP AUDlO vlDEO
CONNECT
Tv AUDlO
CABLE/DBS/DTv DvD vCR
FORMAT
PlP CH PlP/POP EXCH
PlP DEvlCE
PAGE
DEvlCE
NetCommand Menu
Figure 11
Figure 11. NetCommand Menu
Edit
Detailed information regarding setting up and editing
the NetCommand menu is found in Chapter 3. The Edit
NetCommand screens allow you to add new devices and
change traditional and IEEE 1394 devices. You can also
set up the TV Guide On Screen® system or turn it on or
off. Turn devices and unused inputs On or Off, delete a
single device or delete the entire setup configuration.
If you choose to delete the entire configuration, or if
the NetCommand setup was cancelled, deleted or not
completed, you can start at the Initial NetCommand
screen. The Review screen shows all devices connected
to the TV.
Icon Order
Figure 12
The Icon Order screen allows you to arrange the device
icon order on the Device Selection menu to a different
sequence, for ease of selection and operation.
To change the order, press ADJUST , , , to
highlight the icon to be moved and then press ENTER.
Press ADJUST , , , to move the icon to the desired
position and then press ENTER to select the icon.
68 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
TV Pause
Figure 11
With TV Pause, you can interrupt watching a program
and then resume watching it later without missing any
of the program. You can begin watching a program
after the start of the broadcast and still be able to view
the part already broadcast. This is possible because
the TV Pause feature automatically creates a temporary
recording on the internal TV Disc. You can then search
forward and backward through the recorded portion of
the program while the program broadcast continues.
Use TV Pause with the TimeShuttle feature if you want to
search visually for a specific program segment.
The recording created by TV Pause is temporary and
will be automatically overwritten. If you wish to save
the program for later viewing, press REC to display the
record menu and begin a standard, storable recording.
You can also press GUIDE to display ChannelView or TV
Guide On Screen® to make a recording.
When you press PAUSE to pause a TV program during
broadcast, an on-screen slider shows approximately how
far and in which direction(s) you can search (see figure
14). TV Pause is available for CableCARD™, Ant-1, Ant-2,
IEEE 1394 tuner devices and other tuning devices (cable
boxes or satellite receivers connected to Inputs 1–3).
TV Pause has three settings:
• On Request: TV Disc is in the standby mode until you
press PAUSE for the first time after turning on the TV,
or after a channel or device change. There is a delay
of a few seconds before a paused picture appears.
With this option, the TV Disc turns on and then starts
recording automatically when you first press the
PAUSE button. As the broadcast continues, you can
scan or skip backwards in the TV program to the
point where the TV Disc started recording.
TV Disc returns to the standby mode automatically
when you change the channel or device. The PIP/
POP features are available only when TV Pause is in
standby mode and not enabled.
• Always: With this option, the TV Disc is continuously
recording while the TV is on. You can skip or scan
backward as far as the last channel or device change.
You can also scan or skip forward to catch up to
the live broadcast. Press PAUSE, REW, FF or any
ADJUST button to pause the program and scan or
skip within the program.
In the Always setting, the PIP/POP features are not
available. To use the PIP/POP features, select the Off
or On Request setting for TV Pause.
• Off: This option prevents operation of the TV Pause
feature.
When TV Pause is set to Off, you can use the PAUSE
key for standard full-screen picture freeze.
If you do not expect to use the TV Pause features, we
recommend the Off or On Request mode. These modes
allow use of PIP/POP features.
3 2 1
Figure 14. TV Pause slider. 1. Limit of backward scan.
2. Current viewing point in recorded portion of program.
3. Current broadcast point (limit of forward scan)
Controlling TV Pause Features
NOTE: You can reverse search as far back as the
beginning of the filled space shown on the slider. You
can forward search up to the current broadcast point.
• Press PAUSE to pause the current TV program or
resume play after pause.
• Press PLAY to resume watching the TV program from
the pause point.
• Press FF to forward picture scan. Press up to four
times to increase the scan speed. If pressed when
TV is paused, will move forward at half speed, not
fast forward. When TimeShuttle is enabled, FF can
be used to open the view shown in figure 15.
• Press REW to reverse picture scan. Press up to
four times to increase the scan speed. If pressed
when TV is paused, will reverse at half speed. When
TimeShuttle is enabled, REW can be used to open
the view shown in figure 15.
• Press ADJUST to skip backwards 12 seconds for
each press.
• Press ADJUST to skip forward 30 seconds for each
press.
• Press ADJUST to skip all the way to live broadcast.
• Press ADJUST to skip back to the earliest available
part of the TV program as shown on the slider.
NetCommand® Menu , continued
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 69
TimeShuttle
Figure 15
With TimeShuttle enabled, the FF and REW keys open
a frame-by-frame view of the program. You can then
search visually forward or backward to the exact program
segment you want to watch. Turn off TimeShuttle if you
wish to use the FF and REW keys for standard full-screen
video scanning.
Figure 15. TimeShuttle search. Press PLAY to view a
program starting with the highlighted frame in front.
TV Pause with TimeShuttle
To Enable TV Pause with TimeShuttle
1. In the NetCommand menu, select Always or On
Request for TV Pause.
2. Select On for TimeShuttle.
3. Press HOME to close the menu.
To Use TV Pause with TimeShuttle
1. Press REW or FF. Press REW or FF up to three
additional times to increase the search speed.
Note: If the TimeShuttle screen does not appear,
allow more time for the recording to continue before
trying again.
2. When a frame of the desired program segment
appears, you can:
• Press PLAY to start watching the program from
that frame.
• Press FF or REV to change the direction of the
search.
If TV Pause is set to On Request, TimeShuttle becomes
available when TV Pause is active. Press PAUSE to
activate TV Pause for the current channel or device. You
can then search backward as far as the point where you
NetCommand® Menu , continued
first pressed the PAUSE key for the current channel and
input.
TimeShuttle and TV Disc Recordings
To Enable TimeShuttle for TV Disc
1. Select On for TimeShuttle.
2. Press HOME to close the menu.
To Use TimeShuttle while Viewing TV Disc:
1. To display the TimeShuttle screen and search for the
segment you want:
• Press REW to search backward.
• Press FF to search forward.
• Press REW or FF up to three additional times to
increase the search speed.
2. When a frame of the desired program segment
appears, you can:
• Press PLAY to start watching the program from
that frame.
• Press FF or REW to change the direction of the
search.
• Press PAUSE to freeze the image. Press PAUSE
again to return to normal full-screen viewing.
To Turn Off TimeShuttle
When TimeShuttle is turned off, the FF and REW keys
perform normal full-screen video scanning.
1. In the NetCommand menu, Select Off for
TimeShuttle.
2. If you also wish to use the PIP/POP features, select
Off for TV Pause.
3. Press HOME to close the menu.
70 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
Record
Figure 14
The Record menu allows you to set up recordings, view
the record list, and set defaults for your recording
devices.
Figure 14. Record Menu
Recording Setup
Figure 15
Figure 15. Recording Setup screen
In the recording Setup screen you tell the TV what, where,
and when to record. There are two ways to open the
Recording Setup screen:
• select Record from the Record menu.
• press REC on the remote control when viewing a
recordable source.
Your TV can stop recordings automatically and it can
send the signals from one external playback device to a
different external recording device.
You can schedule the recording to take place at a later
time and program the recording duration for a minimum
of 30 minutes and a maximum of six hours in 30-minute
increments. The default is one hour.
The default recording device is the TV Disc, which can
record both digital and analog programs. When a digital
recording is being made, the TV can direct the same
source signals to an external recording device using the
IEEE 1394 cable.
Record Menu
Recording Now
Can be used when viewing Antenna 1 or 2, an IEEE 1394
device, or a non-recording traditional device.
To initiate recording now:
1. Press REC (record) on the TV remote or press
ENTER if the Record menu is displayed.
2. Review the Record To (destination) device (TV Disc)
and duration. Change if necessary.
3. Press REC a second time to initiate recording.
Time-Delayed Recording
To initiate a time-delayed recording:
1. Set the TV to the source you want to record.
2. Press REC (record) on the TV remote or press
ENTER if the Record menu is displayed.
3. Press ADJUST or to select the channel, device
to record to, duration time, start time (press ENTER
after selecting hour and minutes to set the time) and
day.
4. Select Add and press ENTER to add the recording
to the record list. If your selection is successful, a
confirmation message will be displayed. If you pick
overlapping times, day(s), or destination devices,
you will see a message stating there is a conflict.
5. To exit, press HOME on the TV remote after all
recordings have been added.
If you have a digital source and make an analog recording
to a VCR, the TV converts the digital signals to analog
format and sends the analog output to the VCR through
the RECORD OUTPUT jacks.
The TV can convert analog programs to digital format.
This allows you to record analog programs to a digital
recording device (TV Disc, A/V Disc, DVCR).
During recording, you can:
• view a different device
• view a different channel (in most cases)
• power off the TV.
When recording to a VCR or A/V disc, press PAUSE to
temporarily stop recording and press PAUSE again to
resume recording. Use the PAUSE key in this manner to
selectively record only the program segments you want.
IMPORTANT
Recordings scheduled on this screen are
independent of recordings scheduled
through TV Guide On Screen®. Recordings
scheduled with TV Guide On Screen have
priority if there is a conflict between the two
recording schedules.
IMPORTANT
See Appendix I for a list of recording and
viewing combinations available for this TV.
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 71
Record Menu, continued
Record List
Figure 16
To see a list of all currently programmed recordings, select
the record list option on the Record menu or press GUIDE
while viewing the Recording setup screen. A maximum
of 32 recordings can be scheduled. To cancel a recording
on the Record List, press ADJUST or to select the
recording, then press CANCEL. To page through the list,
press CH or .
Cancel Scheduled Recordings
To remove a recording from the record list, use or
to highlight the scheduled recording and then press
CANCEL.
Figure 16. Record List screen
TV Guide On Screen® and the Record
List
Programs scheduled through TV Guide On Screen do not
appear on this record list. Refer to the separate TV Guide
On Screen® User’s Guide for information regarding
scheduling recordings with TV Guide On Screen.
If there is a conflict between recordings scheduled
through TV Guide On Screen and the Record List, the TV
Guide On Screen recording takes priority.
Default Digital (Record) Device
The device specified here is the default device used
when initiating a recording with the REC key from within
ChannelView™ (page 58). The internal TV Disc appears
as the initial default recording device set by the factory
for recording both analog and digital programs.
This option remains grayed out (unavailable) until you
connect an external recording device and add it to the
NetCommand setup. After the device is added, highlight
the box and press ADJUST to select the added
device.
Analog Recordings
When you record a 16:9 digital channel to an analog
VCR or recording device, there is a mismatch between
the picture shape of the 16:9 ratio of the source and the
narrower 4:3 ratio of the analog recorder.
• For anamorphic playback on this widescreen TV,
choose the anamorphic picture display and ensure
that the TV screen format is set to standard (see the
section on TV formats in this Owner’s Guide).
• For cropped playback on an older style 4:3 TV,
choose the cropped display to remove the top
and bottom sections. This setting does not affect
recording from analog devices, analog channels, or
4:3 digital channels.
Analog Quality
For analog programs recorded on the TV Disc or an A/V
Disc, you can select the recording quality. High has the
best quality, but takes more disc space. The Low quality
takes less disc space. The default is High.
Setting Up Analog VCR Recordings
with TV Guide On Screen®
When setting up a recording using TV Guide On Screen,
note that:
• You must select the desired recording device in the
TV Guide On Screen Record Options menu.
• The destination recording device for analog
recordings must be the analog device connected to
the TV’s RECORD OUTPUT jacks.
IMPORTANT
When setting up analog recordings in
TV Guide On Screen, you must set the
destination recording device as the analog
device connected to the TV’s RECORD
OUTPUT jacks.
Note that digital programs can be recorded on either
a digital or analog device. For best playback quality,
however, record digital programs on a digital recording
device.
72 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
Channel
Figure 17
Figure 17. Channel Menu
Antenna
Select the antenna for the channels you want to edit. You
can select Ant-1 (main) or Ant-2 (Aux).
Prefer Digital
When a memorized channel number is available as both
analog and digital, a check mark in the Prefer Digital
box causes digital channels to be displayed and analog
channels to be hidden (when using CH or ). Remove
the check mark to show both analog and digital choices.
This option is not available when TV Guide On Screen® is
enabled.
Channel
Channels can be changed in three ways:
• Press ADJUST or to select the channel.
• Pressing CH or to select channels already in
memory.
• Enter the number directly. Channel numbers can be
one part, analog or digital (up to the number 16383),
or two part for digital channels (these use a separator).
For a two-part digital channel, press SUB/CANCEL on
the remote to enter a separator after the first, second
or third number, depending on the broadcaster’s
channel information.
For digital channels, when the broadcaster has sent
a virtual channel number, the virtual channel number
is shown in the text box and the original digital
channel is shown below on screen as a reference.
One original channel number can be associated with
several different virtual channels.
Channel Menu
Memory
After the available channels have been memorized
with Memorize Channels on the Setup menu, weaker
channels can be added or unwanted channels can be
deleted. Press CH or on the remote control to see
the channels in memory. Press ADJUST or to select
Added or Deleted for the channel shown in the Channel
number box.
Name
Analog channels shown on Antenna-1 or Antenna-2 can
be named (up to four characters). After you enter a
name, it will appear on the TV screen, next to the channel
number.
1. Press ADJUST or to select each letter.
2. Press ENTER to set the letter and move to the
next letter position.
3. Press CANCEL to move back one position.
Digital channels are automatically named if the
broadcaster sends the information.
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 73
Removing SQV channels using the remote control:
1. Press the SQV button and then the memory bank
number.
2. Press the SQV button repeatedly until you see the
desired channel.
3. While the channel number and SQV indicator (with
correct bank number) are still displayed on the
screen, press the CANCEL button. If the CANCEL
button is not pressed before the SQV indicator
disappears automatically, the channel will not be
removed.
4. When the SQV indicator disappears, the channel
has successfully been removed only from that bank.
“Other” banks remain unchanged.
Signal Strength
Displays the approximate signal strength of the currently
tuned digital channel. Use this indicator to help you
adjust the antenna direction for optimal signal strength.
The higher the bar, the stronger the signal. Does not
apply to analog channels.
You can change the tuned channel while in this menu so
that you can see the effects of antenna adjustments. To
change the channel, either:
• Highlight the channel box, press CH or ADJUST
to display the desired channel number, and
press ENTER.
• Enter the channel number on the remote control and
press ENTER.
SQV (SuperQuickView™)
Using The Menu Screen
Figure 17
SQV (SuperQuickView™) allows you to put together lists
of your favorite channels from Antenna 1 and Antenna
2. You can store channels in any of the 9 different SQV
memory banks. You can also store the same channel in
multiple memory banks. Once you have added a channel
to an SQV memory, “SQV” and the memory bank
number will appear under the tuned channel number on
the TV screen.
Adding SQV Channels
1. Select the channel using the “Channel” option box or
press CH or .
2. Highlight the bank (SQV1-SQV9).
3. Press ENTER to check mark the selected SQV memory
bank.
4. Repeat for additional channels or banks.
Removing SQV Channels
1. Highlight the box for the SQV bank number.
2. Press ENTER to remove the check mark.
SQV (SuperQuickView™)
Using The Remote Control
Viewing and changing SQV banks using the remote
control:
1. Press the SQV button.
2. To change memory banks, press a number button
within 5 seconds of pressing the SQV button.
3. Press the SQV button repeatedly to cycle through the
channels available in that bank.
Adding SQV channels using the remote control:
1. Press CH , , or number buttons to select the
channel you want to add to the current SQV memory
bank.
2. Press and hold the SQV button for about 2 seconds.
When “SQV” and the memory bank number
appear under the channel number, the channel has
successfully been added.
Channel Menu, continued
7 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
Captions Menu
Captions Menu
Figure 18
For analog channels, broadcasters can send either
Standard or Text closed captioning. Standard Closed
Captions follows the dialogue of the characters on screen
and displays in a small section of the screen. Text Closed
Captions often contain information such as weather or
news and covers a large portion of the screen.
On digital channels, broadcasters can send up to six
different captioning selections or can send analog
captions the same as the analog station sends. Each TV
station may broadcast only one or two types of captions
or none at all. The TV cannot decode Closed Captions
received on COMPONENT 1–3 or HDMI 1 or 2.
Figure 18. Captions Menu
Analog Captions
The TV can display one of the following captions for
Analog sources:
• CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4. (Standard closed
captioning signals).
• Text1, Text2, Text3, or Text4. (Text closed
captioning signals).
• On if mute. Closed captions when mute. When
selected, the standard closed captioning signal
(CC1) will turn on/off by pressing MUTE on the TV
remote control.
• Off. No closed captions.
Background
To make the analog closed captions easier to read, you
can choose to display the background color as either
black or gray behind the captions.
Digital Captions
The TV can display one of the following Captions for
Digital sources:
• Captions 1-6. Sent by broadcaster.
• On if Mute. Closed captions when mute. When
selected, the captioning signal (Caption 1) will turn
on/off by pressing MUTE on the TV remote control.
• Off. No closed captions.
Note: For digital programs, if the broadcaster is
sending only analog captions converted to digital,
then the analog captions settings apply.
Appearance
Closed Captions provider selects the Default options
when sending digital closed captions. You may select
the Custom option to override and customize Closed
Captions appearance. These settings do not apply to
analog Closed Captioning converted to digital.
Digital Settings
Figure 19
Move the highlight to the Digital Settings icon and
press ENTER. The Digital Settings menu allows you to
customize the appearance of the closed captions sent by
the broadcaster. Digital settings do not apply to analog
closed captions converted to digital.
Figure 19. Closed Captions Menu Digital Settings
When analog text closed captioning is
selected, a large black or gray box appears
on your TV screen if no signal is broadcast.
IMPORTANT
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 75
Fonts
You can customize the text of digital captions by
selecting the font of your choice. The available font
options are as follows:
• Default—Selected by the Closed Captions
provider
• Font 1—Monospaced font with serifs
• Font 2—Proportionally spaced font with serifs
• Font 3—Monospaced font without serifs
• Font 4—Proportionally spaced without serifs
• Font 5—Casual font
• Font 6—Cursive font
• Font 7—Small Capitals font
Size
You can also customize the text of digital captions
by selecting your desired size of font. Large is the
recommended font size.
Color
You can customize the text of digital captions by
selecting the font color. The available font colors are
listed below. Text and background cannot be set to the
same color.
White Yellow
Black Green
Magenta Cyan
Red Blue
Background
To make the digital closed captions easier to read,
you can choose the background color. The available
background colors are listed below. Text and
background cannot be set to the same color.
White Yellow
Black Green
Magenta Cyan
Red Blue
Captions Menu, continued
Opacity (Font)
You can customize the visibility of your fonts using the
following categories:
• Translucent—TV program is faintly visible behind the
text
• Transparent—See-through text reveals the TV
program
• Opaque—Solid color text; blocks the TV program
• Flashing—Text flashes at intervals
Background Opacity
You can customize the background for digital captions
using the following categories:
• Translucent—TV program is dimly visible behind the
background
• Transparent—See-through background reveals the TV
program
• Opaque—Solid background; covers TV program
• Flashing—Background flashes at intervals
IMPORTANT
We recommend you use contrasting colors for
captions and background. Black translucent
background combined with a white font make
and easy-to-read combination.
Use care when selecting custom colors. Your
choice may change the legibility or readability
of captions.
IMPORTANT
The content of captions is determined by the
broadcaster. If your captions show strange
characters, misspellings, or odd grammar, it is
not a malfunction of the TV.
76 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
V-Chip Lock Menu
V-Chip Lock Menu Overview
Figure 20
The V-Chip Lock menu gives you access to three different
types of TV locks. You must use a pass code to open
this menu to enable/disable the lock options. The three
different types of locks available are:
• V-Chip
Lets you restrict access to programming based on
program-rating signals sent by the broadcaster. You
can also set the time of day for these restrictions to
be in effect.
• Lock by Time
Lets you restrict all TV viewing by time of day.
• Front Button Lock
Gives you a way to disable the controls on the front
of the TV. Use this option if there are small children
near the TV who may be tempted to press the front-
panel buttons.
V-Chip Icon
Lock TV by
Time
Front Button
Lock On/Off
Figure 20. V-Chip Lock menu
Setting a Pass Code
You are prompted to enter a pass code whenever you
select V-Chip Lock on the menu or press the V-CHIP key
on the remote control. To set a pass code for the first
time:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press V-CHIP on the remote control.
• Press TV MENU, highlight V-Chip Lock, then
press ENTER.
A screen prompting you for a pass code displays.
2. Input a four-digit pass code using the number keys
on the remote control.
• Press CANCEL to delete a number and move
back one space.
• Press MENU or HOME to exit without setting
a pass code.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the pass code just input.
To reset the pass code, see the procedure in Appendix C.
V-Chip Menu
Figure 21
The V-Chip menu allows you to:
• Turn the V-Chip Lock on or off
• Change the permitted V-Chip rating level
• Set the time of day to enforce rating restrictions
The TV comes from the factory with pre-set V-Chip
ratings and with the V-Chip Lock turned off. The preset
ratings are TV-PG (TV rating) and PG (movie rating). If
you turn on the V-Chip, these presets will allow only
programs rated TV-PG/PG or lower. You can turn on
V-Chip from this menu or by using the V-CHIP button on
the remote control. Use the V-Chip menu to change the
permitted rating levels.
After changing channels or devices, there may be a delay
of up to five seconds before the V-Chip lock takes effect.
6
7 8

5
2
Figure 21. V-Chip menu
Setting V-Chip Options
1. Highlight the V-Chip icon on the V-Chip Lock
menu (figure 20) and press ENTER to open the
V-Chip menu (figure 21).
2. Press ADJUST or to select On or Off.
3. If you selected On, press ADJUST to move to the
TV Rating box.
4. Press ADJUST or to select the TV rating level
you want to allow.
IMPORTANT
If you forget your four-digit pass code, see
Appendix C.
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 77
V-Chip Lock Menu, continued
5. Press ADJUST to move to the TV content
categories.
• Press ADJUST or to move between
categories.
• Press ENTER to add check marks to the TV
content categories you want to block.
6. Press ADJUST to move to the Programs Not Rated
box. Press ENTER to add or delete a check mark to
allow or block programs that are not rated.
NOTE: Use care when choosing to block unrated
programming. News programs and emergency
bulletins carry the “None” or “NR” (Not Rated) V-Chip
rating, and these are blocked with this option active.
7. Press ADJUST to move to the Movie Rating box.
Press ADJUST or to select the movie rating level
you want to allow. See the next page for detailed
information on rating guidelines.
8. To set the time of day when these restrictions will be
in effect, press ADJUST to move to the Start box.
To set the time:
a. With the highlight on the hour number, press
ADJUST or repeatedly to change the hour.
You can also just press and hold to change the
hour.
b. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the
minutes.
c. With the highlight on the minutes number, press
ADJUST or repeatedly to change the
minutes. Just press and hold to move quickly
through the numbers.
d. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the am/
pm option. Press ADJUST or to make a
selection.
9. Press TV MENU to save the settings and close the
menu.
NOTE: To make the V-Chip restrictions active twenty-
four hours a day, set the V-Chip Start and Stop to the
same time.
The V-CHIP Button
Press the V-CHIP button on the remote control to turn the
V-Chip lock on and off without going through the menu.
A screen will appear prompting you for your pass code.
To change V-Chip settings, you must open the V-Chip
Lock Menu and then open the V-Chip menu.
Lock by Time
Lock by Time allows you to entirely block use of the TV
during specified hours. During the lock time, you must
use your pass code to view the TV. To lock the TV by
time:
1. Press ADJUST or to select On or Off for Lock by
Time.
2. Press ADJUST to move to the Lock Time box.
a. With the highlight on the hour number, press
ADJUST or repeatedly to change the hour.
You can also just press and hold to change the
hour.
b. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the
minutes.
c. With the highlight on the minutes number, press
ADJUST or repeatedly to change the
minutes. Just press and hold to move quickly
through the numbers.
d. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the am/
pm option. Press ADJUST or to make a
selection.
To make Lock by Time active 24 hours a day, set the Lock
and Unlock Times to the same time.
Front Button Lock
Figure 20
Front Button Lock lets you disable controls on the front
panel to prevent inadvertent changes to TV settings.
Select On to disable the buttons and select Off to restore
their operation.
To disable the front button lock without using the remote
control, press and hold the MENU button on the front
panel for more than eight seconds. If the TV is on, a
message will display confirming release of the Front
Button Lock.
Bypassing V-Chip Lock and Lock by
Time
If you try to watch blocked programming, a notice
appears prompting you for a pass code. To use the TV:
• Input your four-digit pass code and press ENTER.
• Change to a channel airing an allowed program or
change to another device.
If you try to use the TV when it is locked by time, a
similar screen appears, prompting you for your pass
code.
To reactivate the V-Chip lock or TV lock by time after
using the pass code, power the TV off and then on.
78 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
V-Chip Ratings
TV Ratings:
Used with TV programs and Made-for-TV movies.
TV-Y Youth, for children under the age of 7.
TV-Y7 Youth, 7 years old and older.
TV-G General Audience. For the entire family to view.
TV-PG Parental Guidance. Parental Guidance is recommended, may
not be suitable for some children.
TV-1 Adolescent 14 years old and older. Not recommended for
children under the age of 14.
TV-MA Mature Audience. For adults only.
Content Categories:
Used in association with the TV ratings above.
FV Fantasy Violence—applies to TV-Y7 only.
D Sexual Dialog—applies in different degrees to TV-PG and TV-14.
L Adult Language—applies in different degrees to TV-PG, TV-14, and TV-MA.
S Sexual Situations—applies in different degrees to TV-PG, TV-14, and TV-MA
V Violence (graphic or realistic)—applies in different degrees to TV-PG, TV-14, and TV-MA.
When you select a TV rating, you are selecting the least-restrictive program level that can be viewed. For
example, if you select TV-PG, you are allowing programs rated TV-Y, TV-Y7, TV-G and TV-PG to be seen and
blocking programs rated TV-1 and TV-MA. When you select a TV Content category, you will block all TV
programs that have the same content category listing. For example, if you select to block V (Violence) at the
TV-1 level, you will also block any program that has the V category listing at the TV-PG rating level as well.
Movie Ratings:
Used with theater released movies and direct-to-video movies.
G General Audience—Designed for the entire family to view.
PG Parental Guidance—Parental Guidance is recommended, may not be suitable for some children.
PG-13 Parental Guidance 13 years old and older—Not recommended for children under the age of 13.
R Restricted—Restricted in the theater to 17 years old and older unless accompanied by an adult.
NC-17 No Children 17 or under—Restricted in theater to 18 years old and older.
X Adult—Designed for and restricted in the theater to adult audiences only.
When you select a movie rating, you are selecting the
least-restrictive program level that can be viewed. For
example, if you select a movie rating of PG-13, you are
allowing movies rated G, PG and PG-13 to be seen and
blocking movies rated R, NC-17, and X.
Programs Not Rated: Used for programs that are not
rated, such as news, sports, weather, emergency bulletins,
or movies prior to or without MPAA Ratings. This does not
include programs without V-Chip signals.
TV Rating FV D L S V
TV-Y
TV-Y7 X
TV-PG X X X X
TV-14 X X X X
TV-MA X X X
V-Chip Signal Information
When provided by the broadcaster, V-Chip ratings can be used to control which programs can be viewed or will be
blocked. When V-Chip ratings are sent, you will see the ratings when you change the channel or when you press the
INFO button on the remote control. Both TV and Movie ratings will display. TV ratings apply to programs and movies
developed for TV and may have supplemental blocking by content categories. Movie ratings use MPAA ratings for
movies released in theaters.
V-CHIP EXCEPTIONS:
1. V-Chip is not effective for programs viewed on devices connected to component inputs or HDMI. Many of these
devices, however, have their own parental control systems.
2. Videotapes, laser discs and DVDs may not contain V-Chip rating signals. If they don’t contain the V-Chip signal,
V-Chip cannot block the program or movie.
3. Broadcasters are not currently required to include V-Chip rating signals at this time. If the broadcaster does not
include the V-Chip rating signal, V-Chip cannot block the program.
IMPORTANT
If you elect to block programs that carry the
V-Chip rating “Programs Not Rated,” you
may block news or emergency bulletins,
when “None” or “NR” Not Rated V-Chip
rating is included. Use care when blocking
programming that is not rated.
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 79
Audio/Video
Figure 22
Figure 22. Audio/Video Menu
A/V Memory Reset
A/V Memory Reset allows you to reset a specific device’s
A/V settings to the original factory settings. Select the
device name in the box and press ENTER. Note that the
audio settings of Balance, Listen to, and Language are
general TV settings unaffected by A/V Memory Reset. To
reset all A/V settings at once, including the three general
settings, press the front-panel buttons GUIDE and
FORMAT simultaneously (A/V Reset).
Settings
Each device has its own A/V memory. Select the device
in A/V Memory Reset, then select Audio or Video to
adjust the device’s individual settings. Press ENTER,
and the menu is removed and the individual settings are
displayed.
Use ADJUST or to select the individual settings
to be adjusted. Use ADJUST or to make the
adjustment. For descriptions of the individual A/V
settings see A/V Setting Descriptions, pages 80 and 81.
Video Mute
Video Mute lets you display a blue background when no
signal is being received on Inputs 1–3, COMPONENT 1–3,
and HDMI 1 and 2.
Film Mode
Auto is the default setting. With Auto selected, the
TV automatically detects and applies film-decoding
correction for images that originated on 24-frame-
per-second film cameras and were then converted to
30-frame-per-second video for broadcast. Try the Off
setting if the TV adds too many jagged edges to the
images.
Audio/Video Menu
Using the AUDIO or VIDEO Button on
the Remote Control
To adjust individual Audio or Video settings directly with
the remote control:
1. Press AUDIO or VIDEO to cycle through the available
settings.
2. Press ADJUST or to adjust the setting. After
five seconds of inactivity, the setting display will
disappear.
When the original video was filmed on 30-frame-per-
second cameras, the Auto setting automatically applies
video decoding, the same as used with the Off setting.
Film Mode is not effective for high-definition signals.
TV Speakers
When an A/V receiver has not been set up in
NetCommand, this selection will turn the TV’s internal
speakers on or off. You may select Off when sending
the sound through a separate stereo system or surround
sound A/V receiver.
This option is unavailable (grayed out) when
NetCommand
®
is enabled and you have selected the A/V
receiver icon from the Device Selection menu. In that
case, Netcommand automatically turns the TV speakers
off. See the NetCommand information for further
instructions.
Note: To prevent damage from a sudden increase in
volume, make sure the TV volume is set to low before
setting speakers to On.
80 Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations
Audio Settings
Analog and Digital Audio Settings
A slider displays on screen for most settings. When the
slider is displayed, it has a numeric value, so that 63 is
the maximum, 31 is the mid-point, and 0 is the minimum.
◊ Bass
Enhances or reduces low-pitched sound.
◊ Treble
Enhances or reduces high-pitched sound.
◊ Balance
Adjusts the level of sound between the left and right
speakers.
◊ Surround
Creates simulated stereo and surround effects
through the TV speakers. Your choices are:
• Off: No surround effects.
• Simulated Stereo: Your TV will create a simulated
stereo effect when watching a non-stereo
program.
• Surround Sound: Your TV will create a simulated
surround effect when watching a stereo program.
◊ Level Sound
Turn On or Off to automatically equalize the
volume level when there are significant sound-level
differences between program segments, e.g.,
between regular programming and commercials. To
receive the best fidelity with music programs, turn
this setting to Off. When connecting to an A/V
receiver, set level sound to OFF and turn the TV
speakers off to send full dynamics to the A/V receiver.
Analog-Only Audio Settings
You can set analog-only audio settings while viewing
either analog or digital sources, but the settings affect
broadcast or recorded analog content.
◊ Listen to
Determines how your TV receives a broadcast audio
signal and plays the sound you hear.
Your choices are:
• Stereo: Default setting. The TV plays stereo
broadcasts in stereo and mono broadcasts in
mono. The word “Stereo” is displayed when you
tune to a channel broadcasting in stereo.
• SAP (Second Audio Program): Additional
monaural sound track that you cannot hear
during normal TV viewing. The SAP signal might
be related to the program you are watching,
(such as a sound track in a foreign language), or
it might be unrelated (such as a weather report).
If an SAP signal is broadcast, the letters “SAP”
are displayed when you tune to the channel.
• Mono: Reduces background noise. Use when
receiving a weak stereo audio signal. All audio is
played mono with this setting.
Listen to is not available for devices connected to the TV
Inputs, component inputs, or 1394 devices.
Digital-Only Audio Settings
You can set digital-only audio settings while viewing
either analog or digital sources, but the settings affect
only broadcast or recorded digital content.
◊ Language
Determines what possible language you can hear.
Your choices are:
English Portuguese
French Spanish
German Other
Italian
NOTE: The effects of the audio settings of Bass, Treble, Balance and Surround affect the sound heard through the
TV speakers only.
IEEE 139 Amplifier Settings
◊ Balance
Adjusts the level of sound between the left and right
speakers. The slider range is 0–254, with 127 at the
center.
◊ Loudness
Set to On to make the audio level more uniform.
◊ Preset
Select the mode that matches the audio source.
Your choices are:
• Off • Classical Music
• Jazz • Movie
• Rock • Speech
◊ Equalizer
Equalize the sound.
Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 81
Video Settings
Video Settings
Press the VIDEO key repeatedly to cycle through the
Video options to the one you want to change. Use
ADJUST to change settings.
Bright/Natural Modes
Bright and Natural modes are available for some settings
and allow you to optimize the image for a brighter
(daytime) or dimmer (nighttime) viewing environment. To
do this, your TV remembers two independent Contrast,
Brightness, and Color Temperature settings, one for each
of the two modes. Whenever you change settings for
Contrast, Brightness, or Color Temperature, first check
which of the two modes (Bright/Natural) is active.
◊ Contrast (Bright/Natural)
Provides a slider to adjust the white-to-black level.
Low contrast shows a variety of shades in darker
images, while high contrast shows darker images
more uniformly black and makes colors appear more
vibrant. In most home lighting situations, a medium
contrast looks best. High contrast is good for
brightly lit environments.
◊ Brightness (Bright/Natural)
Provides a slider to adjust the overall brightness of
the picture.
◊ Color
Provides a slider to adjust the color intensity.
◊ Tint
Provides a slider to adjust the ratio of red to green.
◊ Sharpness
Provides a slider to adjust the detail and clarity.
◊ Color Temp (Bright/Natural)
Allows you to adjust how white images are displayed.
Your choices are:
• Low: White images will have a warm cast to them.
This adjustment is an average and can vary due
to ambient room lighting, video scene brightness,
and the TV’s age. Natural/Color Temp at the
low setting displays video at the 6500K industry
standard for NTSC pictures.
• High: White images will have a cool cast to them.
This setting may provide the most realistic picture
under bright lighting.
◊ PerfectColor™
Adjusts any or all of six colors (Magenta, Red, Yellow,
Green, Cyan and Blue) to create color balance.
When you select PerfectColor and press ENTER,
you can adjust the colors automatically or manually
(individually).
Individual sliders for each color are displayed.
Highlighted text shows which slider you are
adjusting. Each TV input or device has a memory for
PerfectColor. While using the PerfectColor option,
press CANCEL if you want to reset the colors to the
default settings.
◊ Video Noise
Use to reduce minor noise (graininess) in the
broadcast received on Ant-1 and Ant-2, Inputs
1–3, Component 1–3, and HDMI 1 and 2. Use the
Standard setting with good-quality signals.
NOTE: A slider displays on screen for most settings.
When the slider is displayed, it represents numeric
values, with 63 as the maximum, 31 as the mid-point,
and 0 as the minimum.
◊ DeepField™ Imager
When On is selected, the black levels are dynamically
enhanced in portions of the screen to provide strong
contrast with detail over mixed screen content.
When Off is selected, the entire screen adjusts the
contrast the same. When Demo is selected, a split
screen picture appears and you can see how the
picture will look when DeepField Imager is On (right
side) or when it is Off (left side).
◊ SharpEdge™
When ON is selected, special edge sharpness
enhancements are applied to the vertical edges of
images.
PC Video Settings
◊ Auto Position. Press ENTER to automatically center
the position of the PC video.
◊ HorizPosition (Horizontal Position). Manually
adjust the horizontal position of the PC. This
selection overrides the Auto Position selection.
◊ VertPosition (Vertical Position). Manually adjust
the vertical position of the PC. This selection
overrides the Auto Position selection.
◊ Fine Detail. Manually adjust the picture quality of
the PC. This selection overrides the Auto Position
selection.
Chapter
Additional Features
CableCARD™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MediaCommand™ and Memory Card Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Operation of PIP and POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
TV Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
On-Screen Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6
8 Chapter 6. Additional Features
Using a CableCARD™
After inserting a CableCARD into the TV back
panel CableCARD slot and powering On the TV, the
initialization process begins. An initial screen will
automatically display for a few minutes, with information
that your Cable Provider will need in order to start
service. Please write down this information before calling
your cable provider.
Please call XYZ Cable
at xxx-xxx-xxxx to
activate cable service.
They will need these numbers:
Host ID X-XXX-XXX-XXX-XXX
CableCARD
TM
ID: X-XXX-XXX-XXX-XXX
See owner's manual for
further information
An example of an initial screen is shown here. Your
screen will display specific information from your cable
provider and may not look like this screen.
If you were unable to record the information, you can
press TV MENU on the remote and then enter the
number 999 and the screen will re-display. You can
also press DEVICE MENU when the CableCARD is the
selected source and you will be able to select the startup
application.
CableCARD™
CableCARD™ Technology
CableCARD is a nationwide system standard that allows
your local cable TV provider to supply you with an access
card customized to your account. This card allows your
TV to receive, decode and unscramble the premium
digital channels included in your cable TV subscription
without the use of a cable box. It also allows your
cable provider to automatically update and change your
subscription. When you move to a new cable provider’s
area, you simply return the CableCARD to the original
cable provider and get a new card from your new cable
provider.
Please note that CableCARD is a new technology and
your local cable provider may not currently be offering
this service. As time passes, this system will become
broadly supported by most cable providers.
The CableCARD system is “unidirectional” which means
your cable provider can send updates to the access
card and TV, however, the TV cannot send back signals
such as requests for Video-On-Demand or Pay-per-View
programs by remote control.
Digital cable channels authorized by the CableCARD
will be available on the Firewire® IEEE 1394 network
and can be shared by other products on the network.
Some digital channels or programs may not be copied
or recorded because of copy restriction limits set by the
content owners or copyright holders.
The digital television is capable of receiving analog
basic, digital basic, and digital premium cable
television programming by direct connection to a
cable system providing such programming. A security
card (CableCARD) provided by your cable operator is
required to view encrypted digital programming. Certain
advanced and interactive digital cable services, such as
video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program
guide, and data-enhanced television services, may
require the use of a set-top box. For more information,
call your local cable operator.
Please see page 19 for instructions on inserting the
CableCARD.
IMPORTANT
To use a CableCARD, the primary incoming
cable must be connected to ANT-1 MAIN.
Chapter 6. Additional Features 85
MediaCommand™ and Memory Card Playback
Memory Card Slots
Inserting a memory card
1. Insert a card into a matching card slot on the front
of the TV. Be sure to use the correct card slot.
Card 1 accepts SmartMedia™. Card 2 accepts
MultiMediaCard™ and SD Media Card. Card 3
accepts CompactFlash® and MicroDrive®. Card
4 accepts MEMORY STICK™ and Memory Stick Pro.
Cards up to 1 GB, with a file format of FAT 16 (block
size = 1024 or 2048) are supported.
Normally the label side should be up, but if the card
does not fit, try turning the card over and insert again.
When properly inserted, the light next to the slot will
light up.
2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the
Device Selection Menu and then select the correct
card slot from the list, using ADJUST .
3. The Media Dialog box (figure 1) will automatically
display. Use the AUDIO button to switch from JPEG
Picture Slide show setup to MP3 or WMA Audio
Playlist setup or use the VIDEO button on the remote
to switch from the MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist setup
to JPEG Picture Slide show setup.
Don’t pull the memory card out while it is playing.
For Slideshow, press PLAY.
For Thumbnails, press GUIDE.
To redisplay this menu or to
setup, press DEVICE MENU.
For Playlist, press AUDIO.
Figure 1. Media Dialog Box
4. On the remote control, press:
PLAY: to start the slide show or play audio.
GUIDE: to display the JPEG Thumbnail menu (Figure 2)
or Audio track playlist (Figure 3)
DEVICE
MENU: to display the Media Setup menu (Figure 4).
Remote Control Buttons for Controlling the Playback
For JPEG Picture Slide show:
PLAY: begins or resumes slide show playback
PAUSE: pauses or resumes playback while in the
automatic advance mode.
FF: skips to the last slide on the page.
REW: returns to the first slide on the page.
FORMAT: single press rotates the slide 90˚. Multiple
presses continue to rotate the slide.
STOP: Stop slide show, return to memory card
screen.
For MP3 or WMA Audio Playback
PLAY: begins or resumes playlist playback.
PAUSE: pauses or resumes playback.
FF: skips to the last track/song on the page.
REW: skips to the first track/song on the page.
STOP: Stop playback and returns to memory card
screen.
Using the Picture Thumbnail Menu or Audio Playlist
Menu
For JPEG Picture Thumbnail Menu:
Figure 2
1. Press GUIDE on the remote to display the JPEG
picture Thumbnail menu.
2. Press ADJUST to move the highlight to
different images (CH up/down will change pages of
the Thumbnail menu). Use REW to go to the first slide
and FF to go to the last slide on the page.
3. Press FORMAT to rotate the selected image 90˚
(pressing FORMAT four times will rotate the image
completely around to the original position).
4. Press PLAY to begin playback of the Slide show from
the selected image. The Thumbnail menu will be
taken down.
Figure 2. JPEG Thumbnails
Warning: Some memory cards available on the market are not properly certified to follow the card type
specifications noted below and cannot be used by the card reader. If you experience problems with the
reading of your file, please transfer your files to a properly certified card.
86 Chapter 6. Additional Features
Media Command™ and Memory Card Playback, continued
JPEG images cannot be edited through the TV.
Only name changes should be made on your PC
to avoid file incompatibility problems.
MP3s must have at least 32-kHz sampling rate.
IMPORTANT
For MP3 or WMA Playlist Menu:
Figure 3
1. Press GUIDE to display the Playlist menu.
2. Press ADJUST or to select different tracks (CH
up/down will change pages of the Playlist). Use REW
to go to the first track on the page and FF to go to the
last track on the page.
3. Press PLAY to begin playback. The Playlist menu
will be taken down. The song currently playing will be
highlighted.
Figure 3. Audio Playlist
COMPATIBLE PICTURE OR AUDIO FILES:
For JPEG Pictures up to 1 GB:
1. Still images recorded on digital cameras using the
Exchangeable Image File Format, version 2.1 (EXIF
2.1) standard for digital still cameras and Design
Rules for Camera File Systems version 1.0 (DCF 1.0)
Some images opened and resaved on a computer
may not play back or may not be able to display a
picture in the thumbnail list because the computer
program that opened and resaved the images
changed the file to an incompatible format.
2. Standard digital images with a maximum size of
5 megapixels for each image, or 2560 x 1920 pixels.
Pictures will be scaled to the TV display. Some
pictures may be cropped to fit.
3. Full path file names can be no longer than 50
characters and must end in a .jpg extension. Not all
50 characters will display.
Images stored on cards larger than 256MB can take a
longer initial time to display.
For MP3 or WMA Audio files:
• Files recorded with sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1
kHz or 48 kHz.
• Files recorded with fixed bit rates
• File names with .mp3 or .wma extensions
NOTES
• During MP3 audio playback, audio from the card is
sent to the A/V receiver as analog audio. Digital out
is not available.
• Repetitive noise may be present when playing WMA
digital audio files from memory files.
Media Setup Menu
Figure 4
Press DEVICE MENU at any time to display the Media
Setup screen, where you can adjust the Slide show
Display, Frequency, Interval or Playlist Frequency.
For JPEG Picture Slide Show Setup
• For JPEG picture slide show playback, select
Automatic or Manual advance. For manual operation,
press PLAY or ENTER on the remote control to
advance each slide.
• For automatic advance, select the frequency or
number of times to show the complete slide show,
Once, Twice or Continuously.
• For automatic advance, select the interval time each
slide is shown, for example, five seconds, or 30
seconds
For MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist Setup
Select the frequency or number of times to play the
complete playlist. Once, Twice or Continuously.
To exit, press DEVICE MENU on the remote control to
redisplay the memory card screen.
Figure 4. Media Setup Menu
Chapter 6. Additional Features 87
Press PIP/POP to activate the PIP/POP option.
Repeatedly press the PIP/POP button on the TV remote
control and within seconds of each press, the PIP/POP
cycles through the display options below.
To turn PIP/POP off:
• Press PIP/POP repeatedly until the TV returns to full-
screen mode.
• Press PIP/POP and wait at least 10 seconds. Press
PIP/POP again. The next time you activate PIP/POP,
the last-used PIP/POP option will be displayed.
MAlN
PlCTURE
Side-by-Side
(Sub-Picture)
Side-by-side
pictures
(Not available
when PC is one
source)
MAlN
PlCTURE
POP 1
POP 2
POP 3
Sub-Pictures
3 POP
(Not available
when PC is one
source)
PlP Ant-1 17 Ant-1 2 XXXX
Standard
Stereo SAP
Tv-PG DLSv
SQv1
PlP
Sub-Picture
PIP
(Available for PC
with PC as main
picture only)
Ant-1 2 XXXX
Standard
Stereo SAP
TV-PG DLSV
SQV1
PIP off
Operation of PIP and POP
Changing PIP/POP Device
When PIP/POP is displayed, press PIP DEVICE to change
the PIP/POP picture source device. A menu similar to the
Device Selection menu will be displayed.
Changing PIP/Side-by-Side Channels
Press PIP CH to scroll up and down through memorized
channels on ANT-1 and ANT-2.
Exchanging Program Images
Press EXCH to exchange the main picture and the PIP/
POP picture. Pictures from digital channels can only be
shown as the main picture. PC images can only be the
main picture. If you press EXCH while viewing images
from a PC, the TV exchanges audio with the PIP but
leaves the main image in place.
Moving a PIP Image
If no menus are on screen, press ADJUST
to move the PIP display anywhere on the main screen.
When the main picture is from a PC, the PIP can be
moved through four designated positions.
Automatic POP Switching
During POP display, the TV cycles through memorized
analog channels on Ant-1 or Ant-2 or displays “strobed”
images from playback of other A/V components. Press
PAUSE to pause or restart automatic POP switching.
Selecting POP “Live” Image
Press ADJUST to select a different POP “live”
image (automatic POP switching must be paused.)
Freezing the PIP and Side-by-Side Pictures
Press PAUSE to freeze the PIP and side-by-side images.
Press PAUSE again to return to a “live” image.
IMPORTANT
• The Side-by-Side feature cannot show the
picture from the same device or the same
channel from the same antenna input on
both sides.
• The main picture and a different sub-
picture cannot both be from Ant-2.
• Pictures from HDMI-1 and HDMI-2 cannot
be shown together as main and sub-
pictures
• A PC picture can only be the main picture.
The Side-by-Side and PIP/POP features let you view pictures from two different sources at the same time. In summary:
View as either main
picture or sub-picture
• Analog channels
• Devices on Video/S-Video inputs
• Devices on Component inputs
• Devices on either HDMI input
View as main picture
only
• Digital channels received from CableCARD™ or either Antenna input
• TV Disc
• IEEE 1394 devices
• PC images
88 Chapter 6. Additional Features
TV Display Formats
Press FORMAT on the TV remote control to cycle through
the available display formats. The last-used format for
each device is used when you return to that device.
Note: Not all formats are available for PIP/
POP. Side-by-Side is only available in Standard
and Expand formats. Three-POP is available
in Standard format only. PC formats vary
depending on the PC signal.
Signal Definitions
80i Signals: Traditional analog interlaced signals from
or through ANT-1 and 2, INPUT 1 and 2, COMPONENT 1–3,
and HDMI 1 and 2.
80p Signals: Progressive-scan analog DVD signals on
COMPONENT inputs and HDMI 1 and 2.
720p & 1080i Signals: High-definition analog signals
received through COMPONENT 1–3 and HDMI 1 and 2.
These signals are always 16:9 (widescreen).
SD :3: Standard-definition narrow-screen format signals
from digital channels and IEEE 1394 devices.
SD 16:9: Standard-definition widescreen format signals
from digital channels and IEEE 1394 devices.
HD: High-definition wide-screen format signals from digital
channels and IEEE-1394 devices. These signals are always
16:9 (widescreen).
DVD Definitions:
Anamorphic (or Enhanced for Wide-Screen TV’s):
These DVDs are recorded in a special way to properly
show widescreen images on 16:9 TV sets in the Standard
format mode. This is the recommended choice.
Non-Anamorphic (or :3, 1:33:1, Letter box or Full
Screen):
These DVDs are recorded for use with traditional shaped
TVs. They may be full screen (4:3 or 1:33:1) which crops
movies to fit the narrow TV, or Letter boxed, which adds
black top and bottom bars.
This information may or may not be listed on the DVD
case. Some DVDs support both types of recordings.
Format Definitions
Standard: This is the full-screen format. HDTV signals
use this format. This format is useful for displaying
Anamorphic DVDs that have 1.78:1 or 1.85:1 aspect
ratios. Anamorphic DVDs that have a 2.35:1 aspect ratio
are displayed with black bars at the top and bottom, but
show the entire image correctly. Narrow (4:3) images
are stretched evenly from side to side. Available for all
signals.
Expand: This enlarges the picture to fill the screen,
cropping off some of the image at the top and bottom.
This is useful for reducing the letter box top and bottom
bars of non-anamorphic DVD images. Available for
analog 480i, 480p and digital SD 4:3 signals only.
Zoom: This enlarges the picture, cropping off some
of the image at each side and top and bottom. This is
useful for removing or reducing the black top and bottom
bars on anamorphic DVDs with a 2.35:1 aspect ratio.
Available for analog 480i and 480p and SD 4:3 signals
only.
Stretch: This format stretches a narrow (4:3) image
across the screen; there is less stretch in the center
than at the sides, however. This allows the entire narrow
image to be displayed across the screen with less
distortion than is seen in the Standard format. Available
for analog 480i and 480p and SD 4:3 signals only.
Stretch Plus: Similar to stretch mode, but to minimize
distortions on the side, the picture is expanded to
crop off portions of the top and bottom. When no PIP
is displayed, you can press ADJUST up or down to
vertically adjust the position of the picture. Available for
analog 480i and 480p and SD 4:3 signals only.
Narrow: This format displays narrow (4:3) images in their
original shape, and adds stationary black side bars to fill
the screen. Available for 480i, 480p and digital SD 4:3
signals only.
Wide Expand: Enlarges the picture, cropping some of
the image on both sides. This Expand format is useful
to remove or reduce black side bars added to narrow
images that are converted to 16:9 signals for digital
broadcast. Available for analog 1080i, 720p, digital SD
16:9 and digital HD signals.
This is a widescreen TV, also known as a 16:9 TV. This shape reflects the new types of images available from HDTV
and many DVDs. There are still many older style narrow-screen images (called 4:3 aspect ratio) you will encounter.
While there will never be a perfect solution for displaying a narrow image on a wide screen, Mitsubishi offers several
display formats from which to choose.
Chapter 6. Additional Features 89
ORIGINAL SIGNAL
Non-anamorph|c or SD 4:3
ORIGINAL SIGNAL
Anamorph|c DVD
TV D|sp|ay
Standard
(not recommended, distorted)
Stretch
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(recommended for standard broadcast)
Standard
(recommended)
TV D|sp|ay
Narrow
Stretch Plus
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(recommended for standard broadcast)
Standard
Original HD or SD
16:9, 720p or 1080i
(with side bars in broadcast)
Expand
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i

Zoom
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(not recommended, distorted)
Expand
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(not recommended, distorted)
Zoom
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(recommended for anamorphic 2.35:1)
Stretch
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(not recommended, distorted)
Stretch Plus
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(not recommended, distorted)
Narrow
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(not recommended, distorted)
Wide Expand
available only for
digital SD 16:9, HD,
analog 1080i or 720p
(recommended to remove side bars)
H
D

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

(recommended for letterboxed)
TV Display Formats
90 Chapter 6. Additional Features
On-Screen Information
When you turn on the TV, change devices, change channels, or when you press the INFO button on the
remote control, the TV will display the current status. Below are the most common displays. Please note
that seldom or never do all of the different status indicators appear at the same time.
Analog Program
1. Antenna or Device being viewed
2. Analog channel being received: If antenna
being viewed
3. Channel name (if manually programmed)
4. Signal Type being received
Possible:
Ant-1, Ant-2 or Input 1–3 – 480i
Component 1, 2 – 480i, 480p, 720p or 1080i
5. Screen format being used
Possible:
Analog 480i /480p signals – Standard,
Expand, Zoom, Stretch, Stretch Plus, Narrow
720p/1080i signals - Standard, Wide Expand
6. Stereo and/or SAP being broadcast
7. V-Chip Ratings
8. Channel in SuperQuickView bank 2
9. Day and Time
10. Sleep Timer remaining time
11. PIP source and channel
12. Program name (if provided by TV Guide On
Screen®)
13. Audio Mute on (shown with digital signals)
Digital Program
1. Digital Major and Sub channel number
2. Digital Channel Name (only if broadcast)
3. Signal Type being broadcast/received
Possible: SD 4:3, SD 16:9 or HD
4. Screen format being used
Possible:
SD 4:3 - Standard, Expand, Zoom, Stretch,
Stretch Plus, Narrow
SD 16:9 or HD - Standard, Wide Expand
5. Language(s) being broadcast
6. Program Name (if broadcast)
7. Copy-Protection Status
Possible:
COPY FREE: Program can be recorded
COPY ONCE: Program can be recorded
COPY NO MORE: Program can never be
recorded
TV Disc or Digital IEEE 139 Device
1. Status of D-VHS VCR or IEEE 1394 device
2. Counter of D-VHS VCR
3. Media type in D-VHS VCR
4. Special message line
(shows only when a special message is needed;
may be seen with Analog signals)
Note: When viewing TV Disc, press INFO a second
time to display the TV Pause slider.
DVCR
HD Standard
English
TV-PG DLSV Copy Once
Play 01:20:15
DVHS
Monday 11:00 AM
Sleep Timer: 30
Special Message Line
Ant-1 3 XXXX XXXXXXXXX ANT-1 3
80i Standard
Stereo SAP
TV-PG DLSV
SQV2
Monday 11:00 AM
Sleep Timer: 30
MUTE
12
6 7
2
1
3
8
9

5
10
11
2
1
3

13
Ant-1 2-1 XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
HD Standard
English
TV-PG DLSV Copy Once
SQV2
Monday 11:00 AM
Sleep Timer: 30
6 2
1
3

5
7
Chapter
7
Using the TV with a PC
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Computer with a DVI Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Computer with a 15-Pin Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PC Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
92 Chapter 7. Using the TV with a PC
Overview
1. Connect the Computer to the TV
See the connection diagrams in this chapter to find
the method best suited to your needs.
2. Perform NetCommand Setup for the PC
• For first-time NetCommand setup:
Start NetCommand setup as described in chapter
3 and check mark the PC check box in the Device
Setup screen.
• If NetCommand has already been set up:
Press TV MENU and select the NetCommand
icon. In the Edit NetCommand screen, select
Add and follow the on-screen prompts to add the
PC. See chapter 3 for more information.
3. Select the PC in the Device Selection menu
1 Press DEVICE to open the Device Selection
menu.
2. Move the highlight to the PC icon.
3. Press DEVICE again to close the menu.
4. Change the resolution of the PC image
Maximize the resolution while maintaining a suitable
aspect ratio for the image. See the explanation later
in this chapter.
5. Perform TV video adjustments
Press VIDEO repeatedly until you see the PC video
settings displayed on screen. Your choices are:
Auto Position. Press ENTER to automatically
center the position of the PC video.
HorizPosition (Horizontal Position). Manually
adjust the horizontal position of the PC. This
selection overrides the Auto Position selection.
VertPosition (Vertical Position). Manually adjust
the vertical position of the PC. This selection
overrides the Auto Position selection.
Fine Detail. Manually adjust the picture quality of
the PC. This selection overrides the Auto Position
selection.
6. Change the TV picture format
Press FORMAT to cycle through the available picture
formats. See the chart later in this chapter showing
how various PC resolutions are displayed on the TV.
Connecting a PC
Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output
Figure 1
An HDMI-to-HDMI cable is required. This is not included with
the TV. It may be available at your local electronics retailer
1. Connect an HDMI cable from HDMI 2 on the TV back
panel to the PC’s HDMI output. Both video and
audio are provided through this single cable.
2. Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 only:
a. Perform the NetCommand PC setup described in
step 2 under “Overview” on this page.
b. Select the NetCommand Change option as follows:
(1) Press TV MENU.
(2) Highlight the NetCommand icon and press
ENTER.
(3) Highlight Change and press ENTER.
3. In the Connection for PC screen, change TV Input
from PC to HDMI-2.
4. Advance to the finish screen to complete the change.
PC with HDMl Output
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
HDMl 2
Figure 1. Connecting a Computer with an HDMI Monitor
Output
IMPORTANT
• After connecting the PC, activate the PC option in NetCommand. Do this either during initial NetCommand setup
(in the Device Setup screen), or at any time afterwards with the NetCommand Add function. See chapter 3.
• See Appendix A for signal compatibility.
CAUTION: To ensure continued FCC
compliance, the user must use a
shielded video interface or HDMI cable
with bonded ferrite cores at both ends when
using the PC input.
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a PC 93
CAUTION: To ensure continued FCC
compliance, the user must use a
shielded video interface or HDMI cable
with bonded ferrite cores at both ends
when using the PC input.
Computer with a 15-Pin Monitor
Output
Models WD-62927 and WD-73927
Figure 3
A 15-pin PC monitor cable and stereo audio cables are required.
These cables are not supplied.
1. Connect PC Monitor Out from the computer to
PC INPUT on the TV back panel using a 15-pin
PC monitor cable. See Appendix A for PC signal
compatibility.
2. Connect the L (left) and R (right) audio cables from
the computer to INPUT DVI Analog Audio 2 on the TV
back panel. If the computer’s audio output is a single
mini-jack, a mini audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adaptor
cable is needed to complete this connection.
Note: To receive the benefits of a digital A/V receiver,
connect your computer’s digital audio out, if available,
to a digital input on your digital A/V receiver.
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i)
lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
CableCARD¹USEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
PC lNPUT - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA, SvGA,
W-SvGA, XGA, W-XGA,
1280 X 720, 1920 X 1080
(480i/480p/720p/1080i)
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
3
lNPUT
$PNQVUFSXJUI.POJUPS0VUQVU
57
Figure 3. Connecting a computer with monitor output.
Computer with a DVI Monitor Output
Figure 2
A DVI-to-HDMI cable or DVI/HDMI adaptor and HDMI cable and
audio cables are required. These are not included with the TV.
They may be available at your local electronics retailer.
1. Connect the DVI-to-HDMI cable (recommended) (or
DVI/HDMI adaptor with an HDMI cable) from the PC
DVI output to HDMI 2 on the TV back panel.
NOTE: If you are using a DVI/HDMI adaptor, it is
important to connect the adaptor to the DVI device
for best performance.
2. Connect the L (left) and R (right) audio cables
from AUDIO OUT on the PC back panel to INPUT/
DVI Analog Audio 2 on the TV back panel. If the
computer’s audio output is a single mini-jack, a mini
audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adaptor cable is needed to
complete this connection.
NOTE: The HDMI connection supports copy
protection (HDCP). Some devices require that you
connect to an analog input first before you can
view on-screen menus and select DVI as the ouput.
Please review your equipment instructions for DVI
connectivity and compatibility.
AUDlO OUT
LEFT
RlGHT
$6)/54
COMPONENT
YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) lNPUT
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
1 2
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1 2
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸
3
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
1 2
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
DTv/CABLE/
vHF/UHF
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUTPUT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
OUTPUT
AUDlO
OUTPUT
RECORD
OUTPUT
Dvl
Analog Audio
1 2
vlDEO
AUDIO-
LEFT/
(MONO)
AUDlO-
RlGHT
MONlTORLlNK¹/HDMl
vlDEO 480i/480p/720p/1080i
AUDlO PCM LlNEAR
1
lEEE1394
lNPUT/
OUTPUT
Net Command
lREMlTTER
¸
G-Link¸ G-Link G-Link
lNPUT
PC FOR HDMl 2
ONLY - 60Hz
vGA, W-vGA,
SvGA, W-SvGA,
XGA, 1280 X 720
USE WlTH
CableCARD¹
ANT 1 / MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
MONlTORLlNK¹
CONTROL/RS-232C
HDMl 2
Dvl-to-HDMl
Cable
PC with Dvl Output
Dvl
Analog
Audio 2
Tv Back Panel
Figure 2. Connecting a Computer with DVI Monitor Output
Connecting a PC
IMPORTANT
• After connecting the PC, activate the PC
option in NetCommand. Do this either during
initial NetCommand setup (in the Device Setup
screen), or at any time afterwards with the
NetCommand Add function. See chapter 3.
• See Appendix A for signal compatibility.
9 Chapter 7. Using the TV with a PC
Adjusting Image Resolution
Figure 4
Your Mitsubishi TV can display resolutions from standard
VGA (640 x 480) through XGA (1024 x 768) at 60-Hz
refresh rates. Models WD-62927 and WD-73927
additionally support 1920 x 1080 signals on the 15-pin
PC INPUT. See Appendix A in this book for more on
compatible screen resolutions. The instructions below
are for setting the resolution on most PCs.
1. In the PC’s Start menu, select Settings.
2. Select Control Panel.
3. Select Display.
4. Choose the Settings tab.
5. Change the resolution to the highest resolution with
the aspect ratio best suited for the image. See the
table on the next page showing possible PC formats.
Depending on your PC, adjust the resolution with
either:
• the Screen area slider.
• the Screen Resolution slider
You may need to restart the PC for this change to take
effect.
Hint: Whenever the TV is powered on, the lamp is
in use, even if the TV screen appears dark. As a
reminder that the TV is powered on and that time
is being added to the lamp’s elapsed hours, set the
computer’s screen saver to a pattern that will display
after several minutes of inactivity.
1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
Figure 4. PC resolution XGA selection
Adjusting Image Resolution
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a PC 95
PC Display Formats
Format 16 X 9 Standard X 3 Standard
VGA
640 X 480
1696 X 960 1280 X 960
WVGA
848 X 480
1696 X 960 1280 X 960
SVGA
800 X 600
1702 X 960 1280 X 960
WSVGA
1064 X 600
1702 X 960 1280 X 960
Format Standard Zoom
XGA
1024 X 768
102 X 768 1280 X 960
PC720p
1280 X 720
1280 X 720 1706 X 960
WXGA
1365 X 768
(Accepted via PC
Input on models
WD-62927 and
WD-73927)
1365 X 768 1706 X 960
Additional Formats Accepted via PC Input on WD-62927 and WD-73927
Format Reduce Standard
SXGA
1280 X 1024
1200 X 960 1280 X 102
PC 1080p
1920 X 1080
1706 X 960 1920 X 1080
Appendices
Appendix A: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Appendix B: NetCommand® Specialized Device Keys . . . . . . . . 100
Appendix C: Bypassing the V-Chip Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes . . . . . . . . . . 103
Appendix E: Device Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Appendix F: Cleaning and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Appendix G: Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation. . . . . . . . 111
Appendix I: Recording and Viewing Combinations . . . . . . . . . . 11
Appendix J: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
98 Appendices
Appendix A: Specifications
TV Specifications
Projection System DLP, 0.843” chip, 1920 x 1080 pixels with Smooth Picture™
Lamp 150-watt VIP type
Channel Frequency Reception Over-the-Air: VHF 2–13, UHF 14–69
Analog Cable: 1–125
Digital Cable: 1–135
Channel Type Over the Air: Analog NTSC, Digital ATSC with sub-channels (all 18 video
formats)
Cable: Analog NTSC (non-scrambled)
Digital QAM 64 and 256 with sub-channels (non-
scrambled)
CableCARD™: Authorized scrambled and non-scrambled digital
channels
Note for Digital Channels: The channel numbers displayed on screen are determined by the broadcaster or cable
company and can vary from the standard frequency number. If there is no channel number information included from
the broadcaster or cable company, then the TV will create a channel number based on the frequency number as the
main channel number and the program number as the sub-channel number. When using an authorized CableCARD,
the channel numbers are determined by the cable company.
Inputs
Antenna/Cable input Qty. 2 F connector, 75-ohm
HDMI (digital video/audio), Qty. 2
Signal Type
HDMI standard connector
HDMI EIA-861B standard for digital audio and video.
Video: 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i
Audio: PCM stereo
HDMI 1: Not intended for use with personal computers.
HDMI 2: Accepts PC input.
VGA (640 x 480), 60-Hz
W-VGA (848 x 480), 60-Hz
SVGA (800 x 600), 60-Hz
W-SVGA (1064 x 600), 60-Hz
XGA (1024 x 768), 60-Hz
1280 x 720, 60-Hz (EIA standards)
Video/S-Video, Qty. 3 each
(1 front, 2 rear)
Signal Type
Video: RCA Pin Plug, 1.0 V p-p, 75 ohm
S-Video: Four-Pin DIN Plug
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75-ohm
C: 0.286 Vp-p (burst signal), 75-ohm
NTSC 480i only
Component Video (Y/Pr/Pb), Qty. 3 sets
Signal Type
RCA Pin Plug (EIA-770.3 Standard Levels and Timing)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (includes sync), 75-ohm
Pr: 700 mV p-p, 75-ohm
Pb: 700 mV p-p, 75-ohm
EIA-770.1 & EIA 770.2 480i, 480p, EIA 770.3 720p and 1080i (video standards)
Audio Inputs: Qty. 8 pairs RCA Pin Plug 500 mV (full scale), 43-k ohm
From time to time, Mitsubishi may offer software updates to expand the features or operation of this TV. When these
updates are available they will be announced on our web site, Mitsubishi-tv.com. If you return your owner’s registration
card, with your model and serial number, you may receive written notification of available software updates.
Appendices 99
Appendix A: Specifications, continued
Outputs
Video, Qty. 1
Signal Type
Video: RCA Pin Plug 1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohm
NTSC 480i only
Audio:, Qty. 2 pairs RCA Pin Plug, 500 mV rms + 200 mV (full scale) for analog sources, 1.5
Vrms + 0.5 Vrms (full scale) for digital sources.
Digital Interfaces:
Digital Audio Output, Qty. 1 RCA Pin Plug, Signal Type, Dolby Digital, PCM
IEEE 139, Qty. 3
(1 front, 2 rear)
IEEE 1394 Four-Pin-Type Terminal, S400
Audio/Speakers Qty. 2 Woofers 5.5" x 2.2"; Qty. 2 Tweeters 1.5" round
Dimensions: WD-62827
WD-62927
40.5" H x 59.6" W x 20.2" D, 146 lbs.
WD-73827
WD-73927
44.8" H x 69.8" W x 21.3" D, 150 lbs.
Power Consumption WD-62827 310 watts
WD-62927
350 watts WD-73827
WD-73927
NetCommand® IEEE 139 System Compatibility:
This television is designed to conform to IEEE 139 AV/C Software standards in effect at the time of
development. This exciting new networking and control technology is designed to provide high-performance
digital connections and product control, making the product easier to use.
Mitsubishi D-VHS VCRs are fully compatible with this TV in audio, video, and control.
As other manufacturers distribute products that use the IEEE 139 AV/C standards, they will be responsible
for developing products that meet the standards of the technology, as well as compatibility testing with other
products. Mitsubishi cannot be responsible for their efforts, and therefore cannot promise compatibility with
these other products. Any compatibility problems with other manufacturers products should be brought to the
attention of those manufacturers.
The HDMI input is compliant with EIA-861B standards for standard, extended and high definition video, digital
audio and HDCP copy protection. HDMI input 1, however, is not intended for use with personal computers or
devices outputting video signals with computer resolutions.
PC Input (RGB), Qty. 1 D-Subminiature, 15-Pin PC Monitor Input
VGA (640 x 480), 60-Hz
WVGA (848 x 480), 60-Hz
SVGA (800 x 600), 60-Hz
WSVGA (1064 x 600), 60-Hz
XGA (1024 x 768), 60-Hz
WXGA (1365 x 768), 60-Hz
SXGA (1280 x 1024), 60-Hz
720 P 1280 x 720, 60-Hz (EIA standards)
1080P 1920 x 1080, 60-Hz (EIA Standards)
100 Appendices
A/V
RECEIVER
CABLE
or SAT
VCR DVD LEARNING SCREEN
CHECK BOX NAME
FUNCTION NAME ON TV REMOTE
X X X X Power* Power On or Power On/Off POWER**
X X X X Power (Off)* Power Off POWER**
X Volume Up Volume Up VOL
X Volume Down Volume Down VOL
X Mute Mute MUTE
X Analog to Digital* Analog/Digital Switch GUIDE**
X Digital to Analog* Digital/Analog Switch GUIDE**
X Input (1-7) AVR Input Select Automatic (when
device is selected)
X X Channel Up Channel Scan Up CHAN
X X Channel Down Channel Scan Down CHAN
X Recall Last Channel Recall QV
X X Guide Guide GUIDE
X X X Adjust Up Arrow/move Up ADJUST
X X X Adjust Down Arrow/move Down ADJUST
X X X Adjust Left Arrow/move Left
ADJUST
X X X Adjust Right Arrow/move Right
ADJUST
X X X Enter Enter/Select ENT
X X X Menu Device Menu or Setup Menu DEVICE MENU
X X X Cancel Cancel or Exit CANCEL
X X X Info Status Information Display INFO
X Page Up Guide Page Up CHAN ***
X Page Down Guide Page Down CHAN ***
X X X Play Play PLAY
X X X Stop Stop STOP
X X X Forward Fast Forward/Fwd Search FF
X X X Rewind Rewind/Reverse Search REW
X X X Pause Pause PAUSE
X X X Record Record REC
X X X Enter (digits)† Enter for channel numbers ENT
X X X Low Speed Out* Low Speed 480i out FORMAT**
X X X High Speed Out* Hi Speed 480p/1080i out FORMAT**
X X X 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0
X X Input Input Change GUIDE**
X Sub channel separator‡ Digital Sub channel CANCEL
X Chapter + Chapter Skip Forward CHAN
X Chapter - Chapter Skip Reverse CHAN
Appendix B: NetCommand® Specialized Device Keys
* These are paired functions (e.g. Power and Power Off). When the original remote control uses a single button for both functions,
learn only the first of the paired functions.
† If there are two Enter keys, learn the Enter key used for channel selection here. The ENT button on the remote sends the correct
IR code when digits are entered.
‡ Learn the subchannel separator if a special key is used to add a separator (dash or dot) in a digital channel. Press the CANCEL
button on the remote to add the separator
** This function is performed only when the Device Selection Menu is displayed and the device icon is highlighted.
*** Channel Up/Down as Guide Page Up/Down happens only after pressing GUIDE and returns to channel functions after pressing
ENTER or CANCEL.

Appendices 101
Bypassing the V-Chip Lock
After you set the lock, you need your pass code to view
a V-Chip locked program, view the locked TV, cancel the
lock, or enter the V-Chip Lock menus.
If you forget your pass code, you can view the locked
TV without entering your pass code. When you are
prompted for your pass code, press the number 9 and QV
buttons on the TV remote control at the same time. This
process temporarily unlocks the TV
When entering the V-Chip Lock menu, this process
deletes your old pass code and prompts you to enter a
new pass code. Press HOME to exit the menu.
L
o
c
k

B
y
p
a
s
s

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s

H
a
v
e

B
e
e
n

F
i
l
e
d

f
o
r

F
u
t
u
r
e

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
Deactivating the Front Button Lock
Press and hold the MENU button on the TV front panel
for over eight seconds.
IMPORTANT
When changing or deleting your pass
code, you must use the remote control
included with this TV. You cannot
use a Mitsubishi remote control from
another component or a “universal”
remote.
Cut along the dotted line and file
bypass instructions in a safe place for
future reference.
IMPORTANT
Appendix C: Bypassing the V-Chip Lock
102 Appendices
This page intentionally blank
Appendices 103
Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes
IMPORTANT
The remote control may return to its
initial setting when the batteries are
changed. You may need to reprogram.
Cable Boxes
Programming the Remote to Control
Other Brands of Audio and Video
Products
1. Move the slide switch at the top of the remote to the
product you want to control.
2. Press and hold POWER on the remote control.
3. Enter the first three digit code listed for your
equipment, and then release the POWER button on
the remote control.
4. Point the remote control at the equipment and press
the POWER button. If the equipment responds, the
remote control is properly programmed to operate
the equipment. If the equipment does not respond,
repeat steps 2–4 with the next three-digit code listed
in step 3 for your equipment.
Programming the Remote to Control
NetCommand A/V Products
1. Move the slide switch at the top of the remote to the
TV position.
2. Press and hold POWER on the remote control.
3. Enter the three digit code of 935, and then release
POWER.
4. When the remote control is in the TV position, it is
now programmed to send NetCommand signals to
the TV so the TV can control the IEEE 1394 devices
and NetCommand-supported or learned IR devices.
This is the default setting for the remote control.
Cable Brand Code
ABC 124
ARCHER 125
CABLEVIEW 105,
CITIZEN 122, 105
COLOR VOICE 128, 129, 130, 106, 107
COMTRONICS 128, 129, 130, 106, 107
CURTIS 112, 113
DIAMOND 124, 125
EAGLE 129
GCBRAND 105
GE 112, 113
GEMINI 122
GENERAL INSTRUMENT/
JERROLD/MOTOROLA
119, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 120,
121, 122
HAMLIN 112
HITACHI 103, 124
MACOM 103, 104, 105, 108
MAGNAVOX 128, 129, 130, 106, 107, 133, 138
MOTOROLA 123, 146
MEMOREX 130
MOVIETIME 105,
PANASONIC 114
PARAGON 117
PHILIPS
128, 129, 130, 106, 107, 131, 133,
138
PIONEER 101, 106, 116
PULSAR 105
RCA 115
REGAL 112
REMBRANDT 105, 138
SAMSUNG 105
SONY 147, 177
ZENITH/DRAKE SATELLITE 100
A/V Receiver Brand Code
MITSUBISHI 010, 011, 012, 013, 014
AIWA 225, 226, 241
BOSE 351
B & K 352
DENON 234, 235, 236, 245, 246, 359, 361
FISHER 204
GARRARD 213
HARMAN KARDON 215, 223, 242, 362
JENSEN 223, 229
JVC 232, 233
KENWOOD 200, 208
KLH 363
KOSS 357
MAGNAVOX 227, 228
MARANTZ 224, 350, 360
MCINTOSH 216
NAKAMICHI 206, 217
ONKYO 209, 214, 240, 247
OPTIMUS 203, 227, 231, 230
PANASONIC 219, 218, 221
PARASOUND 356
PHILIPS 223, 248
PIONEER 205, 207
POLK AUDIO 353
QUASAR 219, 218, 221
RCA 203, 205, 227, 231, 230
ROTEL 366
SANSUI 203, 211, 239
SHARP 234, 237
SHERWOOD 354, 355
SONY 222, 249, 364, 365
TEAC 212, 213, 211, 210
TECHNICS 221, 218, 219
VICTOR 232, 233
YAMAHA 201, 202, 243, 244
A/V Receivers
10 Appendices
Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes, continued
DVD Players
Satellite Receivers/SAT/DTV
VCRs Cable Boxes, continued
VCR Brand Code
MITSUBISHI 001, 060, 067, 068, 061, 062, 002
AKAI 049, 034, 035, 036
AUDIO DYNAMIC 031
BELL & HOWELL 025,
BROKSONIC 040, 046
CANON 043, 045
CITIZEN 026
CRAIG 025, 049, 026
CURTIS MATHES 065, 044, 047
DAEWOO 063, 021, 044, 078
DBX 030, 031
DIMENSIA 065
EMERSON 063, 046, 038, 039, 023, 045, 062, 040
FISHER 025, 028, 029, 027
FUNAI 047, 046, 040
GE 053, 065, 044, 079
GO VIDEO 057, 069, 070, 071
GOLDSTAR 026
HITACHI 043, 065, 020, 047
INSTANT REPLAY 044, 043
JVC 030, 031, 076, 077
KENWOOD 030, 026, 031
LXI 047, 026, 020, 027, 028, 025, 029
MAGNAVOX 051, 043, 044
MARANTZ 030, 031
MARTA 026
MEMOREX 044, 029
MGA 060, 067, 068, 061, 062
MINOLTA 020, 065
MULTITECH 067, 047
NEC 030, 031
OLYMPIC 044, 043
OPTIMUS 048, 041, 055, 026
ORION 046, 040
PANASONIC 043, 044, 041, 042
PENNEY 044, 020, 065, 025, 030, 031
PENTAX 020, 031, 065
PHILCO 051, 044, 047, 043, 046, 040, 063
PHILIPS 051, 043, 044
PIONEER 043
PROSCAN
065, 020, 043, 044, 051, 066, 021,
022, 053
QUASAR 041, 042, 043, 044
RADIO SHACK 053, 044, 025, 056, 029, 060, 047
RCA
020, 021, 022, 043, 044, 049, 051, 053,
065, 066
REALISTIC 044, 025, 056, 029, 060, 047
SAMSUNG 057, 022, 053
SANSUI 046, 040
SANYO 025, 029
SCOTT 021, 022, 029, 060, 067, 068, 046, 040
SEARS 025, 026, 027, 028, 020
SHARP 055, 056
SIGNATURE 2000 047, 055
SONY 048, 049, 050, 073, 074, 075
SV2000 047
SYLVANIA 051, 043, 044, 047
SYMPHONIC 047
TASHIRO 026
TATUNG 030, 031
TEAC 030, 047, 031
TECHNICS 041, 042, 043, 044
TEKNIKA 044, 047
TOSHIBA 021, 066
TOTEVISION 026
VECTOR RESEARCH 031
WARDS 055, 056, 029, 064, 026
YAMAHA 025, 030, 031
ZENITH 064, 026
DVD Brand Code
MITSUBISHI 003
AIWA 261, 274
APEX 266, 283
BOSE 286
DENON 250, 273
FERGUSON 251
HARMAN KARDON 282, 288 , 288
HITACHI 270
JVC 257
KENWOOD 271, 289
MINTEK 285
NORDMENDE 251
ONKYO 267, 280
ORITRON 263, 268
PANASONIC 250
PHILIPS/MAGNAVOX 258, 253, 272, 290
PIONEER 252
RCA/GE/PROSCAN 251, 256
ROTEL 292
SABA 251
SAMSUNG 261
SAMPO 263
SHARP 260
SYLVANIA 264
SONY 254, 278, 279
THOMSON 251
TOSHIBA 253
V INC. (BRAVO D1) 291
YAMAHA 250, 272, 276, 287 276, 287
ZENITH 259
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 112, 113, 194
SIGNATURE 119,124,125,126,127,120,121,122
SLMARK 105,101
SPRUCER 105
STARCOM 119,124,125,126,127,120,121,122
STARGATE 105
TELEVIEW 101,105
TOCOM 135,136
TOSHIBA 104
UNIKA 125
UNITED CABLE 119,124,125,126,127,120,121,122
UNIVERSAL 122
VIDEOWAY 106
VIEWSTAR 129,130
ZENITH 117,100
Brand Code
MITSUBISHI 006 (same as 173) (same as 173) (same as 173) same as 173))
ECHOSTAR/DISH NETWORK 175, 182, 183, 188
EXPRESS VU 175
G.E. 176
HITACHI 173, 181, 184
HNS (Hughes) 173
JVC (ECHOSTAR) 175
MAGNAVOX 171, 172
PANASONIC 174
PHILIPS 171, 172
PROSCAN 176, 179, 180, 185
RCA 176, 179, 180, 185
SAMSUNG - TERRESTRIAL 192
SONY 177
STAR CHOICE 173
TOSHIBA 170, 189, 190, 191
UNIDEN 171, 172
WEBTV 187
ZENITH/LG 193
Appendices 105
Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes, continued
IMPORTANT
Some manufacturers may change their
products, or they may use more than one
remote control system. If this is the case,
the TV remote control may not be able to
operate your VCR, DVD, cable box, satellite
receiver, or A/V receiver.
After entering the correct codes in each position of the
remote control, use the slide switch to select which
product will respond when an operational button is
pressed. Only one of the below devices is allowed for
each slide switch position.
TV position:
TV, NetCommand® Controlled Devices
Cable/SAT/DTV position:
Cable box
Satellite receiver
DTV receiver
VCR position:
VCR
DVD position:
DVD
LD Player
Audio position:
A/V receiver
Mitsubishi CD player
If you have a Mitsubishi A/V receiver, the audio position
may be used in conjunction with select Mitsubishi CD
players. Your audio position must be programmed to 010.
VCR
• POWER
• CHANNEL up/down
• PLAY
• REC
• PAUSE
• STOP
• FF/FWD
• REW/REV
Mitsubishi VCRs will be compatible with some
additional buttons
Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers
• POWER
• CHANNEL up/down
• 0-9 number buttons (on some models)
• ENTER (on some models)
• CANCEL (on some models)
• ADJUST up/down/ left/right (on some models)
• GUIDE (on some models)
A/V Receivers
• POWER
• VOLUME
• MUTE
Mitsubishi A/V Receivers
• Direct Input Selection buttons: numbers,
SQV and QV (on some models)
Mitsubishi CD Players
(not all functions for all models)
• PLAY
• FF/FWD
• REW/REV
• PAUSE
• STOP
DVD and Laser Disc Players
(not all functions for all models)
• POWER
• MENU
• 0-9 number buttons (on some models)
• PLAY
• STOP
• ARROW up/down/left/right (on some models)
• FF/FWD
• REW/REV
• PAUSE
• CANCEL (on some models)
• ENTER
• CHANNEL (on some models)
When your remote control has been programmed to
operate another manufacturer’s product, the function
performed on each layer can vary. The most common
functions are:
106 Appendices
NetCommand Compatible Traditional Devices (Analog)
When Device Selection Menu is Displayed and the Device is Highlighted (Yellow Outline)
Device
Remote
Control Button
A/V RECEIVER VCR DVD CABLE BOX/SAT
POWER
Power On/Off
(toggle)
Power On/Off
(toggle)
Power On/Off
(toggle)
Power On/Off
(toggle)
GUIDE
Changes
between digital
and analog
audio
Changes VCR inputs n/a Changes antenna inputs (RCA
model DTC-100 only)
FORMAT
n/a n/a Changes output between inter-
laced and progressive
Changes output between HD and
SD select models
Appendix E: Device Control with NetCommand®
When NetCommand® Compatible Traditional Device is Viewed or Played
Device
Remote
Control Button
A/V RECEIVER VCR DVD CABLE/SAT
CH up/down
Channel up/down Skip Forward/Backwards
Chapter or Track
Channel up/down Page up/down
when guide showing
VOL up/down
Volume
Up/Down
MUTE
Mute On/Off
0-9 (digits)
number functions number functions number functions
QV
Last Channel Recall
DEVICE Menu
1st press Transport Menu,
2nd press Setup Menu display
1st press Transport Menu,
2nd press Setup Menu display
Setup menu display or Action
function
HOME
ENTER
Enter or select Enter or select
CANCEL
Counter Reset Exit or return Exit or return
GUIDE
Disc menu display Channel Guide
ADJUST
up/down left/right up/down left/right
PLAY
Play Play
STOP
Stop Stop
RECORD
Record
REW/REV
Rewind/Reverse Reverse
FF/FWD
Fast Forward or Fast Play Fast Play
Appendices 107
Appendix E: Device Control with NetCommand®, continued
When an IEEE 139 Device is Viewed or Played
Device
Remote
Control Button
CABLE/SAT TV Disc or A/V DISC DVCR AMPLIFIER
CH up/down
Channel up/down Page up/down
(when track list is displayed)
Index search forward/reverse
(if supported by DVCR)
VOL up/down
Volume Up/Down
MUTE
Mute On/Off
0-9 (digits)
number functions Search by time
(when followed by ENTER)
QV
Last Channel Recall
DEVICE Menu
n/a Transport Menu redisplay Transport Menu redisplay Device Menu
HOME
Exit menus/displays Exit menus/displays Exit menus/displays Exit menus/displays
ENTER
Enter or select Enter or select Enter or select Enter or select
CANCEL
Cancel function Cancel function Cancel function or Counter
Reset
Cancel function
GUIDE
Digital Channel
Guide
Track or program list display Program Guide
ADJUST
up/down left/right Skip Forward 30 seconds
(during playback)
Skip Backwards 12 seconds
(during playback)
Skip to end or beginning of program
Page up/down in track list
up/down left/right up/down left/right
PLAY
Play Play
STOP
Stop Stop
RECORD
Record Record
REW/REV
Reverse picture scan or Slow Play Reverse or Slow Play
FF/FWD
Fast picture scan or Fast Play Fast Play
IEEE 139 Devices
When Device Selection Menu is Displayed and the Device is Highlighted (Yellow Outline)
Device
Remote
Control Button
TUNER/
CABLE BOX/
SAT
A/V DISC DVCR AMPLIFIER
POWER
Power On/Off
(toggle)
Power On/Off
(toggle)
Power On/Off
(toggle)
Power On/Off
(toggle)
GUIDE
n/a n/a n/a n/a
FORMAT
n/a n/a n/a n/a
108 Appendices
Appendix F: Cleaning and Service
Cleaning
Normally, light dusting with a dry, non-scratching duster will keep your TV clean. If cleaning beyond this is needed,
please use the following guidelines:
First, turn off the TV and unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Top and Sides of the TV
• Gently wipe down your TV with a soft, non-abrasive cloth such as cotton flannel or a clean cloth diaper, lightly
moistened with water. Dry with a second dry, soft, non-abrasive cloth.
• For oily dirt, add a few drops of mild liquid detergent, such as dishwashing detergent, to the water used to moisten
the cloth. Rinse with a second cloth moistened only with water. Dry with a third dry, soft, non-abrasive cloth.
Diamond Shield™
Models WD-62927, WD-73927
• Clean with a soft non-abrasive cloth moistened with water only.
Screen
• Follow the instructions for the top and sides, wiping gently in an up and down motion, following the grooves in the
screen.
• Clean the entire screen evenly, not just sections of the screen.
• Do not allow liquid to drip down the grooves of the screen, as some liquid may enter the TV between the screen
and the screen frame.
• You may purchase Mitsubishi Screen Cleaner, part number CLEANER-VSS, by calling (800) 553-7278. Avoid using
this cleaner on the Diamond Shield (models WD-62927, WD-73927).
General Cleaning Warnings
• DO NOT allow liquid to enter the TV through the ventilation slots or any crevice.
• DO NOT use any strong or abrasive cleaners as these can scratch the surfaces.
• DO NOT use any cleaners with ammonia, bleach, alcohol, benzine, or thinners as these can dull the surfaces.
• DO NOT spray liquids or cleaners directly on the TV’s surfaces.
• DO NOT scrub or rub the TV harshly. Wipe it gently.
Service
If you are unable to correct a problem with your TV, consult your Mitsubishi dealer or a Mitsubishi Authorized Warranty
Service Center.
• DO NOT adjust any controls other than those described in this Owner’s Guide.
• DO NOT remove the protective back cover of your TV.
Menus not described and shown in this owner’s guide are designed for factory use and for authorized service
personnel. Damage caused to the TV by non-authorized changes or changes to these menus made by non-authorized
persons are not covered under warranty.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any kind of abrasive cleaner
on the surface of the TV screen or Diamond
Shield.
Appendices 109
CAUTION
BURN DANGER!
During normal operation, the surfaces inside
the TV near the lamp are extremely hot.
TOUCH THE LAMP CARTRIDGE BY THE HANDLE ONLY
Do not touch the glass parts of the lamp cartridge.
CAUTION: If the television is on, press POWER to turn it off. Allow the television to cool for
one hour before attempting to replace the lamp cartridge.
LAMP LIFE
The light source for this television is a lamp, which is part of a lamp cartridge assembly. The actual life of the lamp
in this television can vary, based on the lamp itself, the air temperature around the TV while it is operating, and your
viewing patterns. Warmer air or poor ventilation shortens the lamp life, as does turning the television on and off
frequently.
When the end of the lamp’s average life is approaching, the TV displays a warning message for one minute when you
power on the TV. The message will reappear the next five times you turn on the TV. If you wish, you may continue to
use the current lamp until it stops working. After you change the lamp cartridge, you must reset the lamp reminder
through the TV Setup menu. Otherwise, the warning message will appear again earlier than necessary. Mitsubishi
warrants the lamp for one (1) year from date of the original purchase at retail. It is likely, however, that the lamp will last
significantly longer than this.
TO ORDER A NEW LAMP:
While Under Warranty After Warranty
Call (800) 332-2119. Please have model number, serial
number, and TV purchase date available.
Call (800) 553-7278. Order lamp part number
915P027010.
WARNING:
Do not remove the lamp cartridge immediately after turning off the television. You may get burned because of the
lamp’s high temperature. Allow the television to cool for one hour before attempting to replace the lamp cartridge.
Do not remove the lamp cartridge except when replacing it. Careless treatment can result in injury or fire.
Do not touch the lamp glass element. It may be very hot and break, causing injuries or burns.
Be sure not to insert any metal or flammable object into the lamp cartridge opening, as it may cause fire or electrical
shock. If any object is inserted into the opening, unplug the AC cord of the TV and contact your dealer for service.
Install the lamp cartridge securely. Failure to do so may cause a fire.
Do not touch the lamp glass elements. Oils from your fingers may cause premature lamp failure.
The lamp in this product contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance at:
www.eiae.org.
IMPORTANT
Reset the lamp hours through the TV setup menu each time you replace the lamp cartridge.
Otherwise, the lamp warning message will reappear sooner than necessary.
Appendix G: Lamp Cartridge Replacement
110 Appendices
Figure 1.
WARNING
THE GRILLE/COVER IS PROVIDED WITH AN
INTERLOCK TO REDUCE THE RISK OF EXCESSIVE
ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION. DO NOT DEFEAT
ITS PURPOSE OR ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE
TV WITHOUT REMOVING THE GRILLE/COVER
COMPLETELY.
Appendix G: Lamp Cartridge Replacement, continued
1. Turn TV power off and allow the lamp to cool at least
one hour before proceeding.
2. After the lamp has cooled, remove the plastic air
exhaust grille/cover by removing two screws with a
#2 (large) Phillips screwdriver. See figure 1.
3. With a large flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the three
shiny screws securing the lamp cartridge until they
disengage from the mating threads. These are
captive screws and cannot be separated from the
lamp cartridge.
4. Fully open up the bag supplied with the replacement
lamp and set the opened bag aside.
5. Grasp the wire handle of the lamp cartridge and
pull the old cartridge straight out towards you. See
figures 2 and 3. Note the orientation of the cartridge.
CAUTION: Do not tilt or rotate the cartridge, as small
glass fragments may fall out.
6. Without tilting or putting down the lamp cartridge,
insert it into the opened bag. Close the bag while
being careful that no glass particles fall out.
7. Do not touch the glass parts of the new lamp
cartridge. Insert the new cartridge into the TV in the
same orientation as the old cartridge. Push on the
cartridge housing until it is fully seated.
8. With either your fingers or the screwdriver, gently
tighten the three screws. If using a screwdriver,
use only two fingers for final tightening. AVOID
OVERTIGHTENING!
9. Replace the plastic grille/cover and retaining screws.
10. WASH YOUR HANDS THOROUGHLY, AS THIS LAMP
CONTAINS MERCURY.
11. Contact your local authorities or the Electronic
Industries Alliance at www.eiae.com for lamp-
disposal or recycling instructions. Do not dispose of
the old lamp with common trash.
12. Reset the Lamp Reminder from the TV Setup menu
as follows:
a. Press TV MENU to open the Setup menu.
b. Move the highlight to Lamp Reminder.
c. Press ENTER twice. Figure 3.
Handle
Figure 2.
Appendices 111
Remove the Shield
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screws that
secure the top plate and lift off the plate. Keep the
plate and screws for reuse. See figure 1.
Figure 1. Remove the
screws securing the
top plate and lift off
the plate.
Top Plate
2. Note the location of the six clips that hold the
Diamond Shield in place. Slide the card along the
channel until it meets each clip. See figures 2 and 3.
See figure 3 detail
Figure 2. Six clips hold the Diamond Shield on the TV.
Diamond Shield
Slide card in channel
to locate clips. The
clips are visible at the
edge of the Diamond
Shield.
Figure 3. Locating the clips
The Diamond Shield ™ is an optional protective cover for the front of the TV screen. Models WD-62927 and WD-73927
come from the factory with the Diamond Shield installed. For Models WD-62827 and 73827, the Diamond Shield may
be purchased separately.
These instructions explain removal and installation of the Diamond Shield™ and the decorative trim that covers gaps
around the TV screen when the shield not installed.
You need the following for this procedure:
Trim kit (included with the TV)
Phillips screwdriver
Small plastic card or plastic putty knife. An expired credit card or similar expendable card works well.
Soft cotton gloves
Note: Use care to avoid scratching the TV screen or Diamond Shield.
This procedure is best performed by two people.
Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation
112 Appendices
Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation, continued
3. Release the six clips that hold the Diamond Shield in
place. Work on one side at a time, starting with the
top clip. Follow these steps:
(1) Refer to figure 4. Hold the plastic card vertically,
angled slightly toward the middle of the screen.
(2) Insert the card into the channel, alongside the
clip.
(3) Refer to figure 5. While keeping the card pressed
in on the clip, angle the card outward, away from
the middle of the screen, and pry out the clip.
WARNING
Sharp edges! Always wear gloves to handle, lift,
install, and remove the Diamond shield.
4. When all clips are released, lift the shield up out of
the lower channel and away from the TV.
5. Store the Diamond Shield protected from scratches
in a clean, dust-free area.
Notched edge
down
Figure 6. Center the trim piece, notched side down, and
set it in the channel below the screen.
TV Screen
Raised Lip
Trim Piece
Channel
Figure 7. The lower trim piece fits snugly into the channel
and over the raised lip that runs along the bottom of the
TV screen.
Diamond Shield
Angle card
toward shield
before inserting
Top View
Note
Angle
of Card
Figure 4. To release
the clip, insert the card
alongside the clip at the
angle shown.
Figure 5. Pry the clip out
of the channel.
Clip
Top View
Install Trim
Note: Install the trim pieces in the order described here.
6. Install the lower trim piece as follows:
(1) Center the trim piece in front of the TV, notched
edge down, and set it in the channel below the
screen. See figure 6.
(2) Refer to figure 7. With the trim piece resting in
the channel, hook the trim piece onto the raised
lip at the bottom edge of the TV screen.
To do this,
a. Gently press the trim piece against the TV
frame.
b. Push the trim up slightly to clear the raised
lip.
c. Press down firmly on the top edge of the
trim piece to push it snugly into place over
the raised lip and into the channel. Be sure
to press along the entire length of the trim to
fully seat it.
Appendices 113
Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation, continued
7. Refer to figure 8 and install the two side-trim pieces
as follows:
(1) Hook the lower end of the trim over the raised lip
running down the side of the TV screen.
(2) While keeping the end of the trim hooked on the
raised lip, slide the trim down until it meets the
lower trim piece.
(3) Hold the bottom end of the trim in place and hook
the top end on the raised lip that runs along the
top edge of the screen.
(4) Push the top end of the trim up against the edge
of the screen. Press the full length of the trim
onto the raised lip.
(5) Press the outer edge of the trim so that the entire
length snaps into place.
Figure 8. Hook the ends
of the trim piece over the
raised lip at the top and
side of the TV screen.
Step (1)
Hook the lower
end over the
raised lip.
Step (3)
Hook the top
end over the
raised lip.
Step ()
8. Refer to figure 9 and install the upper trim piece as
follows:
(1) Center the upper trim piece in front of the TV
and hook both ends of the trim on the raised lip
running along the top of the TV screen.
The trim piece may bow out slightly.
(2) Push the full length of the trim in place over the
raised lip.
9. Set the top plate in position and secure it with the
original screws.
Figure 9. Center the upper trim piece and press it onto
the raised lip that runs along the top of the TV screen
Install the Diamond Shield
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screws that
secure the top plate and lift off the plate. Keep the
plate and screws for reuse. See figure 1.
2. Pull off the four trim pieces surrounding the TV
screen. Pry the lower trim piece off from the notches
at both ends. See figure 10.
3. Support the Diamond Shield at both ends and set it
into the channel located below the TV screen.
4. Press the shield clips into the channels running
alongside the screen.
5. Set the top plate in position and secure it with the
original screws.
Pry up from the
notches at both
ends
Figure 10. Pry off the lower trim piece last.
11 Appendices
Appendix I: Recording and Viewing Combinations
The tables in this appendix show which program sources you can watch while a recording is in progress.
Analog VCR Connected to Audio and Video Record Outputs
When recording this
(source device)
You can watch any one of these (viewing device)
Same as
Recording
Ant-1
Channels
Ant-2
Channels
Input 1–3
Devices
Component
1–3 Devices
IEEE-1394
Device
HDMI
Device
Ant-1 Air/Cable
Analog or Digital Channel
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ant-1 CableCARD
Analog or Digital Channel
Yes
Yes
(same channel only)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ant-2 Air/Cable
Analog or Digital Channel
Yes Yes
Yes
(same channel only)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Input 1–3
Video or S-Video Device
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
IEEE-139 Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes, same as
recording
Yes
Component 1–3 Cannot record from this source
HDMI Device Cannot record from this source
Digital VCR or A/V Disc Connected to IEEE-139 Port
When recording this
(source device)
You can watch any one of these (viewing device)
Same as
Recording
Ant-1
Channels
Ant-2
Channels
Input 1–3
Devices
Component
1–3 Devices
IEEE-1394
Device
HDMI
Device
Ant-1 Air/Cable
Analog or Digital Channel
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ant-1 CableCARD
Analog or Digital Channel
Yes
Yes
(same channel only)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ant-2 Air/Cable
Analog or Digital Channel
Yes Yes
Yes
(same channel only)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Input 1–3
Video or S-Video Device
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
IEEE-139 Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Component 1–3 Cannot record from this source
HDMI Device Cannot record from this source
Appendices 115
General TV Operation
Symptom Remarks
1. The TV remote control does not work. • Check that the batteries are installed correctly.
• Check that the selected switch is set to “TV.”
• Be no more than 20 feet from the TV when using the remote control.
• Program the remote control to operate the TV (Appendix D).
2. The TV takes several seconds to respond. • It is normal for digital channels to take longer to tune in.
• Press ENTER after a channel number to avoid delays.
• Use a 4-digit number for an over-the-air digital channel.
• Use a 6-digit number for digital cable channels (your cable service must be able
to recognize 6-digit channel numbers).
3. Cable provider needs information to start
CableCARD™ service.
On the remote control, press TV MENU and then enter the numbers 999
to display the Host ID and CableCARD™ ID information.
4. You cannot access a channel. • Use number keys instead of CHANNEL up/down.
• Be sure the channel you want to view is in memory. See page 65.
• Check that the TV is turned to the correct device or antenna for that channel by
pressing the DEVICE button.
• Make sure the V-Chip lock is off.
• If you cannot tune to a virtual digital channel even though the TV has already
memorized digital channels, tune to the actual channel number used by the
broadcaster. The virtual channel will then be automatically added to memory.
5. On-screen displays appear each time you change
a function.
This is part of normal TV operation.
6. You cannot program the TV to turn on
automatically (timer function)
• The TV may be locked.
• The clock may not be set.
• A time-delayed recording may have started.
7. You have forgotten your V-Chip pass code. See Appendix C, Bypassing the V-Chip Lock.
8. V-Chip is not working. • Make sure that V-Chip is On.
• If V-Chip Hours are currently set to disable the V-Chip lock, the V-Chip will not
block programming.
9. The TV will not turn on after being plugged in. If green light on front panel is blinking, wait for at least one minute for
the light to turn off, then press Power again.
10. TV functions do not respond to the remote control
or to front panel control and TV will not power off.
Use the System Reset button.
11. TV turned itself off and the light on the front panel
started to blink.
• Momentary power fluctuation caused the TV to turn off to prevent damage. Wait
for the green light to stop flashing and turn On again.
• If the TV does not stay turned On, use the System Reset button. If this happens
frequently, obtain an AC line power conditioner/surge protector.
• An unusual digital signal may have been received, triggering a protection
circuit. Wait for the light to stop flashing and turn TV on.
12. Name options not available for some channels. Only memorized analog channels can be named.
13. When a device is selected from the Device
Selection menu, the screen is blue (no signal
source).
• Make sure the selected device is turned on.
• From the Edit NetCommand® menu select Review setting. Verify that the devices
are physically connected to the TV inputs as listed. If they are not, either change
the physical connections on the back panel, or select the Change setting on
the Edit NetCommand menu to change the TV NetCommand’s settings for the
connection.
• Begin play of the VCR.
Appendix J: Troubleshooting
116 Appendices
General TV Operation
Symptom Remarks
14 A device does not respond to button presses
from the remote.
• Remote has not been set up for NetCommand® use.
• The incorrect manufacturer was selected during setup. Select the Change setting
from the Setup menu and then the device to display the manufacturer selection.
Change if necessary.
• The device is not supported and keys have not been learned.
• The requested function is not supported by NetCommand. Verify that the
function is supported or keys are learned.
• The IR emitter is incorrectly placed. Make sure the IR emitter is facing the IR
sensor in the device.
• The IR emitter is not plugged into the IR emitter Output NetCommand.
• The IR emitter is facing the TV screen, causing double signals. Be sure that the IR
emitter cannot send to the TV.
15. Devices are grayed out in the Device Selection
menu or the PIP Selection menu.
• A recording is in progress. Cancel the recording to select the device.
• Digital channels, digital devices, memory cards, and PCs cannot display in the
PIP.
16. Cannot see the A/V Receiver menu. The A/V Receiver is not connected to any video input of the TV. To
check the A/V Receiver menu, temporarily plug into an unused input of
the TV. Then select Review from the Setup Menu, turn the input On to
view the A/V Receiver menu.
17. When ChannelView™ list is displayed, information
appears incomplete
Available information is sent from the broadcaster or cable provider. No
other data is available.
18 TV is not responding after pulling out a memory
card during playback.
• Turn the TV off for 5 to 10 seconds and then turn it back on.
• Press STOP or wait until playback is complete before removing memory card.
• Reset the TV using the SYSTEM RESET button.
19. TV can’t play or stop a memory card. • NetCommand was not set up. Without NetCommand enabled, you can only use
ENTER to play and CANCEL on the TV remote to control the memory cards. See
Appendix D for programming the remote control.
• Turn the TV off and then back on.
20. Can’t see a thumbnail picture in the JPEG menu,
or can’t see a track/song name in the Playlist
menu.
File does not meet file standards for playback.
21. The message “Lamp will soon exceed...” keeps
displaying after the lamp has been replaced.
Reset the lamp reminder in the setup menu.
22. NetCommand unable to learn specific device
keys.
• Device does not use IR format for remote control signal. ITT and RF formats
cannot be learned.
• Room lighting may affect the signal. Have the remotes very close (6 inches or
less) to the TV during Learning.
• If learning a Mitsubishi remote control, make sure slide switch is not set to TV
position.
• Some, but not all, device key functions can be learned by NetCommand. For
example, POWER and PLAY may be learned, but other functions may not
• The signal from the remote control ay not be strong enough. Insert fresh batteries
and try Learning again.
Appendix J: Troubleshooting, continued
Appendices 117
Picture
Symptom Remarks
1. PIP does not display a picture. • Make sure the V-Chip lock is off.
• Not all inputs can be displayed as a PIP.
2. CableCARD channel is not shown as PIP image
when CableCARD channel is the main image.
Due to the limitations of unidirectional CableCARD service, only one
scrambled CableCARD channel can be tuned, viewed, or recorded at a
time.
3. There is a large black or gray rectangle on the
screen.
The TV’s analog closed captioning has been set to “text” mode in the
Captions menu. Turn off because there is no text information being
broadcast.
4. You cannot see a picture when playing a VHS
tape.
• Display the Device Selection menu and select the correct VCR.
• Check your VCR’s owner’s guide for further troubleshooting.
5. When viewing a stopped VCR, white lines are
rolling on the screen.
• Turn off video mute for the VCR.
• Begin playing the tape.
• Change the VCR input to the antenna input.
6. Screen is black when trying to view digital
channels or IEEE 1394 device.
The PerfectColor™ color balance has been incorrectly set. Press VIDEO
repeatedly until you see the PerfectColor option and press ENTER.
7. A program recorded on your widescreen TV is
distorted when played on a 4:3 TV.
TV was set to Anamorphic when program was recorded. Record
programs in Cropped mode if playing back on a 4:3 TV. Open the
Record menu and select Cropped before making such a recording.
8. Cannot see a picture from a DV Camcorder. DV formatting was not detected during automatic discovery, so you must
specify it manually. Open the Edit NetCommand screen, select Change,
then select the camcorder, Add, and in the Name for 1394 Device
screen, check mark the DV box.
9. DVCR analog/digital problems. If the tape is currently playing but no picture displays, there may be a
mismatch of the media with the display. Press DEVICE to display the
Device Selection menu. Press ENTER for the DVCR device. If digital is
selected, try analog, or if analog is selected, try digital.
Indicators
Symptom Remarks
1. Lamp indicator light is a constant red. Turn the TV off for at least 2 minutes. Turn back on. If light is still red,
the lamp has failed. Replace it. See Appendix G for lamp replacement
information.
2. Lamp indicator light is a constant yellow. Lamp may fail soon. Purchase a new lamp. See Appendix G for lamp
replacement information.
3. Lamp indicator light is a flashing yellow. Lamp cover door is open or lamp cartridge is not secure. See Appendix
G for lamp replacement information.
4. Status indicator light is a constant yellow. Room temperature has exceeded proper levels. Cool the room.
5. Status indicator light is a constant/flashing red. Service is required. Contact your dealer or a Mitsubishi Authorized
Service Center to arrange for a service evaluation. Listings of Mitsubishi
Authorized Service locations can be obtained from our web site, www.
mitsubishi-tv.com or by calling 1-800-332-2119.
Appendix J: Troubleshooting, continued
118 Appendices
Sound
Symptom Remarks
1. There is no sound even when the volume is
turned up.
• Check audio source in Device Menu.
• Check to see if the MUTE button is on.
• The TV’s “Listen to:” setting may be set to SAP.
• Check that the “TV Speakers” setting is On in the Audio/Video menu.
2. The sound does not match the screen
picture.
• NetCommand® is set up incorrectly.
• The TV’s “Listen to:” setting may be set to SAP.
• If using stereo or A/V receiver speakers, check their input selection.
• If using stereo or A/V receiver, check that AUDIO OUTPUT on TV’s back panel is
connected to the A/V receiver.
3. The A/V Receiver is the selected audio
source but there is no sound.
• Check to see if the A/V Receiver power is turned on. After the power is turned on,
redisplay the Device Selection menu and press ENTER to allow NetCommand to
correctly select the A/V Receiver input.
• Verify the connections and NetCommand setup for the A/V receiver and the desired
source device, if any.
From the NetCommand menu, select Review. Check the Review screen to see if the A/
V Receiver inputs and device listed correspond to the physical connections on the A/V
Receiver. If they do not match, either change the physical connections or change the
NetCommand setup. To change the NetCommand setup, make the audio source the
TV speakers and select a source other than the one you want to change. Next select
the Change option on the Edit NetCommand menu to change the A/V receiver input for
the device on the Connection screen.
4. The TV Speaker icon or A/V Receiver icon is
grayed out and not selectable.
Select the Change setting from the Edit NetCommand menu, and then select
the device (for example VCR). Once the Connection screen is displayed,
check if the audio check box is selected for the TV input and/or AVR input.
Recording
Symptom Remarks
1. See on-screen message “TV Disc is full...” Some recording(s) on the Track List need to be deleted. Press DEVICE
to display the Device Selection menu, then select TV Disc. Press
GUIDE to display the track list. Highlight program(s) to delete and press
CANCEL twice to confirm.
2. The REC button is not working, or, on the
Transport menu, the record key is grayed out and
not available.
• The device, such as a DVD player, does not support recording.
• Recordings cannot be initiated from the Transport menu when using an IEEE
1394 device. Press REC instead. The Record menu displays allowing setup of a
recording
3. Program to be recorded was correctly selected
from ChannelView, however, incorrect program
was recorded.
The broadcaster supplied program information that was incorrect and/or
was changed after a recording was added to the Record List.
4. Incomplete ChannelView program recorded. Recording device may lack sufficient blank space to make a full
recording.
ChannelView program recording failed. • Connection and compatibility issues with IEEE 1394 (FireWire®) digital devices.
This may include too many Firewire devices in use at one time, or the recording
device not understanding the record command.
• Television lost power long enough to lose current clock time.
• Analog VCR power was left off.
Appendix J: Troubleshooting, continued
Appendices 119
IEEE 139 Devices
Symptom Remarks
1. Excessive digital artifacts when viewing an IEEE
1394 device.
• The IEEE 1394 cable is too long; 15 feet between devices is the maximum.
• There may be a slow device in the middle of the IEEE 1394 network. Move the
slow devices to the end so that connections for faster devices do not pass
through them.
2. D-VHS recordings for digital cable have drop-
outs (loss of picture or sound), or no playback.
Digital cable signals on IEEE 1394 can exceed the data rate standards
supported by DVCR.
3. There is no audio and video from the IEEE 1394
device.
• The device is not turned on. Turn the device power on.
• No media (tape or disc) is inserted into the device.
• The media is blank (has no recording).
• The play command failed - Try pressing play again on the device’s remote control
or front panel.
• The device is already in use (for example, the device is currently recording).
• The source is copy-protected or violates copy protection.
• The device’s digital video signal is not supported by the TV, as may be the case
with an IEEE 1394 signal from a computer. Use analog connections instead, if
available.
• The device is not an audio/video device.
• Too many other devices are already communicating over IEEE 1394. Remove or
stop some devices and try again.
4. The IEEE 1394 Device is not listed in the Device
Selection menu.
• The device is unchecked in the Review screen. Select the NetCommand menu.
Through Review, verify the device is checked.
• The IEEE 1394 plug is disconnected or loose.
• The IEEE 1394 Device has not been powered On. Turn on.
• The device has not been discovered.
• The device is not an Audio/Video device
5. The IEEE 1394 device cannot be selected (is
grayed out).
The device may be busy, either recording or a peer-to-peer connection
has been established. Cancel the recording or peer-to-peer connection.
6. DEVICE MENU button does not display a menu. • The IEEE 1394 device does not provide a menu. See page 58.
• The TV cannot support IEEE 1394 menus.
7. All IEEE 1394 devices disappear. • The connected devices must not be in a loop that returns to the TV. Make sure a
device is connected at the end.
• Disconnect all the cables and devices from the TV. Replace them one by one to
locate the problem device or cable
• Use System Reset (front control panel).
8. Cannot rediscover a deleted IEEE 1394 device. • The device has been disconnected. Plug it in.
• The device is unchecked in the Review screen. Select NetCommand from the
Main menu, then select Review. Check the device.
• Remove IEEE 1394 plug. Go to the Edit NetCommand menu. Delete the IEEE
1394 device. Plug the device in again so it can be discovered again.
9. An IEEE 1394 device has been plugged in but
does not appear in the Device Selection menu
(not discovered).
• The IEEE 1394 connection to the TV or another device is not secure or is loose.
• The IEEE 1394 device is not powered on.
• A device in the IEEE 1394 chain is not powered on. Turn on all the devices.
• The device discovery can take as long as a minute to initiate.
• IEEE 1394 cable is too long (maximum of 15 feet between devices).
• The IEEE 1394 device uses an incompatible protocol and will not be discovered
Appendix J: Troubleshooting, continued
120 Appendices
IEEE 139 Devices
Symptom Remarks
10. Cannot record to or from the IEEE 1394 device,
including dubbed recordings.
• To initiate a recording to IEEE 1394 device, press the REC key. The Record menu
displays allowing setup of the recording.
• The source device for the recording is not powered on.
• When dubbing, the destination device for the recording is not powered on.
• The wrong medium (analog tape for digital recording, or digital tape for the analog
recording) is in the device.
• The program is copy protected.
• The program has already been recorded once and the copy protection only allows
one recording.
• Unapproved source device for copy protected material.
• The recording device can not decode the copyright signal included in the signal
source (try another device if available).
• The playing device (for dubbing) does not support copyrighted material.
• Source for recording is copyrighted
• Too many IEEE 1394 devices in network. Insufficient bandwidth available.
Disconnect unused devices.
• Source Device has higher speed (S 400) than record device. If possible, reverse
devices, play in the slower device and record in the faster device.
11. Cannot control the IEEE 1394 device from the
Transport Menu.
• Device may not support the command.
• Selected function is gray (such as Record for a DVD, which does not support the
Record function.
TV Guide On Screen
(see the separate TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed information)
Symptom Remarks
1. TV Guide On Screen® system shows no program
listings.
• Program listings are downloaded while the TV is off and the cable
box is left on. It may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV
program listings. It may take up to one week to receive all eight
days of TV program listings.
• Invalid ZIP code was entered at the initial TV Guide On Screen
system setup. Select NetCommand from the main TV menu, then
Guide and enter the correct ZIP code.
• Check the connections between the TV and the TV Guide On
Screen input (cable, antenna or cable box and IR cable). At least
one antenna connection must be associated with the TV Guide On
Screen system to receive program listings.
2. TV Guide On Screen system program listings
don’t match actual programs
• Incorrect ZIP code was entered at initial TV Guide system setup.
Select NetCommand menu, then Guide to enter the correct ZIP
code.
• For cable programs, there may be more than one cable company
in your ZIP code. Refer to the TV Guide On Screen system manual
for instructions on the Setup Service.
3. TV Guide On Screen system does not change
channels on the cable box.
• Cable box is not set up in NetCommand. The TV Guide On Screen
system uses NetCommand to control the cable box and VCR. To
correct, select NetCommand from the main TV menu, then select
Change or Add on the NetCommand menu and select Cable Box.
• NetCommand IR emitter is not in place or properly positioned in
front of the cable box remote sensor. See page 31.
Appendix J: Troubleshooting, continued
Trademark and License Information 121
LICENSOR’S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY, ANY EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH SUPPLIERS, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.
CompactFlash® and CF are trademarks of the CompactFlash Association.
DCR™ Certification Logo is a trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association.
Digital Light Processing™ and DLP™ are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
DTVLINK™ Certification Logo is a trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association.
Firewire® is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. registered in the U.S. and other countries.
HDMI™ the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Lifestyle® 28 is a trademark of the Bose Corporation.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited pay-per-view uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly prohibited.
Memory Stick™ and Memory Stick PRO™ are trademarks of Sony Corp.
Microdrive® is a registered trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technology, Inc. in the United states and/or other
countries.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license
from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
MultiMediaCard™ is trademark of Infineon Technologies and licensed to the MultiMediaCard Association.
The PanelLink Cinema Partners logo and the “PanelLink Cinema,” “PLC” and “PLC Content Ready” word
marks are trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. and are used under a license from Silicon Image, Inc or
PanelLink Cinema, LLC.
Playstation® 2 is a trademark of the Sony Corporation.
SD logo is a trademark.
SmartMedia™ is a trademark of Toshiba Corp.
In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or one of its affiliates.
The TV Guide On Screen® system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one
of its affiliates.
The TV Guide On Screen® system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents:
6,498,895; 6,418,556; 6,331,877; 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.
XBox™ is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
MonitorLink™, NetCommand®, ViewPoint®, QuickView™, SuperQuickView™, PerfectColor™, MediaCommand™,
ChannelView™, Diamond Shield™ are trademarks of Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.
Trademark and License Information
122 Trademark and License Information
MITSUBISHI TV SOFTWARE
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR EMBEDDED SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT – READ CAREFULLY: This License Agreement is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or an entity)
and Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. (MDEA) for all software pre installed and/or provided along with this television
(“Software”). By utilizing this television and Software, you agree to be bound by the terms of this License Agreement.
The Software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions, as well as other intellectual property
laws and treaties. The Software is licensed, not sold.
1. LICENSE GRANT. MDEA grants you a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right and license to use one copy of the
Software only with the Mitsubishi television model that included this owner’s guide and owned by you.
2. RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.
Software Not for Resale. You may not resell or otherwise transfer for value the Software, except in conjunction with a sale of the TV
that Software has been pre installed.
Prohibition on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. The Software contains trade secrets or other proprietary
material in its human perceivable form and to protect them, you may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or otherwise
reduce the Software to any human perceivable form, except to the extent that the foregoing restriction is expressly prohibited by
applicable law.
Separation of Components. The Software is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on
more than one TV.
No Rental. You may not rent, lease, lend, or sublicense the Software.
Trademarks. This License Agreement does not grant you any rights to any trademarks of MDEA.
3. VIOLATIONS. You understand that any use, copying or transfer of the Software, except as permitted pursuant to this License,
may subject you to serious criminal and civil penalties including damages and an award to MDEA of attorneys’ fees in connection with
any violation of this License. You further understand that you may be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement or other
violation of intellectual property rights that is caused, encouraged, or induced by your failure to abide by the terms of the License.
This license is effective until terminated, and will terminate immediately without notice from MDEA or judicial resolution if you fail to
comply with any provision of this License.
4. COPYRIGHT. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the Software (including but not limited to any images,
photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text, and “applets” incorporated into the Software), and any accompanying printed
materials are owned by or licensed to MDEA. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed
through use of the Software is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other
intellectual property laws and treaties. This License Agreement grants you no rights to use such content, except that you own the
media on which the Software is recorded, but MDEA and its licensors retain ownership of the Software itself. All rights not expressly
granted are reserved by MDEA.
5. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. MDEA is licensing the Software for use within the United States. You agree that you will not
export or re-export the Software. You specifically agree not to export or re-export the Software: (i) to any country to which the U.S.
has embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services, which currently include, but are not necessarily limited to Cuba, Iran,
Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria, or to any national of any such country, wherever located, who intends to transmit or
transport the Software back to such country; (ii) to any person or entity who you know or have reason to know will utilize the Software
in the design, development, or production of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons; or (iii) to any person or entity who has been
prohibited from participating in U.S. export transactions by any federal agency of the U.S. government. You warrant and represent
that neither the BXA nor any other U.S. federal agency has suspended, revoked, or denied your export privileges.
6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE OR IN THE LIMITED
WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE TV, MDEA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED BY MDEA. IN NO EVENT SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTIES, IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
OR OTHERWISE, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. MDEA SHALL NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD
PARTIES FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY CLAIMS FOR LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF GOOD WILL OR
EXPENDITURES MADE OR COMMITTED FOR IN RELIANCE ON THE CONTINUATION OF THIS LICENSE. YOU AGREE
THAT NEITHER MDEA’S BREACH OF THIS LICENSE NOR ITS FAILURE TO REPAIR A DEFECT, ERROR OR BUG SHALL
CONSTITUTE A FAILURE OF THE ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. MDEA’s liability to you for direct damages for any cause whatsoever and regardless
of the form of the action, will be limited to the money paid by you for the TV (based on fair market value of the TV) that
caused the damages.
8. GENERAL. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California.
WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and/or birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
123
Mitsubishi DLP™ Projection Television Limited Warranty
MITSUBISHI DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC. (“MDEA”) warrants as follows to the original purchaser of this
television from an authorized MITSUBISHI Audio/Video Dealer, should it prove defective by reason of against defects
arising from improper workmanship and/or material:
a. Parts. The lenticular (i.e. front picture) screen is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of thirty (30) days from the date of the original purchase at retail. The lamp and all other parts (except any
software incorporated into this television) are warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of the original
purchase at retail. We will repair or replace, at our option, any defective part without charge for the part. Parts used for
replacement may be replaced with those of like kind and quality and may be new or remanufactured. Parts used for
replacement are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period.
b. Embedded Software. MDEA warrants that all software incorporated into this television set (the “Embedded
Software”) will perform in accordance with the functional description of Embedded Software in all material respects,
but MDEA does not warrant that the Embedded Software is error-free. MDEA also does not warrant that the Embedded
Software will be compatible under IEEE 1394 AV/C and HAVi software standards with products produced by any other
manufacturer. The limited warranty contained in this section shall continue for a period of one (1) year from the date of
the original purchase at retail. If, after prompt notice within the warranty period, MDEA determines that the Embedded
Software has failed to perform in accordance with such functional description in all material respects and if such failure
is not due to accident, misuse, modification or misapplication of the Embedded Software, then MDEA shall modify or
replace the nonconforming Embedded Software at no charge to you, which at MDEA’s sole discretion may be fulfilled
by means of modification or replacement software contained on a replacement memory card for Customer installation.
The foregoing shall be MDEA’s sole obligation to you under this limited warranty. All rights under this limited warranty
on the Embedded Software also subject to your acceptance of and compliance with the terms of the Software License
Agreement applicable to this television, and this limited warranty on the Embedded Software shall be null and void if the
Embedded Software is modified or changed in any manner except as specifically authorized by MDEA.
c. Labor. For thirty (30) days after the original purchase at retail, we will repair or replace, at our option, the lenticular
screen if it proves defective. For certain items that are designed to be replaced by the consumer, including (but not
limited to) some Embedded Software, the consumer is solely responsible for any replacement labor. For all other parts,
we will provide the labor for a warranty repair by an authorized MITSUBISHI service center without charge for one (1)
year from the original date of purchase at retail.
d. Notice. To obtain warranty service, you must notify an authorized MITSUBISHI service center of any defect within
the applicable warranty time period.
e. This DLP Projection Television uses a single DLP chip to create the screen image. This technology creates the image
using small dots, or picture elements (pixels). Your DLP Projection TV is manufactured to a high level of performance
and quality, in fact, 99.99% perfect in the number of properly functioning pixels. As in other display technology,
sometimes a pixel is continuously active, inactive or the incorrect color. Our standard is clear; MDEA warrants only that
the percentage of properly functioning pixels will be not less than 99.99% of all pixels.
BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE, please review the instruction booklet to insure proper installation and correct
customer control adjustment. If the problem persists please arrange for warranty service.
1. TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE:
a. Contact your nearest authorized MITSUBISHI service center, whose name and address can be obtained from your
MITSUBISHI dealer, by writing at the address provided below, calling MDEA at the 800-332-2119, or by using the
support feature of our website at www.Mitsubishi-tv.com.
b. Warranty service will be provided in your home or, if required, at an authorized service shop, provided that your
television is located within the geographic territory customarily covered by an authorized MITSUBISHI service center. If
not, you must either deliver your television to an authorized service location at your own expense, or pay for any travel
and/or transportation costs the service center may charge to and from your home. Actual service labor will be provided
without charge.
c. Proof of purchase date from an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer is required when requesting warranty service. Present
your sales receipt or other document which establishes proof and date of purchase. THE RETURN OF THE OWNER
REGISTRATION CARD IS NOT A CONDITION OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. However, please
return the Owner Registration Card so that we can contact you should a question of safety arise which could affect you.
12
d. To obtain a replacement lamp during the warranty period, please contact the MDEA Consumer Relations Department
at (800) 332-2119. After the warranty period you may order the lamp directly from the MDEA Parts Department at (800)
553-7278.
2. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
a. Up to .01% pixel outages (small dot picture elements that are dark or incorrectly illuminated).
b. Damage to the lenticular screen or Fresnel lens, screen frame, cosmetic damage or to any other damage where
such damage is caused by unauthorized modification, alteration, repairs to or service of the product by anyone other
than an authorized MITSUBISHI service center; physical abuse to or misuse of the product (including any failure to
carry out any maintenance as described in the Owner’s Guide including air filter cleaning or any product damaged by
excessive physical or electrical stress); any products that have had a serial number or any part thereof altered, defaced
or removed; product use in any manner contrary to the Owner’s Guide; freight damage; or any damage caused by acts
of God or other factors beyond the reasonable control of MDEA, such as power surge damage caused by electrical
system or lightning. This limited warranty also excludes service calls where no defect in the product covered under
this warranty is found, service calls related to unsatisfactory audio or visual reception or signal unless caused by a
defect in the product that is covered under this limited warranty, all costs, expenses or any other damages arising from
product installation, or set-ups, any adjustments of user controls (including contrast, brightness, color, tint, fine tuning,
sharpness), other adjustment necessary to prepare the unit for display or use, connection with any external audio
receiver, antenna, cable or satellite systems, or service of products purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Please
consult the operating instructions contained in the Owner’s Guide furnished with the product for information regarding
user controls.
3. ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY NOT PROVIDED HEREIN, AND ANY REMEDY WHICH, BUT FOR THIS PROVISION,
MIGHT ARISE BY IMPLICATION OR OPERATION OF LAW, IS HEREBY EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED. THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY
LIMITED TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR.
4. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY,
BREACH OF CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE.
5. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or the exclusion or limitation of incidental,
special, or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
6. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to
state.
MITSUBISHI DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC.
9351 Jeronimo Road
Irvine, CA 92618-1904

Index 125
Index
A
A/V Memory Reset. See Reset
A/V Receiver
Adding 43
Connecting 27
Inputs 43
Input Learn Screen 44
Learn Screen 44
A/V Reset. See Reset
A/V Settings Descriptions
Audio 80
Video 81
Accessories, TV 10
Add Device. See NetCommand
Advanced Learn Screen, [Device] 48
Anamorphic Picture Format 71
Antenna inputs (ANT-1 MAIN, ANT-2
AUX) 18
Antenna with Leads, Connecting 24
Audio/Video Menu 64, 79
Audio Inputs 18
B
Back Panel (illustrated) 18
Batteries. See Remote Control
C
CableCARD™ 11, 19, 84
CableCARD™ Menu 57
Cable Box 51, 106
Connecting 23, 26
Camcorder 13, 22, 32, 33, 41, 46, 52,
117
and TV Disc 59
Captions Menu 64, 74
Change Device Screen. See NetCom-
mand
Channels 66, 72, 90. See also SQV
and PIP viewing 87
Changing 72
Memorizing 65
Name 72
ChannelView 58
Channel Menu 72
Cleaning and Service 108
Clock
Set Date, Time 65
Color Adjustments 81
Component Inputs (YPbPr) 18
Computer. See PC
Computer with a PC Monitor Output
93
Connecting: Helpful Hints 34
Connecting External Devices 22
Connection for [Device] Screen 48
Connection Screen 53
Copy Restrictions 60, 61, 90
D
Date. See Clock
Daylight Savings Time 66
Demo Track 20
Device Menu 57
Device Selection Menu 56
Diamond Shield 111–113
Digital Audio Output 19
Display Formats 88
DTV Link 19
DVD Player with Component Video,
Connecting 28
DVI Analog Audio 19
DVI Device 28
DVR (Digital Video Recorder). See TV
Disc
F
Film Mode 79
Format Defnitions 88
Freeze Picture. See Pause, TV Pause
Front Button Lock 77
Front Control Panel 14
G
GUIDE Key (button) 14, 16, 34, 58
H
Hard Drive. See TV Disc
HDMI Device 29
HDMI Input 19
HDTV Receiver with Component
Video, Connecting 29
I
Icon Order 67
IEEE 1394 Devices
Adding IEEE 1394 Devices Auto-
matically 52
Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices
33
Connecting IEEE 1394 Devices
33
IEEE 1394 Device Type Screen
53
Inputs 19
Name for 1394 Device Screen
52
and NetCommand 51
New 1394 Device Screen 52
On-Screen Displays 90
Indicator Lights 117
Lamp Indicator 14
Power/Timer 15
Status 15
INFO Key On-Screen Information 90
Inputs (Audio/Video) 18
IR (Infrared)
IR Code for [Device] Screen 49
IR Emitter NetCommand® 18,
31
J
JPEG Picture Thumbnails (Media
Dialog Box) 85
L
Lamp Cartridge Replacement 109
Lamp Indicator. See Indicator Lights
Lamp Reminder 66
Language 65
“Learn” Feature
A/V Receiver 43, 44
Code Reference Chart 103
Description 22, 36, 37
Device 48
Device Key Reference Chart 100
GUIDE Key 34
IEEE 1394 Devices 53
Troubleshooting 116
Learn Screen, [Device] 47
Lock
Front Button Lock 77
Lock TV by Time 77
V-Chip Options 76
M
M-Link Control 30
Memorize Channels. See Channels
Memory Cards 12
Media Setup Menu 86
Memory Card Reader 13, 85
Playback 85
MP3 Audio 12, 13, 19, 27, 33, 34, 85,
86
Mute
Audio 74, 90
MUTE key 16
Video Mute 79
126 Index
N
Name Screen 45, 48
NetCommand
Add Device 46
Change Device 50
Connecting External Devices 22
Default Inputs 22
Delete Device 50
Description 11
Device Control (reference chart)
106
Device Setup Screen 41
Edit NetCommand Screen 46
Initial Setup 40
IR Emitters 31
NetCommand Menu 67
Pre-Memorized Devices 37
Specialized Device Keys 100
O
On-Screen Information 90
P
Pass Code
Resetting 101
Setting 76
Pause. See also TV Pause
and Automatic POP Switching
87
Freezing PIP and Side-by-Side
Images 87
and Memory Cards 85
PAUSE key 100
Operation Described 16
and Recording 70
Standard Pause 16, 68
PC 19, 46, 52, 88
Connecting 92, 93
Peer-to-Peer Connection 62
PerfectColor 81
PIP/POP (Picture in Picture/Picture
outside Picture) 16, 87
PIP Device Selection Menu 56
Playlist Menu, MP3 or WMA7 86
Q
QV (QuickView™) 16
R
Recording
Analog and Digital Formats 70
Analog VCR and Viewing 114
Cancel Scheduled Recordings
71
Copying or Moving TV Disc Re-
cordings 61
Default Digital (Record) Device
71
Digital VCR or A/V Disc and
Viewing 114
Record List 71
Record List Screen 59, 71
Record Menu 70
REC Button 16, 58, 60, 70, 118,
120
Setup 59, 70
Time-Delayed 59, 70
VCR Recording from an Antenna
or Cable Source 60
Remote Control
and NetCommand® 37
Batteries 17
Functions 16
Programming 103
Programming Codes (reference
chart) 103
Transport Buttons 67
Reset
A/V (all settings) 14
A/V Memory (for individual de-
vices) 79
DVCR Counter 107
Lamp Reminder 66
Pass Code 101
PerfectColor 81
Remote Control 17
System Reset Button 14, 20, 115
TV 20
TV Disc 20
VCR Counter 106
Review Screen 42
RF Connection for Cable Screen 49
RS-232C 19, 30
S
S-Video 27
Satellite Receiver 16, 22, 27, 29, 37,
46, 51, 52, 58, 104, 105
Screen Protector. See Diamond
Shield
Search. See TimeShuttle, TV Pause
Search A/V Disc. See A/V Discs
Search Current Broadcast. See Time-
Shuttle, TV Pause
Select Viewing Device. See Device
Selection Menu
Setup Menu 64, 65
Setup Reminder 42
Signal Defnitions 88
Speakers, TV 79
Specifcations, TV 98
SQV (SuperQuickView™) 73
Stand Requirements 2
Status Indicator. See Indicator Lights
Stereo. See A/V Receiver
System Reset. See Reset
T
Time. See Clock
Timer 66
TimeShuttle 69
Time Zone 66
Track List Screen 60
Transport Menu 67
TV Disc 59, 60, 107, 118
Analog Recording Quality 71
Copying or Moving Recordings
61
Description 11
and the Remote Control 16
TV Guide On Screen 12, 16, 18, 23,
71, 72
Access Requirements 2
Setup 41
TV Pause 68
V
V-Chip 78
Bypassing the V-Chip Lock 101
Ratings 78
V-Chip Lock Menu 64, 76
V-Chip Menu 76
VCR 16, 18, 33, 52, 53, 56, 58, 117
Connecting 25, 26
and NetCommand Control 106,
107
NetCommand Default Input 22
NetCommand Pre-Memorized
Models 37
NetCommand Specialized De-
vice Keys 100
Programming Codes 104
Restrictions for Traditional VCRs
60
VCR for Recordings Screen 49
Video Inputs 18
Video Settings 81
W
Wall Outlet Cable 23
WMA Audio 12, 13, 85, 86
© 2005 Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. Written and Printed in U.S.A.
853B540A40
Website:
www.mitsubishi-tv.com
E-mail:
MDEAservice@mdea.com
To order replacement or
additional remote controls, lamp
cartridges, or Owner’s Guides,
call
800-553-7278
For questions, call Consumer
Relations at
800-332-2119

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user of the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. This TV is heavy! Exercise extreme care when lifting or moving. Lifting or moving the TV requires a minimum of two adults. To prevent damage to your TV, your TV should not be jarred or moved while it is turned on. Power off your TV before moving it. Portions of the advanced circuitry of this TV must continue to operate even when the TV is turned off. Some of these circuits therefore need to be cooled at all times. A low power standby fan may be heard in a quiet environment. This is normal operation.

Custom cabinet installation must allow for proper air circulation around the television. TV Guide On Screen® Access Requirements
TV Guide On Screen listings are not provided by Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. Operation of TV Guide On Screen requires over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide On Screen program listings. If listings are not available in your area or become discontinued by the local provider, TV Guide On Screen will not operate. TV Guide On Screen does not provide program listings for satellite TV systems.

Stand Requirement

CAUTION: Use these Mitsubishi TV models only with the Mitsubishi stand models shown here. Use with other stands can result in instability and possibly cause injury.

TV Model Number WD-62827 WD-62927 WD-73827 WD-73927

Stand Model Number MB-62827 MB-62927 MB-73827 MB-73927

LAMP REPLACEMENT The image on this TV is produced by a powerful lamp that will operate for many hours. Eventually, however, this lamp will need to be replaced. It is designed to be easily replaced by the TV owner. Front panel indicators and/or on-screen messages will assist you in determining when the lamp needs to be replaced. Please see Appendix G for details on lamp replacement. To order a new lamp: While Under Warranty Call (800) 332-2119. Please have model number, serial number, and TV purchase date available. After Warranty Call (800) 553-7278. Order lamp part number 915P027010.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER: THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER’S ATTENTION TO ARTICLE 820-40 OF THE NEC THAT PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR THE PROPER GROUNDING AND, IN PARTICULAR, SPECIFIES THAT THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF THE BUILDING, AS CLOSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE ENTRY AS PRACTICAL.

FCC Declaration of Conformity
Product: Models: Responsible Party: Projection Television Receiver WD-62827, WD-62927, WD-73827, WD-73927 Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. 9351 Jeronimo Road Irvine, CA 92618-1904 949-465-6000

Telephone:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: To ensure continued FCC compliance, the user must use a shielded video interface or HDMI cable with bonded ferrite cores at both ends when using the PC input.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Mitsubishi could cause harmful interference and would void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

2. sofa. paying particular attention to cords at plugs. The TV may fall. 5. Water and Moisture Do not use the TV where contact with or immersion in water is possible. Do not use near bath tubs. Any mounting of the TV should follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not block these openings or allow them to be obstructed by placing the TV on a bed. wash bowls. and the point where they exit from the TV. Attachments and Equipment Never add any attachments and/or equipment without approval of the manufacturer as such additions may result in the risk of fire. or sold with the TV. Ventilation Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the TV and to protect it from overheating. Lightning For added protection for this TV during a lightning storm. Read. ensure that there is adequate ventilation and that the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. 11. Nor should it be placed over a radiator or heat register. 7.  . Retain the safety and operating instructions for future reference. Accessories Do not place the TV on an unstable cart. consult your appliance dealer or local power company. . kitchen sinks. 9.IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS Please read the following safeguards for your TV and retain for future reference. Use a lightly dampened cloth for cleaning. 3. Quick stops. causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the TV. Cleaners can permanently damage the cabinet and screen. electric shock or other personal injury. This will prevent damage to the TV due to lightning and power-line surges. Grounding or Polarization This TV is equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug having one blade wider than the other. If the plug should still fail to fit. 1. Always follow all warnings and instructions marked on the television. or table. Retain and Follow All Instructions Read all safety and operating instructions before operating the TV. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Follow all operating and use instructions. 8. Heed Warnings Adhere to all warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions. excessive force. try reversing the plug. If the TV is to be placed in a rack or bookcase. This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. Use only with a cart. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet. contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. tripod. or other similar surface. etc. stand. If you are not sure of the type of power supplied to your home. Power Source This TV should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. Power-Cord Protection Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Do not use liquid. 10. rug. abrasive or aerosol cleaners. unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer. laundry tubs. swimming pools. convenience receptacles. or when it is left unattended and unused for long period of time. stand. Cleaning Unplug the TV from the wall outlet before cleaning. and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. 6. and should use mounting accessories recommended by the manufacturer. tripod.

electric shock or other hazards. E XAMP LE OF ANT E NNA G R OUNDING ANT E NNA LE AD IN WIR E G R OUND C LAMP ANT E NNA DIS C HAR G E UNIT (NE C AR T IC LE 810-20) G R OUNDING C ONDUC T OR S (NE C AR T IC LE 810-21) G R OUND C LAMP S P OWE R S E R V IC E G R OUNDING E LE C T R ODE S Y S T E M (NE C AR T 250. or objects have fallen into the TV. 15. Article 810 of the National Electric Code. (e) If the TV has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. Damage Requiring Service Unplug the TV from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: (a) (b) (c) (d) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. ANSI/NFPA No. If liquid has been spilled. adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the TV to its normal operation. Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required. Never spill liquid of any kind on or into the TV. 18. 70-2002. be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. 19.this indicates a need for service. 20. 13. Servicing NE C — NAT IONAL E LE C T R IC AL C ODE Do not attempt to service this TV yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Overloading Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the TV. P AR T H) E LE C T R IC S E R V IC E E QUIP ME NT 16. When installing an outside antenna system. Safety Check Upon completion of any service or repair to the TV. (f) When the TV exhibits a distinct change in performance . stoves or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. connection to grounding electrodes. Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits. heat registers. continued 12. Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind into this TV through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in fire or electric shock.IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS. 17. 5 . extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire. location of antenna discharge unit. and requirements for the grounding electrode. If the TV does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure. size of grounding conductors. grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the TV is in safe operating condition. Heat The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators. 1. If the TV has been exposed to rain or water.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetCommand® Setup On-Screen Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing or Deleting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MonitorLink Control/RS-232C Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card Reader . . . HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Chapter 1: Television Overview TV Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the GUIDE Button to Display ChannelView™ and Menus NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Remote Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDMI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . TV Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Graphical Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using TV Disc and A/V Discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peer-to-Peer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3: NetCommand® Setup and Editing NetCommand® Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an A/V Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 13 14 16 18 20 22 23 23 24 24 25 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 31 33 34 36 37 38 39 40 43 46 50 51 52 56 57 58 59 60 62 Chapter 2: Connecting External Devices and NetCommand® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4: NetCommand® Functions Device Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding IEEE 1394 Devices Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Device Menu Button to Display Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR Emitter NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/V Receiver (Stereo System) . . . . . NetCommand® Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features of Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . IEEE 1394 Devices and NetCommand® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . TV Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output Computer with a DVI Monitor Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetCommand® Menu Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 100 101 103 106 108 109 111 114 115 121 123 125 Trademark and License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MediaCommand™ and Memory Card Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computer with a 15-Pin Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 65 67 70 72 74 76 79 80 81 84 85 87 88 90 92 92 93 93 94 95 Chapter 6: Additional Features CableCARD™ Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of PIP and POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Menu . . . . . . . . PC Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetCommand® Specialized Device Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/Video Menu . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 5: TV Menu Operations Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Captions Menu . . . . . Chapter 7: Using the TV with a PC Connecting a PC . . . . . . Mitsubishi DLP™ Projection Television Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diamond Shield Removal and Installation Recording and Viewing Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Control Programming Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypassing the V-Chip Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-Chip Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendices Appendix A: Appendix B: Appendix C: Appendix D: Appendix E: Appendix F: Appendix G: Appendix H: Appendix I: Appendix J: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thank you. The very core of our corporate philosophy is to provide our customers with the very best.. Our development team at Mitsubishi has worked to provide you with a television that defines “state-of-the-art. Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America. We urge you to examine this Owner’s Guide to become familiar with the innovative features and operations this unique television offers. high definition TV.Our Thanks. we believe you and your family will continue to enjoy your Mitsubishi home theater for many years. Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi as your premier Home Entertainment provider This Owner’s Guide describes the features and functions of your Mitsubishi widescreen. 8 .. Inc.” with the capability to meet your needs now and in the future. Whether this is your first Mitsubishi electronic product. or an addition to your Mitsubishi collection.

Front Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 13 1 16 18 20 20 . . . . System Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TV Reset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 1 Television Overview TV Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features of Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card Reader . . TV Back Panel . .

One four-headed IR emitter cable (allows NetCommand to control other devices) 6. Four-piece TV trim kit (pictured above) 3. Quick Reference Guide (not pictured) 9. Two AA Batteries Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 also include: 10. Product registration card (not pictured) 7. 4. 10 Chapter 1. One two-headed IR emitter cable (allows NetCommand to control other devices) 5. Remote Control 2. Owner’s Guide (not pictured) 8. One digital audio cable (sends the audio of digital channels to a digital audio/video receiver).TV Accessories Please take a moment to review the following list of items to ensure that you have received everything. Television Overview . TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual (not pictured) AA AA 1.

1080i and 1080p. including: Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV uses Texas Instruments most advanced Digital Light Processing™ technology for rear-projection televisions. When used with a compatible graphics card and controlling software. For example. Dual digital tuners give you a high level of flexibility when using TV Disc. it is not possible to view one CableCARD channel and record another CableCARD channel at the same time. All of the compatible video and PC signals will be converted to 1080p for final display. To connect a PC to HDMI 2. Dual Digital Tuners Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV is “Plug-and-Play” ready. Antenna 1. Or you can view a device connected to a different input while recording a channel from CableCARD™. top and bottom bars. DVD players. Now you can record a high-definition program and watch it later without any loss of picture quality and without a VCR. signals with PC resolutions from VGA (640 x 480) through XGA (1024 x 768). and IR (infrared) control of selected older products. Note that due to the unidirectional nature of CableCARD service. however. High Definition DLP™ Display System TV Disc Internal Digital Video Recorder (DVR) TV Disc is an internal high-definition hard disk drive recorder. 5C copy protection. allowing you to create a customized NetCommand home-theater system that works best for your viewing. NetCommand supports IEEE 1394 connections. It is also able to accept. cable boxes. such as VCRs. Your TV can accept video signals from an antenna or direct cable service in standard video scanning rates of 480i. TV Disc will use Dolby Digital recording technology to convert the analog stereo to high-quality digital stereo compatible with Dolby Digital decoding surround receivers. Recordings on the TV Disc can be sent by an IEEE 1394 connection to D-VHS VCRs or to other IEEE 1394-compatible TVs and analog VCRs. Ant-1. Antenna 2. TV Disc can record digital and analog programs received from CableCARD™ channels. 720p. You also need to perform NetCommand setup for the HDMI 2 PC input so that the TV knows to apply the correct PCsignal processing. Digital Cable Ready (CableCARD™) Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV offers a new level of networking that can seamlessly integrate selected older A/V products with new and future digital products. Contact your local cable provider for availability information and service details.Special Features of Your TV Your new high-definition widescreen television has many special features that make it the perfect center of your home entertainment system. some signals will. Audio Video Control system (AV/C). You can record a non-scrambled analog or digital channel from Ant-2 while viewing an analog or digital channel from CableCARD™. you can record one analog or digital channel from CableCARD™ on one antenna input (Ant-1) while viewing a different non-scrambled analog or digital channel on the other antenna input (Ant-2). Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 contain a 250-gigabyte disc that can record up to 25 hours of high-definition programming. to fill the screen. devices connected to Input 1–3. this TV is also able to accept the custom PC resolution of 720p (1280 x 720). Television Overview 11 . this disc has a capacity of 160 gigabytes and can record up to 16 hours of high-definition programming. NetCommand has the capability of learning remote control signals directly from many devices. your PC must have a video card with DVI or HDMI output. The CableCARD is used in place of a traditional cable box to access digital cable programming (including high definition). detailed. This exciting feature makes possible live TV pause with instant replay. 480p. Note that a portion of the hard disc capacity is reserved for the TV Pause feature and is not available for video recording. When recording analog programs. and some signals will display standard video overscan. through the HDMI 2 connection. This TV is truly a high-performance multimedia monitor uniquely capable of both stunning high-definition video images and clear. NetCommand® Home Network Control System Chapter 1. In models WD-62827 and WD-73827. or IEEE 1394 devices. high-resolution PC images. and satellite receivers. or Ant-2. It can descramble a cable provider’s one-way digital signals with the use of a CableCARD security module. result in the addition of black side bars. also known as a digital video recorder or DVR. or both.

Digital TV broadcasts. This system offers multiple sorting options to help you find the programs you want to watch and gives you easy program recording.16:9 Widescreen Picture Format Enjoy a full theatrical experience in the comfort of your home. Memory Card Reader An eight-day on-screen program guide that can be used with cable. You can display a slide show of your favorite JPEG pictures or listen to MP3 or WMA audio selections that have been recorded on compatible memory cards. This input also accepts 1920 x 1080. In addition to the resolutions available via HDMI-2. TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide System (Models WD-62927 and WD-73927) In addition to the PC input available on HDMI-2. digital and high-definition programming. DVDs and newer video game consoles support this widescreen format. Multiple Options for Connecting a Home Theater Personal Computer 12 Chapter 1. 60-Hz signals to provide maximum performance when used with Home Theater PC/Media Centers. Note that when the system is first set up. Television Overview . so that you have current program information available every day. over-the-air and CableCARD™ reception. models WD-62927 and WD-73927 also have a 15-pin PC monitor input. Program listings are downloaded while your TV is turned off. The subscription-free guide system lists regular. View pictures as film directors intended them. it may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings and then it may take up to one week to receive all eight days of TV program listings.

Card Compatibility CARD 1 SmartMedia™ CARD 3 CompactFlash® (Types I and II) Microdrive® CARD 2 MultiMediaCard™ Secure Digital (SD) CARD 4 Memory Stick PRO™ Memory Stick™ 1 3 2  Figure 1. Lift cover to access card reader and front input jacks. MP3 and WMA file types that are compatible with the TV.Memory Card Reader and Front-Panel Inputs Memory Card Reader Figure 1 The memory card reader has four card slots that accept a variety of popular memory card types. Other cards or objects should not be inserted into the slots as this may damage the TV. Television Overview 13 . Use the IEEE 1394 input/output to connect IEEE 1394 devices. See the discussion of memory cards in chapter 6 for details about JPEG. The reader lets you view JPEG pictures from many digital cameras and allows you to listen to MP3 or WMA audio files recorded from computers or other digital recording devices. Note that if you connect to the S-VIDEO terminal. the VIDEO terminal is deactivated. Figure 2. Input 3 and IEEE 1394 input/output on front panel Chapter 1. Memory Card Reader Input 3 and IEEE 139 Input/Output Figure 2 These jacks allow for convenient connection of audio/ video devices to the front of the TV. such as some camcorders. This connection works the same as the rear IEEE 1394 connections. The card slots are designed for the specific types of cards listed below. The VIDEO terminal is active only when there is no S-Video connection. Please refer to the NetCommand® information in Chapter 3 for details.

TV will not operate without a lamp. To return all the settings at once. such as the end point of a paperclip. 1 3  1 5 2 1 Front Control Panel 1. Front-Panel Indicator Lights Lamp Indicator Indicator Color None (indicator off) TV Condition Normal TV on or standby condition. rapid blinking TV just powered off and lamp is cooling. TV will not operate until lamp access door is secure. steady Lamp nearing end of useful life. See Appendix G for installation information. Begins to blink 30 seconds after turning off TV. The changes you made the last time the TV was on before you used the SYSTEM RESET button may be lost. Lamp access door is open or not secure. See Appendix G for installation information. Additional Information Normal operation. 2. Green. Television Overview . you may again turn on the TV. blinking 1. Shaded buttons are duplicates of buttons on the remote control 4. Power/Timer indicator 2. This is a recommendation to have a new lamp ready before the current lamp stops illuminating. press the SYSTEM RESET button with a pointed item. A/ V Reset There may be times when you wish to reset the A/V (Audio and Video) settings back to the factory defaults. The top row of labels shows the control functions when there are no TV menus displayed on the screen. See Appendix G for installation information. press GUIDE and FORMAT on the front panel at the same time. To reset the defaults for individual devices. System Reset 3. The TV will not operate when the lamp no longer illuminates. Normal operation. When the TIMER light stops flashing. See “Remote Control Overview” for further details on the functions of these buttons. Any changes that you previously saved are not lost. The bottom row of labels shows the control functions when the TV menus are displayed on the screen or when a special function has been activated. Status indicator 5. use the A/V Memory Reset selection on the Audio/Video menu. The TV will turn off and the TIMER light will flash quickly for about one minute. Lamp indicator If the TV does not respond to either the remote control or the front panel controls and/or does not power off. TV can be turned on before it begins to blink or after the blinking stops. steady Lamp no longer illuminates and has reached the end of the lamp life. Yellow. Yellow. No lamp installed. 1 Chapter 1.Front Control Panel The shaded buttons on the front control panel are duplicated on the remote control. but not while the indicator is blinking. Replace the lamp. Red. See Appendix G for ordering information.

com or call 1-800-332-2119 to receive Authorized Service Center information. 5. TV is powered ON. continued Status Indicator Indicator Color None (indicator off) Yellow. steady TV Condition TV is powered OFF. If the LED is still on. See www. TV just plugged into AC outlet. Wait until blinking stops before turning on (approximately 1 minute). Wait until blinking stops before turning on (approximately 1 minute). 2. Wait until blinking stops before turning on (approximately 1-2 minutes). rapid blinking 1. CableCARD™. Wait until blinking stops before turning on (approximately 1 minute). TV will not operate when the ambient room temperature is too high. Normal operation. For detailed information. Normal operation. Additional Information Normal operation. steady TV Condition Normal TV on or standby condition. Green. Room temperature is too high. blinking Power/Timer Indicator Indicator Color None (indicator off) Green. slow blinking TV powered off and automatic-on timer is set. Additional Information Normal operation. AC just restored after power failure. Television Overview 15 . Wait one minute and then plug the set back in. Turn off the TV and unplug the set from the AC power source. 4. 3. contact your dealer or a Mitsubishi Authorized Service Center.mitsubishi-tv. You have begun the procedure to update software from an authorized flash memory device. Chapter 1. either steady or TV may require service. or digital device. Important: Do not use non-authorized software at any time. Green. Normal operation. Red.Front Control Panel. TV can be turned on at any time. TV Rebooting after power fluctuation or receiving abnormal digital signals from digital channel. Normal operation. TV Rebooting after System Reset used. Turn off the TV and wait until the room temperature drops. see the instructions that accompany the authorized software update. Normal operation. Normal operation.

Fast forwards a VCR. PIP CH: Scrolls up or down through memorized channels for PIP 1. 11. FF/FWD: Forward scans in TV Pause. press once to display the transport menu. including CableCARD™. Displays program guide for satellite receiver. Clears SQV and some menu entries. FORMAT: Changes the shape and size of the main TV picture. press repeatedly to cycle through the available info box sizes. REC (Record): Displays the Record menu for setting up recordings to TV Disc or other recordable device. 3. For VCR or DVDs. HOME: Exits TV on-screen menus displays. 25. 26. 32. ADJUST: Press to navigate menus. and cancels recordings. 31. REW/REV: Reverse scans in TV Pause or TimeShuttle. PLAY: Plays the TV Disc. QV (QuickView™): Switches between the current channel and last channel viewed. Slide Switch: Selects the A/V product to be controlled by the remote control. a satellite receiver. Opens the Media Dialog Box for memory cards. or memory card file. Performs skip forward and backward functions during TV Pause. V-CHIP: Turns the V-Chip Lock on or off. including IEEE 1394 devices). 29 CONNECT: Initiates IEEE 1394 peer-to-peer connections. 13. 21. PAUSE: With TV Pause enabled (with the Always or On Request option). or memory card file playback. 16. 30. 33. change settings. A/V Disc. Rewinds a VCR. A/V Disc. Select TV for NetCommand® device control. Navigate TV Guide On Screen® and change settings. 2. SLEEP: Sets the TV to turn off within 2 hours. MUTE: Turns sound off or back on. Forward scans TV Disc. . next page 2. 3. A/V Disc. press again to display the VCR or DVD menu. DVD. See the next page for setup instructions. STOP: Stops play of the TV Disc. DEVICE MENU: Displays the menu for devices connected to the TV. PIP/POP: Turns on PIP and cycles through PIP and POP display choices. AUDIO: Selects individual audio settings for adjustment. Television Overview . DVD. pauses program viewing and activates TV Pause to allow forward/backward scans in a broadcast program (when no PIP/POP image is displayed). Skips through DVD chapters. Light: Located on the right side of the remote control. adds separator between main and sub-channel numbers. CH(ANNEL)/PAGE: Scans up or down through memorized channels. A/V Disc. freezes that image. DVD. or DVD Disc menu. or memory card file.Remote Control Overview 1. and move the PIP on-screen location. DVD. Sets up recordings while in ChannelView or the TV Guide On Screen Listings screen. Records with a VCR. 19. 27. Operates many NetCommand® functions. Returns to TV viewing from TV Pause. VOLUME: Changes sound level. PIP DEVICE: Displays PIP Selection menu to select the PIP or POP image source device 15. a VCR. ChannelView™. 28. Pauses TV Disc. 10. Numbers: Individually select channels or enter information into menus. 20. TV Disc. Displays and removes options menus for TV Guide On Screen. Displays Track List for TV Disc and A/V Disc. Pages up and down through screens when used with TV Guide On Screen®. or devices connected to the TV’s inputs. VIDEO: Selects individual video settings for adjustment. TV MENU: Displays the on-screen menu system. Press twice to display the TV Pause slider when this feature is active. or memory card file. SUB/CANCEL: For digital channels. or memory card file. POWER: Turns power on and off for the TV and other A/V products. While in TV Guide On Screen. GUIDE: Press to display or remove TV Guide On Screen or ChannelView for ANT-1 and 2. 7. EXCH: Exchanges PIP or POP and main TV picture. 6. 8. some cable boxes. 18. DEVICE: Displays the Device Selection menu in which you can select the device to view (ANT-1 and ANT-2. 9. INFO: Press to display an on-screen summary of the current device used and any broadcast information available (including current V-Chip information). exits the TV Guide On Screen system and returns to TV viewing. Reverse scans TV Disc. memory card playlists and JPEG thumbnails. 22. 5. this feature illuminates buttons or labels. 23. DVD. 16 Chapter 1. ENTER: Selects a channel number or menu item. a VCR. Figure 1. SQV (SuperQuickView™): Scans through memorized lists of favorite channels. See chapter 6 for details on the on-screen display. When PIP/POP is displayed. A/V Disc. operates as standard pause by freezing a broadcast TV picture (when no PIP/POP image is displayed). Displays thumbnails or playlists for memory card files. a VCR. 17. With TV Pause disabled (Off). 12.

3. Do not allow unit to get wet or become heated. Do not heat. Do not use harsh chemicals to clean. Use only AA alkaline batteries. Each additional press of SLEEP increases the time displayed by 30 minutes up until the maximum value of 120 minutes. the message box disappears. Use only a soft. Press SLEEP to display the on-screen message. 1 2 3  5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 15 17 18 19 20 21 Figure 2. Do not press two or more buttons at the same time unless instructed. Press SLEEP repeatedly until OFF is displayed. Figure 1. 4. insert the negative (-) side first. Remote Control Overview Battery Installation Figure 2 Installing the Batteries: 1. Hint: If the remote is in the TV layer and does not function. Do not mix new and old batteries. or throw batteries into fire. take apart. After five seconds of inactivity.Remote Control. Television Overview 17 . Load the batteries. continued 2. Press SLEEP to view the time remaining before the timer turns the TV off. For best results. Chapter 1. Avoid dropping on hard surfaces. 2. the message will disappear. making sure the polarities (+) and (-) are correct. Cancelling the Sleep Timer: 1. Note: After five seconds of inactivity. 16 Sleep Timer 3 Setting the Sleep Timer: 1. Remove the remote control’s back cover by gently pressing the ribbed tab in the direction of the arrow and sliding off the cover. Operation: Installing the Batteries 22 23 2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Care • • • • • • • • For Best Results from the Remote Control: Be within 20 feet of the equipment. lightly moistened cloth. 2. Press SLEEP on the remote control. press POWER and 935 to reset the remote.

Super VHS (S-VHS) VCR. such as a DVD player. your VCR. you must choose to connect only one.TV Back Panel Note: 15-pin D-subminiature PC input (item 6) offered on models WD-62927 and WD-73927 only. external HDTV receiver. This system is also coordinated with the TV Guide On Screen® system for the control of cable boxes and to activate the record feature of 2. The CableCARD access card is provided by your local cable company. Antenna (ANT-1 MAIN. Either connection can be used for NetCommand functions. satellite receivers and audio receivers. or compatible video game system. 18 Chapter 1. (Audio/ Video 1 and 2) 3. 6  3 2 5 7 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) 2 8 9 1 12 11 10 1. ANT-2 AUX can continue to receive over-the-air or non-scrambled cable signals. Please see Appendix A for signal compatibility. IR EMITTER NetCommand® Inputs 1 and 2 can be used for the connection of a VCR. Television Overview . ANT-1 MAIN must be used to view premium subscription cable TV service authorized by the CableCARD™ access card. VCRs. YPbPr (80i/80p/720p/1080i) . ANT-2 AUX) ANT-1 MAIN and ANT-2 AUX can each receive both digital and analog over-the-air channels from a VHF/UHF antenna or non-scrambled digital/analog cable source. Your primary viewing signal source should be connected to ANT-1 MAIN. standard satellite receiver or other A/V device to the TV. Please note that if S-VIDEO and VIDEO are available for the input. INPUT 1 and 2 IR Emitters connected to these jacks are used by the NetCommand system of the TV to control external analog devices such as cable boxes. They cannot both be connected at the same time. DVD player. DVDs. COMPONENT 1–3 Inputs These inputs can be used for the connection of devices with component video outputs.

(VGA/W-VGA/SVGA/W-SVGA/XGA/W-XGA/1280 x 720. you must connect the PC audio output to the TV’s DVI Analog Audio 2. provides enhanced functions such as automatic power on/off and input-port selection. WD-73927 only) This input can be used to connect a personal computer. AUDIO OUTPUT. 10. Unlike HDMI. These inputs support 480i. you need to connect the TV’s analog AUDIO OUTPUT (left and right) to your A/V receiver.TV Back Panel. This card allows the TV to receive. Analog audio from analog channels and devices is converted by the TV to PCM digital audio. you will need to use a cable box provided and authorized by your local cable company to view scrambled channels. When using the optional HDMI-to-DVI adapter. decode and unscramble the premium digital channels included in your cable TV subscription without the use of a cable box. CableCARD is a nationwide standard system that allows your local cable TV provider to supply you with an access card customized to your account. Digital Audio Output This output sends Dolby® Digital or PCM digital audio to your digital A/V surround sound receiver. If you have a digital A/V receiver. use the NetCommand Add function. DVI Analog Audio initial NetCommand setup by selecting the PC option in the Device Setup screen. If you have MP3 audio sources.” 11. located above the HDMI 2 input. Digital audio from digital channels. Detailed information regarding IEEE 1394 connection requirements is in Chapter 2. HDMI. Component. MonitorLink/RS-232C Control 7. See page 84 for additional CableCARD information and activation instructions. CableCARD™ Slot The CableCARD access card from your cable TV service provider is inserted into this slot. however. provides a port for an external controller that uses RS-232C signals for communication.mitsubishi-tv. Signals from digital channels and FireWire (IEEE 1394) devices are converted to analog signals. 1920 x 1080. use DVI Analog Audio 2 input. There is no video signal when copy restrictions are in effect. 480p. The program on this output can be either the one you are currently watching or a different one. This input is HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) compliant. For RS-232C-compatible signal protocols. The top of the card should face in the direction indicated by CARD TOP . Please see Appendix A for signal compatibility. and PC inputs are not available for recording. DVI does not carry audio information on the same cable. such as DVI output from a DVD player. HDMI 2 HDMI 2 also allows the TV to display DVI or HDMI output from a PC. These inputs can also be used as a DVI connection with separate analog audio inputs. PC Input (models WD-62927. If your cable company is not currently offering CableCARD access cards. Use these inputs to connect to EIA/CEA-861 compliant devices such as a high-definition receiver or DVD player. which allow for a high degree of flexibility for connecting your NetCommand-controlled system. When used as a MonitorLink port with a Mitsubishi receiver/controller. you must activate the PC option in NetCommand. You can do this during 8. this should be the only audio connection between the TV and your analog A/V receiver or stereo system. Television Overview 19 . 720p and 1080i video formats. continued 5. 9. Use these analog stereo audio inputs when using the HDMI input with a device that outputs DVI instead of HDMI. “Connecting. Chapter 1. When used as an RS-232C connection. in most cases this should be the only audio connection between the TV and your A/V receiver. For audio. RECORD OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT sends analog audio of the program currently shown on the screen to an A/V surround sound receiver or stereo system. Two jacks are provided for this purpose. To listen to audio from a PC when using PC DVI output. To do this at any time afterwards. An optional HDMI-to-DVI adaptor or cable is necessary to make this connection and may be available from your local electronics retailer. DTVLink™/IEEE 139 These jacks allow the TV to connect to external IEEE 1394 digital products by means of a single cable. HDMI™ 1 and 2 12. If you do not have a digital A/V receiver. the DVI analog audio inputs on your TV allow you to receive left and right stereo audio from your DVI device. To view PC video on the TV. please visit www. The HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports uncompressed standard and high-definition digital video formats and PCM digital audio format. 60 Hz) 6.com. RECORD OUTPUT sends analog audio and video to a VCR for recording purposes. FireWire® (DTVLink/IEEE 1394) devices and HDMI devices is converted to analog audio by the TV.

you may turn on the TV again. Erase TV Disc (CAUTION: Track List will be cleared). When the green LED stops flashing. however. before you used the SYSTEM RESET button. IMPORTANT Do not attempt to update the software of this TV with software or cards that are not provided by or authorized by Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America. 20 Chapter 1. as some user data or settings may be erased. Press GUIDE to display the Track List. Using the Reset Menu for Reset of the TV or TV Disc Select any device from the Device Selection menu. Press TV MENU followed by 1. 4. To delete the demo track: 1. IMPORTANT Portions of the advanced circuitry of this TV must continue to operate even when the TV is turned off. Some of these circuits therefore need to be cooled at all times. Television Overview . Demo Track The TV Disc in some TVs comes a with a demo track that plays in a continuous loop. Non-authorized software may damage the TV and will not be covered by the warranty. The TV will turn off and the green LED will flash quickly for about one minute. Highlight the track name “demo track” and press CANCEL. press the SYSTEM RESET button on the front panel with a pointed item such as the point of a ball point pen or end tip of a paperclip. Select the TV Disc as the viewing source. 3. Press CANCEL again to confirm the deletion. except for TV Disc. may be lost. Your choices are: Reset System Defaults (CAUTION: All settings.Additional Information System Reset Button If the TV doesn’t respond to either the remote control or the front panel controls or will not power off. will be reset to the original factory defaults). are not lost. Reformat TV Disc (CAUTION: Track List will be cleared). Read on-screen warnings before proceeding. The changes you made while the TV was most recently on. A low-power standby fan may be heard in a quiet environment. the changes you made previously. Inc. 2. All other settings are retained. Reset TV Disc (Track List will not be affected).3 to see the RESET SERVICE MENU to reset the TV or TV Disc. Only those changes since the last power on may be lost when the system reset button is pressed. except V-Chip. This is normal operation.2.

. . . . . DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MonitorLink Control/RS-232C Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVI Device . . VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video HDMI Device . . . . . .Chapter 2 Connecting External Devices and NetCommand® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR Emitter NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S-Video . . Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 23 23 2 2 25 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 31 33 3 . . . Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . Compatible IEEE 139 Devices . . A/V Receiver (Stereo System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

you must stereo and/or digital audio cables change the NetCommand setup accordingly. there is a step-by-step on-screen NetCommand Setup procedure in this chapter. It is important that the inputs on the TV and A/V receiver back panels match the NetCommand setup that is displayed on screen. The following charts show which preset inputs you should use on the TV and A/V receiver. To simplify the installation of NetCommand. Connecting . WD-73827) PC (models WD-62927. ANT-2 if secondary viewing source COMPONENT-1 Input-1 Input-2 Input-3 (on front panel) COMPONENT-2 HDMI-2 PC INPUT After using NetCommand Setup. it is also able to learn the remote control signals used by most audio video devices not already in the TV’s memory. See Edit NetCommand. See Helpful Hints at the end of this chapter for additional information on device setup. add devices not included in the presets above or delete devices no longer used. Chart 1 shows the default TV inputs existing in NetCommand. If you connect devices to inputs AV TV other than the ones shown Receiver as presets. NetCommand can automatically switch the TV and compatible or learned Audio/Video (A/V) Receivers to the correct input used with each device. You should video and stereo audio cables connect each device to audio cables the TV input (both audio and video) and to the A/V receiver (audio) as shown in the figure below. you may go to the NetCommand menu at any time to change the inputs you used for connecting each device. which details the type and brands of devices you are connecting to the TV. The NetCommand Setup also assigns preset TV and Device to be A/V receiver inputs for connected stereo and/or digital each device. Chart 1 NetCommand Default Device Audio and Video Outputs to TV Inputs Cable for CableCARD™ Service Antenna/Cable (digital/analog) Cable box VCR Satellite Receiver (SAT) Camcorder DVD Player PC (models WD-62827. custom name devices. 22 Chapter 2. Chart 2 shows the A/V receiver inputs used by A/V receiver models already known by NetCommand. WD-73927) ANT-1 ANT-1 if primary viewing source. Additionally.Connecting External Devices and NetCommand® Setup NetCommand is able to control many current audio and video devices by sending remote control signals from the TV to each device through IR emitters. See the Edit NetCommand information starting on page 43.

you can use the TV remote control to change channels on the cable box. then replace the cover and screws. When this setup is complete. go to the RF Connection for Cable screen and do the following: a. For Channel. Detailed TV Guide On Screen information is in the separate User’s Manual. Standard Cable Box 1. ConnectLEFT/ coaxial cable from OUT on the RF one (MONO) splitter to IN on the standard cable box. The top of the card should face in the direction the CARD TOP arrow indicates. Using a Phillips screwdriver. select ANT-2. this setup allows two-channel PIP) Figure 2 3 coaxial cables and one two-way RF splitter are required. The default channel is 3. especially for CableCARD™ use and to download TV Guide On Screen® listings. Connecting 23 . 5. Check the RF check box. b. After the cable box is connected to ANT-2 AUX as shown. you must make the noted NetCommand changes. Connect the incoming cable to IN on an RF splitter. Note: See page 29 to connect an HDTV cable box. 2.Connecting a Wall Outlet Cable or Cable Box Wall Outlet Cable Figure 1 (can be used with a CableCARD™) It is very important to connect the incoming cable for your primary viewing source to ANT-1. 2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the cable box to ANT-2 AUX on the TV back panel. Chapter 2. 2 (cable box. use the NetCommand menu Change option to change the default connection for the cable box. Note: To use a cable box connected to ANT-2 as shown above. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF splitter to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel. For an optional secondary antenna source. c. other than an HDTV cable box. 1. Connecting a Cable Box IMPORTANT Additional connection cables are not provided with the TV. select the channel to which the TV must be tuned for your cable box. Connect the primary incoming coaxial lead cable to ANT 1/MAIN on the TV back panel. Wall Outlet Cable Figure 2. remove the CableCARD cover screws. 3. 4. These are not included with the TV. For antenna. They are available at most electronics stores. If you have subscribed to a CableCARD™ service. connect an antenna (or cable) to ANT 2/AUX. the CableCARD can now be inserted into the CableCARD SLOT. Additional CableCARD information is on page 84. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 1. AUDIO3. Insert the CableCARD. The changes are required to change the NetCommand cable-box default connection (Component-1) to the actual connection (ANT-2).

Connecting separate UHF and VHF Antennas Figure 3. Connecting a Single Antenna Mitsubishi strongly recommends you avoid using antennas with flat twin leads. Flat twin lead antenna wires are subject to interference which may adversely affect the performance of the TV. For cable or antenna with coaxial lead Connect the coaxial lead directly to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel.Connecting an Antenna with a Single Lead or Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads Antenna with a Single Lead (not for use with CableCARD™) Figure 3 2 For antennas with flat twin leads A 300-ohm-to-75-ohm transformer is required. connect the 300-ohm twin leads to the 300-ohm-to-75-ohm transformer. 2. AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) 2 2. Connecting . For an antenna with flat twin leads. Push the combiner onto ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel. This is not included with the TV. Figure 4. We recommend using coaxial antenna cable. 2 Chapter 2. but is available at most electronics stores. Connect the UHF and VHF antenna leads to the UHF/ VHF combiner. Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads 1. This is not included with the TV. but is available at most electronics stores. Push the 75-ohm side of the transformer onto ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel. 1. Figure 4 A UHF/VHF combiner is required.

. Connecting a VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable Chapter 2. connect only the white (left) cable. This connection also allows you to use the TV Guide On Screen® feature. Connecting 25 . S-Video is recommended. For NetCommand®-controlled recordings (including TV Guide On Screen). Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF splitter to ANTENNA IN on the VCR back panel. if available. Note: NetCommand® will assume your VCR is connected to inputs as shown on this page. in Chapter 3 for more information. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 5. 3. If your VCR is mono (nonstereo).Connecting a VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable Connecting VCR Audio and Video to the TV Figure 5 A two-way RF splitter. If you use any other inputs for your VCR or add a second VCR. 1. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. Connect the incoming cable or Antenna to IN on the RF splitter. 3 coaxial cables. 2. this change must match in the NetCommand system. and an S-video or video cable are required. Only one type of video cable should be connected. VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable (Audio & Video) 5. 7. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. Complete the NetCommand controlled recordings connections by connecting a Video cable from VIDEO IN on the VCR back panel to RECORD OUTPUT/VIDEO on the TV back panel. connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the VCR back panel to INPUT-1 AUDIO-LEFT (MONO) and AUDIORIGHT on the TV back panel. Connect either an S-Video or Video cable from VIDEO OUT on the VCR back panel to INPUT-1 VIDEO on the TV back panel. To use the TV speakers with the VCR. right and left audio cables. See Edit NetCommand. 6. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF splitter to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel.. 4. connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO IN on the VCR back panel to RECORD OUTPUT/AUDIO-LEFT and AUDIO-RIGHT on the TV back panel. These are not included with the TV but are available at most electronics stores.

Connecting . 1. however. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the cable box to ANTENNA IN on the VCR back panel. Note: With this connection configuration. right and left audio cables and an S-Video or Video cable are required. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. This connection also allows you to use the TV Guide On Screen® feature. To use the TV speakers with the VCR. Connect the incoming cable to IN on the RF splitter. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO IN on the VCR back panel to RECORD OUTPUT/AUDIOLEFT (MONO) and AUDIO-RIGHT on the TV back panel. VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) connects to the L (left) channel. For best picture quality. Connect either an S-Video or composite video cable from VIDEO OUT on the VCR back panel to INPUT 1 VIDEO on the TV back panel. If your VCR is mono (non-stereo). this change must match in the NetCommand system. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable 8. 5. 3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF splitter to ANT-1 MAIN on the TV back panel. 6. Connect only one type of video cable. connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the VCR back panel to INPUT-1 AUDIO-LEFT (MONO) and AUDIO-RIGHT on the TV back panel. in Chapter 3 for more information. always view live cable programs directly from the cable box instead of the VCR. For NetCommand®-controlled recordings (including TV Guide On Screen) a. Connecting a VCR to a Cable Box 26 Chapter 2. Figure 6. Connect one coaxial cable from ANTENNA OUT on the VCR back panel to ANT-2 AUX on the TV back panel (optional). S-Video is recommended.. 7. it is possible to view live cable programs through the VCR. If you use any other inputs for your VCR or add a second VCR. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Note: NetCommand® will assume your VCR is connected to inputs as shown on this page.Connecting a VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) Figure 6 A two-way RF splitter.. 4. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF splitter to ANTENNA IN on the cable box back panel. These are not included with the TV but are available at most electronics stores. 2. connect only the white (left) cable. See Edit NetCommand. 4 coaxial cables. b. if available. Connect a video cable from VIDEO IN on the VCR back panel to RECORD OUTPUT/VIDEO on the TV back panel.

2. Connect the other end to the COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT on the back of the A/V receiver. Note: Refer to the Satellite Receiver Owner’s Guide for Dish Antenna connections 2 INPUT 1 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) 1 YPbPr (480i/480p/720p/1080i) 2 COMPONENT 2 Y S-VIDEO A Pb 1 VIDEO Pr AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) AUDIORIGHT AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) AUDIORIGHT Figure 7.Connecting an A/V Receiver (Stereo System) Connecting a Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S -Video A/V Receiver (Stereo System) Figure 7 Most setups require either a digital audio cable or stereo audio cables. Satellite Receiver or Other Device with S-Video • • To connect an analog A/V receiver: Connect a set of stereo audio cables from AUDIO OUTPUT on the TV back panel to the TV AUDIO INPUT on the back of the A/V receiver. Connect an S-Video cable from VIDEO OUT on the satellite receiver back panel to INPUT-2 S-VIDEO on the TV back panel. you may need to connect both digital audio and stereo audio. DTV/CABLE/ VHF/UHF ANT 1 / MAIN ANT 2 / AUX DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CableCARD™ USE WITH ANT 1 CARD T Chapter 2. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the satellite receiver back panel to INPUT-2 AUDIO on the TV back panel. Stereo audio cables are not included. See Editing NetCommand Setup in Chapter 3 for more information. To hear these copy-protected signals through the A/V receiver. A digital audio cable is provided with the TV. 1. use the connections for an analog A/V receiver Check the A/V receiver’s Owner’s Guide for information concerning use of the digital input and switching between digital sound and analog stereo sound from the TV. an HDMI signal may be copyrestricted and cannot be output from the TV as a digital signal. MP3 audio from memory cards cannot be connected to digital audio. Figure 8 An S-Video cable and audio cables are required. Connecting an A/V receiver On rare occasions. To listen to MP3 playback from the TV memory card player through your A/V receiver. These are not included with the TV. To connect a digital A/V receiver with Dolby® Digital surround sound: Connect one end of the digital audio cable supplied with the TV to DIGITAL AUDIO on the back of the TV. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. use connections for analog A/V receivers. In some circumstances. Connecting 27 . Connecting a Satellite Receiver with S-Video IR EMITTER Net Command MON VIDEO AU 1 Note: NetCommand® assumes you connected your satellite receiver to Input-2. this change must match in the NetCommand system. If you add a second satellite receiver or use any other inputs for your satellite receiver. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. Figure 8.

and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. in order to view on-screen menus and select DVI as the ouput. See Edit NetCommand. NOTE: If you are using a DVI/HDMI adaptor. They may be available at your local electronics retailer. For digital audio connections to your A/V receiver. Connecting . 1. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 9. it is important to connect the adaptor to the DVI device for best performance. Connect the DVI-to-HDMI cable (recommended) or HDMI cable with DVI/HDMI adaptor from the DVI device’s back panel to the TV back panel. IMPORTANT See Appendix A for component video signal compatibility information. Figure 10 A DVI-to-HDMI cable or DVI/HDMI adaptor and HDMI cable and audio cables are required. Figure 10.. Please review your equipment instructions for DVI connectivity and compatibility. Some devices require connecting to an analog input first. NOTE: The HDMI connection supports copy protection (HDCP). These are not included with the TV. and the white cable connects to the L (left) channel. Connecting a DVD Player with Component Video Note: NetCommand® assumes you connected your DVD player to Component-2. Connect the Component Video cables from Y/Pr/ Pb VIDEO OUT on the back of the DVD player to COMPONENT-2 on the TV back panel. If you add a second DVD or use any other inputs for your DVD.. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel. The red cable connects to the R (right) channel. These are not included with the TV. matching the correct connection: • Y to Y (Green) • Pr to Pr (Red) • Pb to Pb (Blue) 2. DVD Player with Component Video DVI Device 1. Connecting a DVI Device 28 Chapter 2.Connecting a DVD Player with Component Video Connecting a DVI Device Figure 9 Component video cables and audio cables are required. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) 2. see your DVD player and A/V receiver Owner’s Guides. this change must be reflected in the NetCommand system. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the DVI device back panel to the INPUT/DVI Analog Audio on the TV back panel. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the back of the DVD player to COMPONENT-2 AUDIO Input on the TV back panel. in Chapter 3 for more information.

available at most electronic supply stores. Chapter 2. Connect L (left) and R (right) audio cables from the DTV receiver to Component-1 AUDIO on the TV back panel. Note: To receive the benefits of a digital A/V receiver. Connecting an External HDTV Receiver with Component Video Connections 3. Open the NetCommand Connection for [Device] screen (see page 48) to make the change. may be required to complete this installation). and audio cables are required. connect your cable box or satellite receiver’s digital audio out to a digital input on your digital A/V receiver. Connect RCA-type cables from the YPrPb outputs on the HDTV receiver to Component-1 on the TV back panel.Connecting an HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video Connecting an HDMI Device HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video Figure 11 A coaxial splitter. HDMI Device Figure 12 An HDMI-to-HDMI cable is required. 5. so no other connection is required. Connect the outside antenna. connect the digital audio output of the HDMI device directly to the A/V receiver. See your device’s owner’s guide for instructions and cable compatibility. you must change the input through NetCommand. HDTV Receiver to TV Back panel • Y to Y • Pr to Pr • Pb to Pb 4. Connect the incoming terrestrial antenna or cable (not satellite) to ANT-1 on the TV back panel (a coaxial splitter. cable. matching the correct connections: Figure 12. HDMI devices provide video and audio through this cable. Connecting 29 . These are not included with the TV. This is not included with the TV. It may be available at your local electronics retailer Connect an HDMI cable from the TV back panel to the HDMI device output. or satellite to ANT or SATELLITE IN on the cable box or satellite receiver. If you are using a satellite receiver. You can connect two HDMI devices to the TV back panel through the HDMI connections. 1. 2. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 11. RCA component video cables. Connecting an HDMI Device Note: To use the benefits of digital surround sound from the HDMI device. This connection is used by TV Guide On Screen® to download program listings.

When connected in this way.Connecting a MonitorLink™ Control/RS-232C Device MonitorLink Control/RS-232C Device Figure 13 A 9-pin RS-232C cable is required. This is not included with the TV.com for RS232C command protocols. it provides coordinated power on/off between the TV and the receiver/controller. RS-232C connection 30 Chapter 2. Connecting . you can connect to a Mitsubishi HD Receiver/Controller. It may be available at your local electronics retailer When used as an RS-232C port. AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 13. See mitsubish-tv. such as the HD-5000 or HD-6000. you can connect to other external controllers. When used for MonitorLink Control. Connect a 9-pin RS-232C cable from the TV back panel to the MonitorLink or RS232C jack on the external control device.

The remote control sensor is usually behind the plastic window of the front display panel. Connecting 31 . you can find it by following these steps using the device’s remote control: a. Secure the emitter ends in place using double-sided tape. Run the cable for each of the emitter ends under. c. alongside. It is sometimes visible when you look through the display plastic using a flashlight and is normally a round or square cutout behind the plastic. Position the emitter end with the emitter bulb facing the remote control sensor. Otherwise. DVD players. 2. Figure 14. Connect the plug end of the supplied IR emitter cable to either of the IR Emitter NetCommand jacks on the TV back panel. b. Some experimentation may be needed. press the POWER button. IR Emitter NetCommand® The NetCommand system uses emitters connected to these jacks to control other devices such as VCRs. IR emitters) may not respond at all. the emitter works better facing downward from the top of the device. d. cable boxes and satellite receivers. Place IR emitters so the signal can be “seen” by the IR sensor on each device. or over the top of each device to be controlled so that the emitter end is in front of the area where the remote control sensor is located. a device receiving signals from multiple sources (remote controls. 1. repeating until the device responds again. Hold the remote about one-half inch from the front of the device. • With some devices. Starting from one end of the display window plastic. • • IMPORTANT Position IR emitters so that each device’s sensor “sees” the signal from only one emitter. move the remote control one inch toward the center and try again. Chapter 2. If you cannot see the sensor and the device’s Owner’s Guide does not specify the location.Connecting the IR Emitter NetCommand® Figures 14 and 15 An IR emitter cable is included with the TV. 3. Repeat this until the device responds. If the device does not respond. The remote control sensor is somewhere between these two positions. Place the bulb far enough from the remote control sensor to allow the cone pattern to reach the sensor. The bulb emits infrared light in a cone-shaped pattern (see figure 15). This is usually enough accuracy for the placement of the IR emitters. Note this location and then start over from the other end of the display window plastic. Connecting IR Emitter NetCommand Figure 15. Place any unused ends behind the devices to prevent unnecessary signals from reaching the remote control sensors.

For example. There are two different connection styles that can be used when connecting IEEE 1394 devices. Hub Connection Style 6 pin to  pin adaptor Digital DVD #1 1394 Monitor S CH D I G I T A L Digital VCR #1 Digital VCR #3 TV Digital DVD #2 When connecting a 6-pin device (such as a camcorder) to the TV. and vice versa. The IEEE 1394 interface allows you to chain devices. These cables are available from electronic and computer stores. Each device can send information. (if it is designed to receive electrical power from another 6-pin device) you will need to connect the camcorder directly to the household AC. or simply use a 6pin connector without using the two additional pins. or receive electrical power from another device. Use the style that fits your network of audio/video products. This TV does not have 6-pin connectors. digital video signals. If this is not possible. Your TV has three 4-pin-type connection jacks available. SURROUND Other 1394 Device #1 Digital VCR #2 Other 1394 Device #2 32 Chapter 2. which may include audio and video. you need to obtain a 6-pin-to-4-pin adaptor or adaptor cable. Direct Device-To-Device Style  pin connector 6 pin connector Digital DVD TV Digital VCR The purpose of this low-voltage electrical power is to provide the needed operating power to a device that is not connected directly to the household AC power. and digital control signals back and forth between devices. unlike previous audio and video connections with which you had to individually connect each device directly to the TV. or use the camcorder’s battery for power. One is on the front panel and two are on the back. but the 6-pin connector can also send low-voltage electrical power. Connecting . 6-Pin-Style Connectors The 4-pin connector sends digital audio signals. There are two different types of connectors used for IEEE 1394 terminals and cables: a 4-pin and a 6-pin style. To connect a 6-pin device to a 4-pin device. The IEEE 1394 also offers you the capability to connect your devices using the TV as a hub within the audio/video network. You will be able to see each video device on the TV’s Device Selection Menu and send information from any IEEE 1394 device to other compatible devices.Connecting Compatible IEEE 139 Devices. A device with a 6-pin connector can send this electrical power to another device. and control signals as the 4-pin connector. then the camcorder will need to be connected directly to another 6-pin device in the network that can provide the electrical power. A 6-pin connector cannot be connected directly to a 4-pin jack. continued Connection Styles -Pin-Style vs. you can connect your D-VHS to your 1394 DVD Player and then connect the 1394 DVD Player to the TV. The resulting IEEE 1394 chain will allow you to add more devices to the chain. to any other device in the network. The 6-pin connector can send the same digital audio. video. such as a camcorder.

When the device chain is looped. Digital Audio Signals When received with video signals.Connecting Compatible IEEE 139 Devices Compatible A/V devices include some. Some devices may be a combination of two or more types of devices. This TV has a communication speed of S400. try S-video and analog audio connections instead. This TV is an IEEE 1394a device. tuners. try S-video and analog audio connections instead. • EIA-775 is designed for tuning devices such as cable boxes. If the TV is unable to decode the digital signal supplied by your camcorder. When you select a device on the Device Selection menu that has sub-units. or HDMI video. a popup menu will appear so you can select which sub-unit section you wish to use. especially older models. such as VCRs. cable boxes. For example. • • 3. make the slower device the source and make the faster device the recorder. Place devices with the slowest communication speed at the end of the chain. A/V Discs. however. IEEE 1394 signals may not be able to pass through the device to other devices. If your camcorder operates incorrectly or not at all. Sometimes the communication speed will be marked near the IEEE 1394 connector with an “S” number. For playback of incompatible DV camcorders. Devices with slow communication speed can interfere with IEEE 1394 signals from faster devices. When using NetCommand to set up a digital recording between a faster device and a slower device. This standard does not. such as PC video provided by some computers. the TV may not be able to work with the other devices. Record DV video on an IEEE 139 device designed to record DV video. 2. C. S-video. and volume. use the camcorder’s control buttons instead of the IEEE 1394 connection. Areas of compatibility to consider are: 1. Some DV Camcorder models are not compatible with this TV’s IEEE 139 system and the “New 139 Device” screen will not appear when the camcorder is connected. allowing the device to send simple graphics. It can be used with a 1394b system when an IEEE-1394a-to-1394b convertor is used. such as MP3 audio and DTS audio. TV Disc cannot record DV video. Other types of digital audio as provided by some digital recording devices. Digital Video Signals The TV is able to decode MPEG2 and DV video as provided by some camcorders. the TV is able to decode Dolby Digital signals and MPEG audio signals. • • Place devices that have only a mechanical (twoposition) power switch at the end of the chain or leave the power switch in the On position. It is also possible to connect devices to the TV that have IEEE 1394 connectors but are not compatible with the TV or with the NetCommand® control system. The higher the number. these signals may pass on the IEEE 1394 cable to other devices. A/V discs. and future products. The IEEE 1394 interface may not provide reliable control signals for some DV camcorders. there may be a recording device that is also a tuning device. Each portion of the device is called a sub-unit. When turned Off. AV/C (Audio Video Control) is designed to provide basic controls such as play. cable boxes and amplifiers that are compatible with the following IEEE 1394 control standards. stop. Digital Control Signal The TV can serve as the control center for IEEE 1394 audio/video devices. channel selection. it is normal for temporary audio and video distortion to occur under conditions such as: • Playback start and stop • Playback pause • Forward or reverse picture search B. the faster the communication speed. however. Compatible IEEE 139 Devices When Connecting IEEE 139 Devices • Do not loop the last device in the chain back to the TV. Connecting 33 . • IMPORTANT DV Camcorder Notes A. allow the TV to control the cable box by IEEE 1394. D-VHS VCRs. Do not use an IEEE 1394 cable over 15 feet in length between each device. cannot be decoded by the TV when received over IEEE 1394 The TV may not be able to pass incompatible digital audio signals on the coaxial digital audio output. Chapter 2. When viewing DV camcorders. but not all. must be decoded by the source device and sent to the TV as analog video. Other types of digital video. 1394b systems are capable of greater distances and multi-room applications. as appropriate for the device.

I occasionally need to see the menu from my A/V Receiver. Q. Use Edit NetCommand® to change the setup of this device. and from the Device Selection menu. with the A/V Receiver highlighted. In the Connection screen of “Change” make sure both audio and video for the TV input are check marked and the audio for the AVR input is not check marked. If your A/V Receiver has an Analog/Digital selection key on the front panel only. My VCR (or other device) does not have two sets of stereo audio outputs. How can I connect this device’s audio to both the TV and the A/V Receiver? A. you can use the GUIDE key with the following models to control switching: Mitsubishi M-VR900 Denon AVR-2700 Integra DTR-9. 3 Chapter 2. Q. On the “Connection” screen. Some small stick-on emitters from other manufacturers may be compatible with this TV’s IR Emitter jacks. and not on the remote. indicate which TV input was used and check mark the video box. press the Audio key. Then use Edit NetCommand to “Add” this as an “Other” device. We suggest that you connect stereo audio outputs with the S-video to the TV so that you do not need to use two inputs on the A/V Receiver. See Edit NetCommand in the next chapter for details. Refer to your A/V Receiver user’s guide to find out how analog/digital audio switching works. How can I connect it to the TV for this purpose? A. Q. Use tape to secure it in place. 1. I have both the TV stereo audio output and TV digital audio output connected to the same input designations on my A/V Receiver. There are several possible solutions. If this is a NetCommand compatible HDTV receiver and HD or SD outputs can be switched by remote control. so no switching is required. 2. You can connect the video output of the A/V Receiver to an unused input on the TV.1 Kenwood VR-2080 To make the switch. MP3 audio is only output in analog format. This will allow the NetCommand system to use the TV outputs to transfer the device’s audio to the A/V Receiver. use the TV’s learn function to learn the analog/digital audio code for the GUIDE key. Use double sided tape to secure it in place. so you must connect the TV’s analog AUDIO OUTPUT to the A/V Receiver if you want to hear MP3 audio through the A/V receiver. Mount the IR Emitter on the top. • • If you have some other A/V Receiver model.Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections Q. you may also need analog audio from the TV. Make sure the TV input audio box and both the audio and video boxes for the AVR input are not check marked. Connect the single set of stereo audio outputs to the TV only. Q. In most setups. then your only option is to use that key to perform switching. Yes. You should also name this device so you can easily identify it on the Device Selection Menu. analog audio is also output as digital audio. Then. In some circumstances. 3. press the Device key on the TV’s remote control. front edge of the A/V Receiver over the remote control sensor. not an A/V Receiver. Just add this unit once using the Component-1 and once using one of the S-video inputs. How do I switch between analog audio and digital audio? A. You can also use Input 3 on the front panel. These may be used instead of the supplied IR Emitters. The front panel of my A/V Receiver is too tall or too convex for the IR emitter signal to reach the remote control sensor of the A/V Receiver. • If your A/V Receiver’s remote control has an Analog/Digital Audio key. What can I do? A. Make sure you indicate that this is the same manufacturer for both. For example. press the GUIDE key to make the switch. I have a high definition receiver I would like to connect and it also has an S-video output I would like to be able use as well. see Edit NetCommand in the next chapter for NetCommand control of this feature. Mount the IR Emitter on the underside of the shelf above the A/V Receiver (if the A/V Receiver is in a cabinet). Connecting . this item will appear twice in the Device Selection Menu. Follow the instructions above for using the GUIDE key. Is there any way to connect this receiver both ways? A. and there is no need to connect the analog output. however.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Remote Control with NetCommand® NetCommand® Setup On-Screen Buttons. . . . . . . . Adding an A/V Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically . . . . . . . . 36 37 38 39 0 3 6 50 51 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing or Deleting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEEE 139 Devices and NetCommand® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Devices . . . . 3D Graphical Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetCommand® Initial Setup . . . . . . .Chapter 3 NetCommand® Setup and Editing NetCommand® Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

and a cable box. you can use the TV’s remote to control these devices. if you decide to use NetCommand. • NetCommand Helps You Manage Your Home Theater With the NetCommand Review screen you can: • view a summary of all devices connected to the TV and the input used for each device. 36 Chapter 3. ◊ provide seamless setup of time-delayed or immediate recordings among networked device. change channels and many more functions. such as the TV. Using NetCommand is completely optional When you first turn on the TV. ◊ want the ease and flexibility of NetCommand-controlled recording. with seamless setup of time-delayed or immediate recordings among networked devices. change inputs. NetCommand and Levels of Control When you set up NetCommand. NetCommand® also includes the capability of controlling IEEE 1394 devices by sending control signals on a FireWire® cable. • delete devices you have disconnected. If you decide to use NetCommand. After performing this setup. NetCommand Setup and Editing . Note that with a basic setup. With this setup. simply quit the Setup Wizard and NetCommand will remain inactive. the NetCommand sub-menu lets you easily • add new devices. • Limited Setup In a limited setup. adjust volume. limited. If you choose not to use it right away. or complete NetCommand setup. If you need to change your setup. follow the on-screen instructions. ◊ automatically change input selections for the A/V receiver. you decide how much control you want the TV to have over your home theater system. ◊ want to use TV Guide On Screen® to control your cable box and VCR and/or A/V disc. the TV sends signals to the other devices in the system via the IR emitters. All of this is accomplished with one remote control and without changing control layers. the NetCommand Setup Wizard launches. you still need to use the remote control specific to each device. Later. With NetCommand. Use this type of setup if you: ◊ only want NetCommand to control a few devices. telling the devices to play. a playback device (like a DVD player). • change device and input selections.NetCommand® Introduction NetCommand makes your TV the heart of your Home Theater NetCommand® is an intelligent control system that makes your Mitsubishi TV the heart of your home theater. you can use the TV’s remote to control these devices. • Basic Setup In a basic setup. • deactivate or turn off unused input connections. Unused inputs are automatically deactivated so that you don’t see them in the menu. ◊ control all devices with the TV’s remote. you can easily access the Setup Wizard. You have the choice of performing a basic. record. you get the benefits of the basic setup plus NetCommand control over the specific devices you have chosen. Full Setup Perform a full setup if you want NetCommand to: ◊ control a surround sound A/V receiver. NetCommand will: ◊ automatically switch to the correct TV input when you want to view programming from a different device. IR Learning and IEEE 139 Support The IR “Learning” feature of NetCommand allows the TV to learn the remote control signals for new devices that the TV is not preprogrammed to operate. then reactivate or turn them on when needed. All you do is select the device from the on-screen device selection menu. This saves you from having to search for the correct input every time you want to change devices. including the A/V receiver. ◊ show an on-screen icon for each device connected to the TV so you always know what devices are available.

or program the TV remote to operate these devices in the traditional manner. Bright light near the TV screen can also adversely affect the learning feature. NOTE: There are many different types of remotes and not all of them may be compatible with the learning feature. NetCommand may be able to operate additional models. See the Edit NetCommand section of this Guide.1 Not specified XV-S65GD VR2080 SR8200 XBox™ (requires the DVD kit from Microsoft) DCT2244 TU-HDS20 VSX-D557. The NetCommand Learning feature is able to learn the remote control signals of most audio/video devices. NetCommand Pre-Memorized Devices DEVICE A/V receiver Mitsubishi Bose Denon Echostar Funai General Instruments Hitachi Hughes Integra Jerrold JVC Kenwood Marantz Microsoft Motorola Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Rotel Scientific Atlanta Sharp Sony RSX-1065 8600 STR-DE825 SAT-A55 DVP-S500D. HS-U778 M A N U F A C T U R E R 6000 F260LA CFT2200 DV-P415U HIRD-E45. DD-8020 Lifestyle® 28 VCR HS-U795. use the learning feature by selecting “Other” at the [Device] screen.Using the Remote Control with NetCommand® Below is a list of several manufacturers’ devices tested and shown to be compatible with NetCommand. RX-V2200 DTV1080 W-717 Chapter 3. These devices can be controlled without changing the setting of the remote control from TV to another product. VSX-49TX DRD480RE. If it is not possible to learn a device. This chart lists only the models that have been tested with NetCommand. DVD Player software disc version 2. DVD-C996 VC-H810U SLV-778HF M-VR800.10) SD-9200. DTC-100 DVD-A310 DV-414 PV-8662 VR620CAT HR-VP 650U DPS-9. or if your device does not operate using the same remote control as the models listed below.1 VT-FX665A Toshiba Yamaha Zenith DTS-3000 RX-V2095. NetCommand Setup and Editing 37 . you will need to use the original remote control of the device. SD-5109 DVD-S520. For devices not listed in the table. HIRD-E86 DTR-9. M-VR900 Lifestyle® 28 AVR-2700 Cable Box SAT Satellite Receiver SR-HD5 DVD Player DD-6000. since many manufacturers use the same control signals to operate some or all of the models they offer. PlayStation® 2 (Playstation® 2 requires the DVD Remote Controller kit from Sony.

The buttons described below will help you navigate the screens. You may change those inputs or names using the Edit NetCommand or Learn screens. When viewing the Review screen. you need to provide some detailed information during the setup of your Mitsubishi TV. and the names for the device are pre-set during Initial NetCommand setup. you can set up NetCommand later by selecting the NetCommand menu. you will use graphic buttons to navigate through the NetCommand Setup screen. You must define the manufacturer of the devices that are connected to the television. the input to the TV and A/V receiver. NetCommand will prompt you to confirm that you want to cancel the changes you are currently making. 38 Chapter 3. Press ENTER when the check box is highlighted to add or delete a check mark. Radio Buttons The Cancel button will cancel out any changes you are currently making without saving them into memory. NetCommand Setup and Editing . or connected to the TV. The setting changes when one of the choices is highlighted. a check box reflects which devices are turned On or Off. For each device. the ADJUST or buttons allow you to navigate left and right to different selections on the screen. Cancel Button Check marks indicate the item or input is added or turned On. When you select the Cancel key. The ADJUST or buttons allow you to: • Change the radio button • Change current text box selection • Navigate up and down on the screen The ENTER button allows you to: • Confirm the selected character when naming a device • Add or delete check marks in check boxes • Select on-screen buttons to change screens Text Box Control Buttons Much like the software on your computer. then choosing Initial. Use the Next> button to navigate forward to the next screen. Highlight the button and press ENTER to select the function. or learn the IR code remote control signals for the device connected.NetCommand® Setup On-Screen Buttons To use the TV’s NetCommand feature. If you select Cancel during Initial Setup. Next> Button Press ADJUST Check Box or to make a selection. On your remote control. <Back Button Use the <Back button to navigate back to the previous screen.

5. or select a check box. using the TV’s remote control. On-screen instructions. ADJUST 3. if available. You can also access sub-menus from a button. TV MENU to display the main menu or move back one menu screen at a time. 6. which provides on-screen information for menu choices and changes. Other boxes allow you to select letters. start an automatic function. 4. Chapter 3. CANCEL to clear a setting or stop an automatic function. • • Main Menu: This screen is always the first to appear when you press the remote’s TV MENU button. ADJUST change. The currently selected icon or button is highlighted with a yellow outline. Sometimes when you select a button. HOME to exit all menus and return to TV viewing. an automatic function begins. The features: • system includes the following special Remote Control Buttons The following buttons on your remote control help you navigate within the system: 1. ENTER to open a menu. 2. Press ADJUST or to change text boxes. shown in the message line at the bottom of the menu. Some text boxes have preset labels. numbers or characters to customize names. provide feature selection and adjustment information. Some on-screen menu options must be set before other options are available. You may then make changes within the menu or access sub-menus. or or to select the menu item you want to to change the settings. the text color is yellow. NetCommand Setup and Editing 39 .3D Graphical Menu System Your TV also has Mitsubishi’s exclusive 3D Graphical on-screen operating system. Menu Screens A picture (icon) is highlighted on the menu screen when selected with the ADJUST arrows.

2. The TV Guide On Screen system is set up from the NetCommand menu. Selecting Cancel at this screen will cause the default language (English) to be selected. To set up at a later time. 0 Chapter 3. you can restart the NetCommand setup from the Setup Reminder screen (see page 42) or by doing the following: 1. Select NetCommand. the NetCommand Welcome screen displays and asks you to select either English or Spanish as the language for the on-screen menus. When you first turn on your TV. If the NetCommand Setup is cancelled before it’s completed. The Device Setup screen (shown on the next page) displays. Welcome screen IMPORTANT You may use your TV without setting up NetCommand or the TV Guide On Screen® system. select Setup in the Main Menu. NetCommand Setup and Editing . Press ADJUST to select Initial. Press TV MENU on the remote control to display the TV Main menu. then select Initial. This screen displays automatically the first time you power On your new TV. The available options will be Add. Most IR remote control signal formats can be learned by NetCommand. Figure 1. Press ENTER. To change Language later. 4. choose the NetCommand menu from the Main menu. Change and Delete will be grayed out. NetCommand (Information) Screen Figure 2 Welcome Screen Figure 1 The NetCommand (Information) Screen describes how to start or delay the initial NetCommand and TV Guide On Screen setup. Review.NetCommand® Initial Setup The initial setup screens that appear when you first power on your new Mitsubishi TV guide you through setup of NetCommand and the TV Guide On Screen® system. Guide or Initial. Figure 2. after the Welcome screen. Information screen Select Next> and press ENTER to start the initial setup. The default language is English. 3.

but will reserve the front input to use with the camcorder. select “None”. Later. you have multiple cable sources. if so. please see the separate TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual. which devices to include. continued Device Setup Screen Figure 3 TV Guide On Screen® System Setup Figure 4 If the devices connected to the TV are already in NetCommand memory. Press ADJUST or to move to each device type. Check the PC box if you have a PC connected. If your cable box is connected using HDMI or IEEE-1394. If this is not possible. however.NetCommand® Initial Setup. Figure 4. If your cable box is connected to a Component input. If One Source Is: Cable Box Cable Card Ant-1 Channels via Cable Ant-2 Channels via Cable N/A N/A N/A The Other Source Can Be: Ant-1 Air Ant-2 Air For detailed information on using the TV Guide On Screen system. Select “None” for device types that are not connected. TV Guide On Screen Note: • Inputs to TV Guide On Screen can include: Only one over-the-air source Only one cable source • An antenna input is required for downloading TV Guide On Screen schedules. IMPORTANT NetCommand must be set up and the IR emitters properly placed for your cable box and VCR so the TV Guide On Screen system can control these devices. The TV Guide On Screen option allows you to select whether you want to enable the TV Guide On Screen system and. check the Camcorder box. For the A/V Receiver. you can quickly select them at this screen. Figure 3. you must also connect an antenna input. You can select one over-the-air source and one cable source for TV Guide On Screen. the channel-number assignments may not match up correctly. If. Later. If you have a camcorder connected. NetCommand Setup and Editing 1 . NetCommand will not be able to control it. To receive the correct program listings for your area. you can direct the TV to “Learn” the connected device by following the Edit NetCommand instructions. you cannot select “Other. you can use the “Add” feature in the NetCommand menu to have the TV add and learn the remote control signals for this device. After completing your choices. Device Setup screen Note: If you selected “Other” for any of the device names. add an antenna input. if the manufacturer is not listed. Press ADJUST or to select the manufacturer. For many device types. Select “Other” if the manufacturer is not listed. non-listed models will operate in the same way as the listed models and you can still use the pre-loaded setting. select Next> and press ENTER. See the table below for the preferred connection combinations.” Instead. you will need to enter your five-digit ZIP code. you can use the Change setting in the Edit NetCommand menu to learn the remote control signals for this device. be sure the box is set to send analog channels as 480i. • Chapter 3.

the Review Screen will display. all selections made are finalized. or if you would like to change the name of a device. you can use <Back to return to the Device Setup screen to make changes. NetCommand Setup and Editing . If you want to set up NetCommand and/or the TV Guide On Screen system. Figure 7. or add devices not in the pre-configured setup. The Setup Reminder screen displays the next six times you power on the TV if you do not perform setup. select Finish from the Finish screen. adding or deleting check marks will turn the adjacent devices or inputs On or Off.NetCommand® Initial Setup. If you have not connected your devices. It is important to review the settings to ensure that they are correct. select Edit to add the AVR and then assign all devices to new AVR inputs. select Next and press ENTER. Finish screen It may still be necessary to memorize the available channels for Antenna-1 (and Antenna-2. Review screen Note: The Review screen lists the TV input and A/V receiver input used with each device. Setup Reminder screen 2 Chapter 3. select Cancel and press ENTER. Note: If you select Next> on the Review screen. Finish Screen Figure 6 To complete the NetCommand setup. If you cannot use these inputs. Setup Reminder Figure 7 This screen only appears if you did not set up NetCommand when the TV was first turned on. select Edit to display Edit NetCommand menu. You must correctly identify the inputs you used when you connected the devices. if used). Figure 6. write down these inputs as a guide. On the Review screen. If necessary. 1394 device names only appear on the Review screen when the devices are connected to the TV. Figure 5. You may do that by going to the TV Main menu and selecting Setup. use the instructions in Edit NetCommand to make necessary changes. If you wish to change any of the pre-configured inputs or names for the devices. If your A/V receiver was not listed. Instructions to memorize channels are found in the Setup menu section. If you do not wish to perform setup. continued Setup Reminder Review Screen Figure 5 After you have made your device choices.

• IMPORTANT To make changes to the A/V receiver setup. Audio Output to AVR screen (Figure 13). this screen will not appear again. The model number optimized for NetCommand will display at the bottom of the screen. NetCommand Setup and Editing 3 . A/V Receiver Input Learn screen (Figure 10). NetCommand will not be able to control this device. select NetCommand. Audio Output to AVR screen (Figure 13).Edit NetCommand®: Adding an A/V Receiver A/V Receiver Screen Figure 8 If your A/V Receiver manufacturer was not listed. the screens that follow are: the A/V Receiver Input screen (Figure 9). Figure 9. first ensure that the current audio source is the TV speakers. When the New Device screen displays (see figure 16). Name screen (Figure 12). A/V Receiver Inputs Figure 9 Figure 8. Select “Other. Later you may use the “Change” option in the NetCommand menu to learn the remote control signals. the screens that follow are: the A/V receiver Inputs screen (Figure 9). A/V Receiver Learn screen (Figure 11). ending with the Finish screen (Figure 14). For many device types. This will allow you to have NetCommand learn the remote control signals of this new device. Chapter 3. Name screen (Figure 12). ending with the Finish screen (Figure 14). ending with the Finish screen (Figure 14). Highlight Add and press ENTER. Press the DEVICE key to verify the current audio source. Highlight Next and press ENTER to open the A/V Receiver screen (figure 8). However. this indicates additional models are optimized for that manufacturer. After selecting the number of inputs. non-listed models will operate in the same way as the listed models and you can still use the pre-loaded setting. After selecting “Learn” and pressing ENTER. • If you are in the Finish screen for initial setup. Audio Output to AVR screen (Figure 13). Next open the Main menu. After selecting Next>. • Select “Other.” you will see the A/V Receiver Input screen. • If you have already finished initial setup. press ADJUST or until you see A/V Receiver as the device type. (example: Mitsubishi 1). If a number follows the manufacturer’s name.” then highlight “Learn” and press ENTER. To change. A/V receiver Input screen If you select “Other” as the manufacturer and then “Learn. you may add the A/V Receiver and have NetCommand learn its remote control’s functions. then press ENTER. select Edit.” skip Learn and select Next>. A/V Receiver screen Choose ONE of these options: • Select a recognized manufacturer. This will allow the device to appear and will allow NetCommand to switch inputs to use this device. The Edit NetCommand screen will display. the screens that follow are: the Name Screen (Figure 12). After selecting Next>. change the audio source to TV speakers. and you selected “None” during the initial NetCommand setup. press the AUDIO key to acess the audio section and change the source.

2. The A/V receiver will perform the selected function. 8. A check mark will appear and the function name will stop flashing. A check mark will appear and the function name will stop flashing.Edit NetCommand®: Adding an A/V Receiver. To test the learned command. Press ADJUST or on the TV remote to select the check box for each function to be learned. and should match the names the A/V receiver shows in its own display. 5. 7. This confirms the signal learned status. Repeat for each function to be learned. The A/V receiver needs to be turned on and the IR emitters properly placed for the test to be successful (see page 31 for IR emitter placement). press ADJUST to move to the Input Name text box and then press ADJUST or and ENTER to select each letter of the name. 6. 5. 4. To customize the input names. press ADJUST to select Next> and move to the A/V receiver Learn screen. you may connect up to seven A/V inputs. Repeat for each connected input. highlight the check box for that input and press CANCEL. 6. 1. 7. press ENTER on the TV remote. The A/V receiver will perform the selected function. To erase a learned function. Figure 11. This confirms the signal learned status. A/V Receiver (AVR) Input Learn Screen Figure 10 A/V Receiver (AVR) Learn Screen Figure 11 1. 3. point the device’s remote at the TV screen  Chapter 3. 4. you will need to delete the A/V receiver through Edit NetCommand and add it again. Select the number of inputs by pressing ADJUST or . highlight the check box for that function and press CANCEL. 3. NetCommand Setup and Editing . The A/V receiver needs to be turned on and the IR emitters properly placed for the test to be successful (see page 31 for IR emitter placement). To erase the learned input signal. Figure 10. When the input selection signals have been learned and the inputs named. A/V receiver Input Learn screen NetCommand can now learn the remote control signals used to select each input on the A/V receiver. Press ADJUST or on the TV remote to select the check box for each function to be learned. Press the button on the A/V receiver’s remote control that corresponds to the selected function. These names will appear on the Review screen as the A/V receiver’s input names. 2. When the function signals have been learned. Press ENTER and the function name will begin to flash to confirm the ready-to-learn status. continued Depending on your A/V Receiver’s capability. Press ENTER and the function name will begin to flash to confirm the ready-to-learn status. If the number of connected inputs changes. Press the button on the A/V receiver’s remote control that corresponds to the selected function. press ENTER on the TV remote. as described above. A/V receiver Learn screen IMPORTANT When learning remote control signals. To test the learned command. press ADJUST to select Next> and move to the Name screen.

you must use the “Change” function of the Edit NetCommand menu and select each device to assign the correct A/V Receiver input to be used with each device. Figure 13. Press ADJUST to select Next> and move to the Finish screen. selecting from letters. Press CANCEL to delete the current letter and move back one character position. To change. Finish screen Figure 12. the CANCEL button will return the name to the default name. Note: If you connected the audio output of other devices directly to the A/V Receiver. press ADJUST or to select each letter. Audio Output to AVR screen Chapter 3. Figure 14. Using the TV’s remote. press the AUDIO key to acess the audio selection window. To finalize your selections and complete the A/V receiver setup. continued Name Screen Figure 12 Finish Screen Figure 14 The Name screen allows you to change the default name for the A/V receiver to a custom name of up to eight characters (including a blank space). Press the DEVICE key to verify the current audio source. then press ENTER to move to the next position. When in the first position. first ensure that the current audio source is the TV speakers. select Edit to display the Edit NetCommand menu.Edit NetCommand®: Adding an A/V Receiver. Note: To change any of the inputs or names for the devices. select Finish from the Finish screen. IMPORTANT To make changes to the A/V receiver setup. and nine different characters. NetCommand Setup and Editing 5 . or add devices not included in the initial settings. Name screen Audio Output to AVR Screen Figure 13 Use this screen to select which A/V Receiver input is connected to AUDIO OUTPUT on the TV back panel. numbers.

You may add your A/V receiver (if not added in Initial setup). numbers 0-9. See Figure 5. NetCommand Setup and Editing . See Figure 26. and the New Device screen will display. Edit NetCommand Screen Figure 15 New Device Screen Figure 16 If you selected Edit when you were at the Finish screen. Change Change the brand/model. delete devices and learn remote control IR signals not already in NetCommand memory. choose the manufacturer. Guide Edit TV Guide On Screen® ZIP code and input selections. For device types Laser Disc. Game and PC. DVD. SAT. Cable Box. you can keep the default Name or select a custom Name for the device. Camcorder. and/or symbols (!. or if NetCommand was not set up when the TV was first powered On. Delete Remove a device or erase the complete NetCommand home theater configuration. including the A/V receiver. Select the Device type that you would like to add. “Learn” the remote control signals of devices listed as “Other” brands. New Device screen Figure 15. the device (A/V receiver. SAT (satellite). DVD or VCR) can be learned. At the next screen. See Figure 16. Select “Add” from the Edit NetCommand screen. This is also where you can turn On or Off unused TV inputs or devices. Cable. Laser Disc. Initial Start the setup at the beginning. using ADJUST or to select letters A–Z. input connections. If you choose “Other” for the manufacturer. PC and VCR. See the separate TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for more information about customizing the Guide. This button only becomes available after deleting the complete configuration. Camcorder. See Figure 2.and blank) for each character of the name you would like for the selected channel. There is no NetCommand support or learning for these devices. Edit NetCommand screen 6 Chapter 3. At the next screen. “Learn” the remote control signals of devices listed as “Other” brands. Review View a list of all devices and input connections in the NetCommand home theater configuration. See Figure 25.&’/:*. or name of a device already listed in the configuration.Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices Mitsubishi’s NetCommand allows you to edit your home theater configuration. the “Learn” screen is skipped. the Edit NetCommand screen displays. change device settings and connections. The learned remote control signals are erased when the associated device is deleted. See Figure 4. Figure 16. You can add new devices. Your choices are: Add Add a new device to the NetCommand setup.

Hint: If the device’s remote control uses a single button for both Power On and Power Off. Name screen (Figure 20). This screen also opens when you select the Change option in the Edit NetCommand screen. However. you can later select the Add option and add a device with this screen. The model number optimized for NetCommand will display at the bottom of the screen. This confirms the signal learned status. The device needs to be turned on and the IR emitters properly placed for the test to be successful (see page 31 for IR emitter placement). press ADJUST to select Next> and move to the [Device] Advanced Learn screen. To erase a learned function. NetCommand will not be able to control this device. 2. [Device] Advanced Learn screen (Figure 19). press the ENTER button on the TV remote while the learned function is still highlighted. highlight the check box for that function and press CANCEL. If a number follows the manufacturer’s name. 5. 4. This will allow the device to appear and will allow NetCommand to switch inputs to use this device. The sample screens here show the choices for adding a VCR. don’t learn the Power Off function. [Device] screen Choose ONE of these options: • Select a recognized manufacturer. Connection screen (Figure 21) and specialized device screens (Figures 22-24). the screens that follow are: [Device] Learn screen (Figure 18). point the device’s remote control at the TV screen. non-listed models will operate in the same way as the listed models and you can still use the pre-loaded setting. or cable box. Repeat for each function to be learned.” skip Learn and select Next>. Press ADJUST to select the check box for each function to be learned. ending with the Finish screen (Figure 27). Hint: The cable box and satellite receiver learn screens include PVR functions. When the function signals have been learned. the screens that follow are: the Name Screen (Figure 20). Chapter 3. similar screens will appear for any satellite receiver. Press the button on the device’s remote control that corresponds to the selected function. the screens that follow are: the Name Screen (Figure 20). (example: Mitsubishi 1). For many device types. (Figure 21) and specialized device screens (Figures 22-24). After selecting “Learn” and pressing ENTER. • Select “Other. A check mark will appear and the function name will stop flashing. Press ENTER and the function name will begin to flash to confirm the ready-to-learn status. 3. This will allow you to have NetCommand learn the remote control signals of this new device. • Select “Other. After selecting Next>. 7. [Device] Learn Screen Figure 18 Shown only if “Learn” was selected 1. this indicates additional models are optimized for that manufacturer.Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices.” then highlight “Learn” and press ENTER. Connection screen (Figure 21) and specialized device screens (Figures 22-24). ending with the Finish screen (Figure 27). Later you may use the “Change” option in the Setup menu to learn the remote control signals. DVD player. NOTE: When learning the device’s remote control signals. Figure 17. Connection screen. continued [Device] Screen Figure 17 If you selected “None” for a device type during initial setup. NetCommand Setup and Editing 7 . 6. To test the learned command. The device should perform the selected function. ending with the Finish screen (Figure 27). After selecting Next>.

Press Figure 21. [Device] Advanced Learn screen Name Screen Figure 20 The Name screen allows you to change the default name for each device to a custom name of up to eight characters (including a blank space). The A/V receiver may need configuring for digital audio. When in the first position. selecting from letters. For best video quality. continued ADJUST or to select each letter. Figure 19. make only audio connections to the A/V receiver and avoid routing video signals through the unit. Most common IR remote control signal formats can be learned by NetCommand. numbers and nine different characters. You only need to learn the functions your devices respond to and can ignore the functions that do not apply to your device. • To hear the device’s audio through the TV speakers. Name screen Connection for [Device] Screen Figure 21 Select the TV and A/V receiver inputs to which the device is connected. check the Audio box in the AVR section. the [Device] Advanced Learn screen allows you to learn any special keys for your device.Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices. Press CANCEL on the remote to delete the current letter and move back one character position. check the Audio box in the TV Input section of the screen. Figure 20. Connection for [Device] screen 8 Chapter 3. • To hear the device’s audio through the A/V receiver. [Device] Learn screen [Device] Advanced Learn Screen Figure 19 After learning the basic device keys. Figure 18. then press ENTER to move to the next position. A table of specialized device keys is shown in Appendix B. NetCommand Setup and Editing . the CANCEL button will return the name to the default name.

they are not required. 004. RF Connection for Cable Screen Figure 23 Use the RF Connection for Cable screen to enable the TV’s remote control to change channels on the cable box and to enable VCR recording from the cable box. If your cable box is connected using audio/video or component cables. If your cable box is connected to a TV antenna input. you can now change channels on the cable box using the TV’s remote control. 005). If the cable box is also connected to a VCR for recording. check the RF check box. which outputs analog signals converted from digital. IR Code for [Device] screen Chapter 3. You can specify the IR setting for the new device. Figure 23. If they do not display automatically on screen. This screen displays only when adding or changing a cable box. to allow selection of the TV input used with the cable box. VCR for Recordings Screen Figure 22 Select the VCR to use for making analog recordings through NetCommand or the TV Guide On Screen® system. VCR for Recordings screen This screen only displays if an added device has the same IR code as a previously added device of the same type and manufacturer. continued The screens described below may not be necessary for your device setup. Then the next screen will be Connection (Figure 21). make sure the RF check box is unchecked. select that VCR. For example. NetCommand Setup and Editing 9 . The VCR inputs must be connected to RECORD OUT on the TV. Select the TV antenna input that is used with the cable box. Select the channel number used for output by your cable box from the choices listed (003. if the primary Mitsubishi VCR is using the VCR-A IR code.Edit NetCommand®: Adding Devices. RF Connection for Cable screen IR Code for [Device] Screen Figure 24 Figure 22. for the second Mitsubishi VCR you can specify the IR Code setting to VCR-B. Figure 24.

Press the DEVICE key and select a different input device from the Device Selection menu. you must first switch the TV to a different input device. Figure 25. To delete a device or change connections for a device (like a VCR or a DVD player). After you have chosen the device. the Initial button becomes available on the Edit NetCommand screen. not type. Press the DEVICE key to verify the current audio source. If “Other” was selected for the manufacturer then you can also “Learn. select Edit to display the Edit NetCommand menu. or the entire configuration. Delete screen 50 Chapter 3. If you delete a device that you learned the remote control signals for the learned signals are erased. To change a device. Change screen Figure 27. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT NetCommand must be set up and the IR emitters properly placed for your cable box and VCR so the TV Guide On Screen system can control these devices. first ensure that the current audio source is the TV speakers. To change. press the AUDIO key to acess the audio selection window.Edit NetCommand®: Changing or Deleting Devices Change Device Screen Figure 25 Finish Screen Figure 27 Selecting Change from the Setup menu screen displays the Change screen. NetCommand Setup and Editing . or add devices not included in the initial settings. You can choose to delete a single device by selecting the device you would like to delete. Finish screen Delete Device Screen Figure 26 Selecting Delete from the Setup menu displays the Delete screen. select the device by name. If you select the Entire Configuration. Figure 26. To make changes to the A/V receiver setup. you will be prompted to confirm your choice to delete. select Finish from the Finish screen. To finalize your selections and complete the NetCommand setup. You can change the name or input connections to the TV and A/V receiver. or you can delete the entire NetCommand configuration. Note: To change any of the inputs or names for the devices.” The rest of the screens that follow are the same as when you Add a device.

page 52) use ADJUST and ENTER to check mark the Analog Connection box. the GUIDE function will require pressing GUIDE twice. The Connection screen (Figure 32. the Learning feature of NetCommand can be used. Select “Other” as a manufacturer and then highlight “Learn” and press Next (Figure 31. page 53) follows the learning screens. This will allow NetCommand to use the learned remote control signal to control these IEEE 1394 devices. The second press will display the program guide for the device if an IEEE 1394 Guide is available. select the correct inputs. 2. Some IEEE 1394 devices. such as cable boxes or satellite receivers. If desired. If only digital connections are used. If analog connections are used. Select the device type on the IEEE 1394 Device Type screen (Figure 30. will not have compatible digital control signals or require the use of the device’s own remote control. video and/or control information will still be able to pass from one device through the TV to another device on the network. Some of these IEEE 1394 devices will not display on-screen information through the IEEE 1394 connection and will require using an analog connection for on-screen displays. 3. 8. NetCommand Setup and Editing 51 . In many cases. page 48). 6. Incompatible digital audio. 5. using the ADJUST buttons enter a custom Name on the Name screen (Figure 20. These incompatible devices may not appear on the Device Selection menu or in the Review screen of the Edit NetCommand menu. page 53) of SAT or similar tuning device 4. NetCommand Control of Digital Devices Using the “Learn” Feature.IEEE 139 Devices and NetCommand® Control See pages 32 and 33 for information regarding compatible IEEE 1394 devices and connection styles. Proceed with the Finish screen. Chapter 3. 1. The first press of GUIDE will display the TV’s digital channel guide. Follow the device learning instructions found on the screen(s) or in the Edit NetCommand section of Chapter 3. Place an IR Emitter for NetCommand in front of the device’s remote control sensor (see IR Emitters. page 53). The TV is not able to control IEEE 1394 devices that use other types of control protocols. Note: When using the NetCommand learning feature for IEEE 1394 devices that do not have analog connections. On the Name for 1394 Device screen (Figure 29. page 31). do not check the video or audio boxes. 7. to control these digital devices. At the Device screen.

such as personal computers (PCs). for example. you may not want to add that device to the TV’s Device Selection menu. Note: You never need to check both the DV and Analog Connection check boxes for a device. the new device automatically announces its presence. If your camcorder uses DV formatting but the box is unchecked. the Name for 1394 Device screen appears. Figure 29. To use the analog capability of some IEEE 1394 devices. The DV option applies only to digital camcorders at this time and is typically detected automatically by the TV. If the IEEE 1394 device does not provide audio and video. Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically Name for 139 Device Screen Figure 29 If you choose to add the discovered IEEE 1394 device. use the remote control that came with the device. You review. NetCommand Setup and Editing . This allows you to play analog rental tapes or analog tapes from your established library or to make analog recordings from an antenna or cable system. Enter a new name for the device or use the default name that appears automatically. the New 1394 Device screen appears. Some non-audio/video or incompatible IEEE 1394 devices. Select “Add” or “Do Not Add” depending on whether or not you want the device added to the Device Selection menu. edit. This process is called device discovery and can take up to one minute. When you connect an IEEE 1394 device to the TV network and power it on. • Some cable boxes with IEEE 1394 connections require an analog connection for on-screen guides and emergency notices. The TV is not able to show these devices in the Device Selection menu. • Some DVCRs. however. Devices that were discovered but not added to the Device Selection menu will still be listed in the Review screen of the Edit NetCommand® menu. Name for 1394 Device screen Figure 28. coexist and are still available to other devices on the IEEE 1394 network that are compatible with these non-audio/video devices. can record and play as VHS or S-VHS in addition to D-VHS. They can. may not announce their presence to the TV.Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically Addition of IEEE 1394 devices is a special case of NetCommand setup because the devices are detected automatically. and delete these devices through NetCommand just as you would any other devices. such as some DVCRs and cable boxes. add the check mark manually. Try using the Cable/SAT/DTV position of the TV remote control to see if it can control operation of IEEE 1394 cable boxes and satellite receivers. The name used in this screen is the name that appears in the Device Selection menu. check the Analog Connection box. If not. New 139 Device Screen Figure 28 When your TV discovers a new IEEE 1394 device. New 1394 Device screen 52 Chapter 3.

In this case. With this setup. then you may be able to control this device while it is operating as an analog VCR. select “Other” and use the Learn screens Be sure to place an IR Emitter in front of the remote control sensor. then the Device screen is displayed so the manufacturer can be selected. For example. you will need to define the device type. If the manufacturer is not listed. such as a VCR. You may also select the TV or A/V receiver input you used when you connected the stereo audio cables. Select the type of device. even though you must use the video or S-video cable for the picture. select Finish from the Finish screen. and you have selected an analog connection as a second connection. continued IEEE 139 Device Type Screen Figures 30 and 31 Connection Screen Figure 32 If the new IEEE 1394 device is also connected using analog inputs. It is necessary to use the IR Emitter only when the DVCR is being used as an S-VHS or VHS VCR. just as you have done for other NetCommand® devices. Figure 32. When the DVCR is playing or recording digital signals in D-VHS. Select the TV input that you used when you connected the video or S-Video cables. when you select the device. The playback and record control of some devices may still operate via the IEEE 1394 cable automatically. be sure to select analog (not digital) from the pop-up that opens when the device is selected from the Device Selection menu. Figure 30. Device screen Figure 33. the picture is shown via the analog connection but control is through the IEEE 1394 connection. NetCommand Setup and Editing 53 . Finish screen Chapter 3. IEEE 1394 Device Type screen Once the device type is selected. Figure 31. the TV will control the VCR through the IEEE 1394 cable. If the manufacturer is listed. then you will select Mitsubishi for the manufacturer. if the IEEE 1394 device you have added is a Mitsubishi DVCR.Adding IEEE 139 Devices Automatically. Connection screen Finish Screen Figure 33 To finalize your selections and complete the NetCommand setup.

.

. . . . Using TV Disc and A/V Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peer-to-Peer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . Using the GUIDE Button to Display ChannelView™ and Menus NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings. .Chapter  NetCommand® Functions Device Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 57 58 59 60 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Device Menu Button to Display Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Video Section Connection Section Device Section Audio Section Audio Section When a NetCommand pre-memorized or learned IR controlled A/V receiver has been connected to the TV and added to NetCommand Setup. press ADJUST on the TV’s remote to move the highlight. Press ENTER to change the audio selection. PIP Device Selection Menu Figure 2 Figure 1. On the Device Selection menu. the D-VCR icon appears in the Connection Section. The PIP Selection menu displays when you press the PIP DEVICE button on the remote control. if the Digital VCR (D-VCR) is currently recording. Use ADJUST to move the highlight to the device to show in the PIP or POP screen.Device Selection Menu When you press DEVICE on the TV’s remote control. Highlight the A/V receiver icon and press POWER. Then press ADJUST to select the TV speakers icon or the A/V receiver icon. The source for the Video Section is the sub picture and the Audio and Connection Sections are not available. Video Section The destination of the device highlighted in the Device Section is displayed here as a TV icon. Device icons that are grayed out are not available for use as PIP or POP sources or with the current source. and verify the destination of signals. the Device Selection menu allows you to select an input for viewing. For devices that do not power On or Off automatically. Video Section Device Section Figure 2. power compatible devices On or Off. Press AUDIO to change navigation to the audio section. press ADJUST or to highlight the device icon and press POWER on the remote control. the inputs on compatible A/V receivers are automatically changed at the same time. press AUDIO to move the navigation to the Audio Section. If NetCommand is set up. when you move the highlight to the Ant-1 icon. If you press POWER on the remote control when the Device Selection menu is not displayed. then press ENTER. Device Section To select another device or input. If NetCommand® has not been set up. This icon disappears when you move the highlight to another icon or press CANCEL to stop recording. 56 Chapter 4. display the Device Selection menu. an AVR icon will appear in the audio section. the Device Selection menu (Figure 1) displays. This menu has the same general format as the Device Selection menu. Press ENTER to select the device to view and hear. the manufacturer has not provided that capability for the device. For the A/V receiver. the device or input currently displayed appears as a gold-colored icon. If NetCommand is set up. Netcommand Functions . For example. the Device Selection menu allows you to select the device for viewing. the TV will turn Off. Press DEVICE to return the navigation to the Device Section. PIP Device Selection Menu IMPORTANT If a device does not respond to separate On or Off remote control signals. The TV inputs are automatically changed. Device Selection Menu with NetCommand Power On/Off Devices (NetCommand devices only) Devices that have separate On and Off remote control buttons will power On automatically when you select the device and will power Off when you turn off the TV. Connection Section The Connection Section shows the recording in progress and the device that is recording from the source. select audio from the TV speakers or A/V receiver.

pressing DEVICE MENU will display a list of up to 8 links to applications that contain basic CableCARD information made available from your cable provider. Press ADJUST or to move through the application links. 1. Press ENTER to move to the next application. press HOME to exit and return to TV viewing. DEVICE MENU displays or removes TV Guide’s menu information. Transport menu When used with the TV Guide On Screen. For traditional DVD players. See the TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed information. Blue text denotes a link to another screen. Press DEVICE MENU a second time to display the menu for the current device source. CableCARD™ Menu Figure 4 Press HOME key to exit Figure 4. you will also be able to use the number buttons and other additional buttons on the TV remote. and NetCommand is set up. You cannot move backward through the links. If there are technical problems with the CableCARD. pressing DEVICE MENU once or twice will display the menu for that device. For some NetCommand traditional devices. IR Controlled Devices For a NetCommand compatible traditional IR controlled device. CANCEL may not work with some CableCARD screens. Possible Device Menu for CableCARD When viewing a CableCARD channel.Using the Device Menu Button to Display Menus Device Menu If the input is a VCR or DVD. While the menu for the device is displayed. Pressing DEVICE MENU will return to the CableCARD menu screen and pressing HOME will return IMPORTANT Most CableCARD screens show only status or diagnostic information and do not allow you to make changes. an error screen will automatically display with information that may be needed by your Cable provider when you call them for assistance. To select a link (blue text) to an application. there are no more links. then press ENTER to access the linked page. If you want to exit the CableCARD system. press ADJUST or to highlight the link. other CableCARD application screens may display and require you to make additional selections. Chapter 4. Please contact your cable provider if you have any problems with the application screen displays. Specific screen menus are sent by your cable provider. While CableCARD application screens are customized in each area. 2. All information on these application screens is provided by your local cable company. some general rules apply in using these screens on your Mitsubishi television. if available. When screens do not have blue text. These screens are meaningful only to your local cable provider. Moving Through Other CableCARD Screens In addition to CableCARD menus. Figure 3. to TV viewing. press DEVICE MENU once to display the transport menu for the current device (figure 3). The screen shown is an example of the type of screen that may display. DEVICE MENU is also known as the setup menu. press ADJUST and ENTER to navigate the screen. Netcommand Functions 57 .

GUIDE displays the on-screen programming guide for the receiver or cable box. press ADJUST . For TV Disc and A/V Discs. to return to basic information press ADJUST . page 59 for more information. GUIDE displays the DVD disc “top” menu (not the setup menu). press GUIDE when the VCR is highlighted on the Device Selection menu to change the VCR’s input. A red “R” will be added after the input name. depending on the number of channels in memory. Netcommand Functions . ChannelView screen. press CH or . Press GUIDE while viewing ANT-1 or ANT-2 to display a list of available memorized digital channels (D) and analog (A) channel information (if available from the broadcaster). Press ADJUST and ENTER to navigate the displayed Guide. For IEEE 1394 devices with digital connections. The message. 58 Chapter 4. you may also be able to use the number or other additional buttons. If limited data is shown or no program data appears. the TV must be powered Off from 5 to 15 minutes a day. use the Record List (page 59). it is because the broadcaster is not sending the information. pressing GUIDE allows you to see NetCommand®-controlled program guides or menus. pressing GUIDE switches the A/V Receiver from analog audio to digital audio and vice versa. Analog channel information will display as sent. press GUIDE twice to display the device’s Guide. the program listings will be temporarily lost. if supported. For NetCommand-compatible DVD players. For detailed program information. current programs Recording Future Programs from ChannelView To record a future program. Please see Record List. To view. press ADJUST or to select the channel you want to record from. press ADJUST . A red “R” will be added after the input name. The recording has been added to the Record List will display. change or cancel a recording. For detailed program information. Press ADJUST or to scan through all the channels in memory one by one. press GUIDE to display a JPEG thumbnail menu (video) or a playlist menu (audio). This list is called ChannelView™ ChannelView for digital channels will show the major and sub-channels (or bitstreams). This is not a defect of your TV. GUIDE and Devices (139 or IR Controlled) For NetCommand-compatible satellite receivers and some cable boxes. If the TV loses power. When the A/V Receiver icon is highlighted in the Audio Section. GUIDE and ChannelView Figures 5 and 6 ChannelView is available for antenna inputs not associated with TV Guide. Figure 5. For NetCommand-compatible satellite receivers. Recording a Current Program from ChannelView To record a current program. ChannelView screen. GUIDE and the Recording Setup Screen When in the Recording Setup screen. pressing GUIDE will display the current list of programmed recordings. press REC (record) when your program choice is highlighted on the program list in ChannelView. press GUIDE to display the Track List screen. To cycle through the choices quickly.Using the GUIDE Button to Display ChannelView™ and Menus The GUIDE Button Please refer to the separate TV Guide On Screen® User’s Guide for details about using the GUIDE button with TV Guide On Screen. When you are not using GUIDE for the TV Guide screens. GUIDE and the Device Selection Menu For compatible traditional VCRs. The TV will immediately switch to the selected channel and start recording. Press REC (record) when your choice is highlighted. This information is sent by the broadcaster. future programs IMPORTANT For complete ChannelView information to be refreshed daily. Figure 6. For memory cards. to return to basic information press ADJUST .

See the TV Guide On Screen User’s Manual for information on recording using the TV Guide On Screen system.. Press ADJUST to change the source. Press REC (record) on the TV remote. 4. 3. Ant 1. If you pick overlapping times. The TV can convert digital channels and IEEE 1394 digital signals to analog signals that can be recorded on NetCommand-compatible analog VHS and S-VHS VCRs. Press a second time to start recording. To change the start time. To exit. Recording Setup screen Can be used when viewing Antenna 1 or 2. duration. TV Disc cannot record DV video from a camcorder. minute. The default is one hour. and day of the week. You can schedule the recording to take place at a later time and program the recording duration for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of six hours (in 30-minute increments). In the “Record to” section. To page through the list. highlight the Start Time box and press ENTER to move among the hour. channel (if available). Press ADJUST to move the highlight to the settings you wish to change. a confirmation message will be displayed. Record List Figure 8 Press GUIDE while viewing the Recording Setup screen to see a list of all currently scheduled recordings. Highlight Add and press ENTER to add the recording to the record list. 3. Netcommand Functions 59 . The capacity of the TV Disc is 160 GB on models WD-62827/WD-73827 and 250 GB on models WD62927/WD-73927. review the destination device and duration. you will see a message stating there is a conflict. Press REC (record) on the TV remote. press ADJUST or to select the recording. Recordings can be made on recordable devices connected to the TV or to the internal TV Disc. If your selection is successful. or destination devices. 5. Record List screen Recording Now Time-Delayed Recording 1. Record To • Chapter 4. 2 Set the TV to the source you want to record. or PC inputs cannot be recorded. Ant 2. press CH or . A maximum of 32 recordings can be scheduled. then press CANCEL. you can view a different device or power off the TV. To initiate recording now: 1. IMPORTANT • Signals from devices connected to the HDMI. Figure 7. day(s). if necessary. Use ADJUST or to change. and am/pm settings. you can automatically start and stop recordings and send signals from one playback device to a recording device. an IEEE 1394 device. The TV Disc is an IEEE 1394 hard disk drive and is available for all channels from CableCARD™. and IEEE 1394 devices or tuning devices (cable boxes or satellite receivers) connected to inputs 1–3. or a non-recording traditional device connected to Inputs 1–3. To cancel a recording on the Record List. Time-delayed recordings scheduled through TV Guide On Screen® are not listed in this screen. Figure 8. Component. Use ADJUST to change the settings. 2. During the recording.NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings Setting up Recordings Figure 7 Through NetCommand. device. It can convert analog channels to digital signals for recording on the TV Disc or other digital recording device. press HOME on the TV remote after all recordings have been added.

2. then leave that device powered On.” Restrictions for Traditional VCRs with NetCommand. Select the correct channel for recording on the VCR and then press REC to start recording. To cancel the request or to start over. press GUIDE to select the input the VCR is on. 2.” NetCommand will change the tag to “Record No More.and TV Guide On Screen-Controlled Recording • • Your VCR should be connected directly to the RECORD OUTPUT AUDIO and VIDEO outputs. • • 60 Chapter 4. 3.NetCommand®-Controlled Recordings. Mitsubishi recommends you transfer important recordings to an external device such as a VCR. in which you can schedule a delayed recording directly from antenna or cable. The VCR must be set manually to “Line Input. If you have a recording that is tagged “Record Once. To change pages. NetCommand is able to search to a specific time in a recording on TV Disc or an IEEE 1394 A/V Disc. press CH or . to enter one hour and twenty-two minutes (1:22) into the track. To play a track. press GUIDE to display its Track List. For example. enter 1. continued Using TV Disc and A/V Discs Direct VCR Recording from an Antenna or Cable Source • You cannot record from source devices connected to the TV Component inputs or HDMI 1 or 2 connections. then press ENTER. You will need to manually stop the recording at the end of the program • Method 2 With the VCR as the current recording device. If the TV Disc requires replacement or repair. Netcommand Functions . press the DEVICE MENU button to display the VCR’s menu. recordings stored on TV Disc will be lost and cannot be recovered. Press ENTER to skip to the time code position. 3. highlight the VCR and press GUIDE to change VCR inputs. select it on the list and press CANCEL. Press ADJUST or to navigate through the Track List. TV Disc and A/V Disc Search by Time To record directly from antenna or cable: • Method 1 1. 4. the TV can select channels on compatible cable boxes for recordings. select it on the list.” Display the Device Selection menu. If the source device or recording device does not have separate power On and Off features. ANT-2 or other devices. Track List screen IMPORTANT The TV Disc is not intended for permanent storage of recordings. Copy-Protected Material When attempting to record copy-protected material. 2. If NetCommand is set up. Tracks are listed in date and time order and vary in size. see NetCommand Controlled Recordings or refer to the TV Guide On Screen® User’s Manual. Highlight the traditional VCR and press POWER to turn on the VCR. When your VCR is the current device. When viewing TV Disc or an A/V Disc. If necessary. the Record functions of the NetCommand and IEEE 1394 systems may be prevented or stopped. TV Disc and A/V Disc Track List Screen Figure 10 To record from ANT-1. Press ENTER to switch the TV to the VCR. press CANCEL instead of ENTER. To delete a track. 2. such as Antenna input (or line input). Use the number buttons to enter the time code position of hours followed by minutes. Press DEVICE on the TV’s remote to display the Device Selection menu. 1. Leave the cable box turned on. Figure 10. Press INFO to see details for the highlighted track. Start the desired track’s playback on the A/V disc. REC (record) on the TV’s remote control functions the same as the record button on the VCR’s remote control or front panel. Mitsubishi is not liable for lost recordings.

Press PAUSE to pause the playback. 5. Please see the TV Guide On Screen User’s Manual for instructions on locking the Video Window. If moving. only the part not yet moved will remain on the TV Disc. You can transfer the track to a different recording device. is shown next to the copy status in the Track List INFO display (see figure 10). DVCR. • TV Disc and the destination device are unavailable during a move operation. from outside the Track List: displays disc status. • Opening TV Guide On Screen during a move will interrupt the move and result in loss of content. In the “Record to” section. VCR). Press REC a second time to initiate recording. ADJUST : skips forward 30 seconds per press.. Tracks are assigned one of these ratings: COPY FREE No copy restrictions apply. To learn a track’s copy status. start viewing the recording and press INFO. Press REC (record) on the TV remote. If there is any interruption (e. REW/REV: reverse picture search. Press DEVICE on the remote control and select TV Disc by pressing ADJUST and then ENTER. : skips to the beginning of the track. Tracks you record to disc may have copy restrictions assigned to them. if any. Note: The retention period for all tracks on the disc expires if there is any loss of power to the TV. pages through multiple screens of listed tracks. multiple presses increase the speed. Using the Remote Control with TV Disc or an A/V Disc starts or resumes playback of paused program. The track on disc is deleted as it is moved. Change if necessary. 3. pauses or resumes playback of program. 6. highlight a track in the Track List and press INFO. Chapter 4. The Recording Setup menu will display. See below for more information.g. review the destination device (A/V Disc. Press ADJUST or to select a track. • You may lose the first 20 to 30 seconds of content when the recording is moved. If you wish to use TV Guide On Screen during a move. • • PLAY: PAUSE: FF/FWD: from within the Track List: displays program description. Tracks of this type may have an assigned retention period. ADJUST : skips backward 12 seconds per press. To see how much time remains of the retention period. Press DEVICE and select a different device from the Device Selection menu. forward picture search. even momentary. Then press ENTER to start playing.Using TV Disc and A/V Discs. • If you interrupt the move. 4. MOVABLE Retention Period Some COPY NEVER tracks have a retention period assigned by the content provider. (or no status shown) COPY NEVER The track cannot be transferred to another recording device. pressing CANCEL or a power loss) while a COPY NEVER. For example. you may lose an additional 20 to 30 seconds of content each time the process is restarted. To Copy or Move a Track 1. • Experience a power outage or power fluctuation. continued Copying or Moving TV Disc or A/V Disc Recordings More about Moving Recordings • Plan to move recordings at a time when you can complete the move without interruption. expiration of the retention period will occur if you: • Unplug the TV from the AC power source. 2. COPY NEVER. displays the Record Menu to schedule recordings. you do not need to change the other settings. You can use the following controls during playback: GUIDE: INFO: displays the Track List of recorded programs. • The move operation lasts as long as the full run-time of the recording. Remember that you can safely turn off TV power using the POWER button without affecting the retention period. The retention period is the length of time you can keep and view the recording. MOVABLE recording is being made. The initial retention period. deletes a highlighted track from the Track List. multiple presses increase the speed. Netcommand Functions 61 . be sure to lock the Video Window when you first open the Guide. ADJUST ADJUST REC: CANCEL: CH Up/Dn : skips to the end of the track.

If there is more than one peer-to-peer connection for the same device. Press DEVICE to open the Device Selection menu. Set up a recording over a peer-to-peer connection the same as you would any other NetCommand-controlled recording.Peer-to-Peer Connections What is a Peer-to-Peer Connection? Figure 9 A peer-to-peer connection allows the IEEE 1394 devices in your TV network to talk to each other without the further need of TV intervention once the peer-to-peer connection is established. Figure 9. Cancelling a Peer-to-Peer Connection To cancel a peer-to-peer connection: 1. Press RECORD or CONNECT on the TV remote control to open the Recording Setup screen. NOTE: Multiple peer-to-peer connections can operate simultaneously. Press RECORD or CONNECT a second time to establish the connection. 3. Press CANCEL. Highlight the source device in the Device Selection menu. For example. With the connection established. 2. Netcommand Functions . In the “Record To” section of the Recording Setup screen. Change if necessary. Confirm that the on-screen icon for the peer-to-peer connection is in the Connection Section next to the TV icon 4. Please note that peer-to-peer connections are NOT listed on the Record List screen. The peer-to-peer connection ends and the destination icon is removed. Recording Setup screen for peer-to-peer connection Setting up a Non-Recording Peer-toPeer Connection To establish a peer-to-peer connection: 1. NetCommand establishes the connection between the two devices. NOTE: Analog or traditional (non-digital) devices can not be used for peer-to-peer connections. review the destination device and duration of the connection. 3. Select the source in the Device Selection menu. 2. 62 Chapter 4. sometimes with the same source device. 4. all the connections are cancelled. the TV can set up a connection for an IEEE 1394 cable box that sends a program to another device for viewing. you can turn off the TV or use it to watch another device.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetCommand® Menu Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Menu . . . . .Chapter 5 TV Menu Operations Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 65 67 70 72 7 76 79 80 81 . . . . Audio/Video Menu . . . . . . Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Captions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-Chip Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

name channels or add your favorite channels to a SQV (SuperQuickView™) list. Select the default setting for the TV Pause feature and enable/disable the TimeShuttle feature. if a channel displays as digital and analog. Set analog recording picture format. Displays signal strength of the currently tuned digital channel. Figure 4. NetCommand Menu Figure 2 Add. Manually set the time for the TV. V-Chip Lock selected Record Menu Figure 3 Audio/Video Menu Figure 7 Set up and view recordings and recording defaults. Main menu. Main menu. Enable/disable TV Guide On Screen® or change ZIP code and input selection settings. Audio/Video selected 6 Chapter 5. Edit channels for ANT-1 and ANT-2. If you have more than one digital recording device connected. Main menu. Display a blue screen when viewing a device with no signal. After memorization. enable/ disable Film Mode. Customize the individual audio and video settings. Reset the A/V Memory to return to the original factory A/V settings for a selected device. Main menu. or turn the TV speakers on or off. Channel selected Captions Menu Figure 5 Figure 1. This menu is also used to set the TV timer and reset the lamp reminder. NetCommand selected Figure 6. or lock the front panel buttons. you can choose to see the channel digitally every time it is selected. Figure 2. This time data is usually broadcast by your local PBS station. Setup selected Display Closed Captions if sent by the broadcaster.Main Menu Setup Menu Figure 1 Channel Menu Figure 4 Use the Setup menu to select English or Spanish as the language for the menus and on-screen displays. use this menu to change the default digital Record To device. Figure 5. Memorize the available channels for antennas or cable connected to the ANT-1 and ANT-2 inputs. Main menu. Figure 3. change. or select Auto and the TV will automatically set the time based upon Extended Data Service (XDS) time data. lock by time. Turn the transport menu off. Main menu. Change the order of icons on the Device Selection menu. Record selected Figure 7. View your customized Record List. The TV’s software version is displayed on this screen. Main menu. review or delete NetCommand® settings and devices. Set analog recording quality for programs recorded on the TV Disc. Captions selected V-Chip Lock Menu Figure 6 Block or allow programing based upon rating signals sent by the broadcast station. TV Menu Operations . select settings for analog or digital captions. Manually add or delete channels from memory.

The memorization process is started separately for each antenna selection. As a result. channel name. If you choose to change the selection. To stop the automatic channel-memorization process before it completes. When you use a CableCARD™. Manual To manually set the clock. In the TV Guide On Screen® system. For Antenna 1 (Main) or Antenna 2 (Aux) To start channel memorization. The first time you powered on your TV. Figure 8. Channels memorized before you pressed CANCEL are retained in memory. Time Menu. and SQV custom favorite channel memories. Press ADJUST or to select minutes. see the section of this Owner’s Guide covering audio settings. the Ant-1 channel-memorization options are not available and are shown grayed out on the screen. first select an input according to the table below. Refer to the TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed instructions on editing channels shown in this guide. Date Press ADJUST or to select the correct date. Chapter 5. To listen to audio in other languages (when available). all previously memorized channels for the selected antenna Figure 9. If you start the memorization process again. TV Menu Operations 65 . During the memorization process. you were requested to select an on-screen-menu language. the channels displayed and the order in which they are displayed in the Guide is independent of the channel-memorization process.Setup Menu Setup Menu Figure 8 input are erased and the process starts over from the beginning. all menu text will immediately switch to the language of your choice. Setting the Clock Manually Time Press ADJUST or repeatedly to slowly select the hour or press and hold to quickly select the hour. Setup Menu Language Display the on-screen menus in either English or Spanish (Español). time zone for your area and the Daylight Savings time setting. Analog channels are scanned first and then the process is repeated for digital channels. Clock Figure 9 Memorize Channels You may choose to manually or automatically set the clock that your TV will use for recording or timer functions. Press ENTER to move to the minutes options. current date. Input Ant-1 Air Ant-2 Air Ant-1 Cable Ant-2 Cable Condition When connected to an indoor/ outdoor antenna When connected to direct cable Press ENTER to start the automatic channel-memorization process. all possible channels on the selected antenna are scanned twice. Select the Channel Menu to access further channel-editing features. press CANCEL. such as channel add or delete. you need to select the current time. the channels in memory can be accessed in ascending or descending order by pressing CH or . After memorizing channels. the complete list of available channels is provided through the CableCARD.

Pacific. you may select any memorized channel. or the individual days of the week. Alaska or Hawaii) for your area. To have an accurate reminder that the lamp cartridge may soon need replacement. continued Time Zone Select your correct time zone. or Ignore if DST does not apply.” Press any button on the remote control within five minutes or the TV will turn itself off. Eastern. You may then tune to a channel (on ANT-1 or ANT-2) that uses Extended Data Service (XDS) time data. At your preselected time. Figure 10. Mon-Fri (Monday through Friday). Device Press ADJUST or to select the device to use when the timer turns on the TV. Press ENTER. Be aware that if a channel displays incorrect time information. Central. as noted above. it is because of information sent from the broadcaster and is not a defect of the TV. TV Menu Operations . Press ENTER to move to the minutes options. Press ADJUST or to select the channel and the TV will tune to this channel in memory when the timer turns it on. If the TV is already on. See Appendix G for detailed information about changing the lamp. Then press ADJUST to move to the Daylight Savings time option.Setup Menu. Daylight Savings Time Select the Daylight Savings time (DST) option that your state uses. This information is displayed on the Setup menu screen. Press ADJUST or to select the time zone (Atlantic. then press ENTER again to confirm reset of the lamp reminder. the timer will turn the TV on and this message will be displayed: “Press a button for the TV to stay on. Select to reset the lamp reminder message after you have changed the lamp cartridge. Auto Select the Time Zone and Daylight Savings time setting. You select the time and day for the TV to turn on and the device and channel to display. The Auto selection will automatically retrieve the correct time and date information from this channel. Press ADJUST or to select minutes. reset the lamp reminder only when you replace the lamp cartridge. Press ADJUST or to select Applies if your state or area uses DST. Mountain. This includes subchannels for digital choices. it may be necessary to know the software version in your TV. Channel When an antenna is the selected device. typically a PBS channel. Timer Menu (Timer On/Off) 66 Chapter 5. Timer Figure 10 Lamp Reminder On/Off The timer allows you to set up a time when the TV will change the channel and turn on. Press ADJUST or to select Daily. Software Version For some service-related issues. the timer will turn the TV to this selected device. Set Day Select the day or days that the TV will turn on automatically. Set Time Press ADJUST repeatedly to slowly select the hour or press and hold to quickly select the hour.

Press ADJUST . In the Device Selection menu selecting a VCR or DVD Player will automatically display the Transport menu. DVDs. pause and record) on the TV’s remote control will continue to operate these devices. . Turn devices and unused inputs On or Off. . delete a single device or delete the entire setup configuration. deleted or not completed. the Transport menu button will be grayed out. stop. Chapter 5. If you choose to turn off this menu when viewing the devices. to move the icon to the desired position and then press ENTER to select the icon. play forward. For example. Transport Menu NetCommand uses the Transport menu to control VCRs. IEEE 1394 A/V Discs. Select Transport menu functions by pressing ADJUST . and similar devices. TV Menu Operations 67 . stop. you can start at the Initial NetCommand screen. press ADJUST . or if the NetCommand setup was cancelled. If you choose to delete the entire configuration. to highlight the icon to be moved and then press ENTER. play forward. Icon Order Figure 12 The Icon Order screen allows you to arrange the device icon order on the Device Selection menu to a different sequence. press ADJUST or to move to PAUSE. . pause and record) on the remote control are located in the bottom section of the remote control. to pause playback. You can redisplay this menu by pressing DEVICE MENU. digital VCRs. then press ENTER. NetCommand Menu Transport Menu Figure 13 Edit Detailed information regarding setting up and editing the NetCommand menu is found in Chapter 3. The Edit NetCommand screens allow you to add new devices and change traditional and IEEE 1394 devices. . . such as record for a DVD Player. Figure 13.NetCommand® Menu NetCommand Menu Figure 11 Figure 12. Icon Order Menu Figure 11. . Remote Control Transport Buttons Transport buttons (rewind. If a function is not possible. for ease of selection and operation. the transport buttons (rewind. The Review screen shows all devices connected to the TV. To change the order. and then ENTER. You can also set up the TV Guide On Screen® system or turn it on or off.

You can skip or scan backward as far as the last channel or device change. When TimeShuttle is enabled. IEEE 1394 tuner devices and other tuning devices (cable boxes or satellite receivers connected to Inputs 1–3). Current broadcast point (limit of forward scan) Controlling TV Pause Features NOTE: You can reverse search as far back as the beginning of the filled space shown on the slider. This is possible because the TV Pause feature automatically creates a temporary recording on the internal TV Disc. Press ADJUST to skip back to the earliest available part of the TV program as shown on the slider. You can then search forward and backward through the recorded portion of the program while the program broadcast continues. • • • • • • 68 Chapter 5. These modes allow use of PIP/POP features. not fast forward. we recommend the Off or On Request mode. • • • Press PAUSE to pause the current TV program or resume play after pause. To use the PIP/POP features. Press up to four times to increase the scan speed. There is a delay of a few seconds before a paused picture appears. TV Pause is available for CableCARD™. TV Pause has three settings: • On Request: TV Disc is in the standby mode until you press PAUSE for the first time after turning on the TV. As the broadcast continues. 1 2 3 Figure 14. When you press PAUSE to pause a TV program during broadcast. the TV Disc turns on and then starts recording automatically when you first press the PAUSE button. Press ADJUST to skip all the way to live broadcast. an on-screen slider shows approximately how far and in which direction(s) you can search (see figure 14). Press PAUSE. Current viewing point in recorded portion of program. You can forward search up to the current broadcast point. You can also scan or skip forward to catch up to the live broadcast. Press REW to reverse picture scan. 3. In the Always setting. Press ADJUST to skip backwards 12 seconds for each press. TV Menu Operations . REW. If pressed when TV is paused. press REC to display the record menu and begin a standard. Press ADJUST to skip forward 30 seconds for each press. you can interrupt watching a program and then resume watching it later without missing any of the program. TV Pause slider. Press PLAY to resume watching the TV program from the pause point. When TimeShuttle is enabled. storable recording. or after a channel or device change. 2. FF or any ADJUST button to pause the program and scan or skip within the program. Always: With this option. Press up to four times to increase the scan speed. The recording created by TV Pause is temporary and will be automatically overwritten. Ant-1. REW can be used to open the view shown in figure 15. If you wish to save the program for later viewing. TV Disc returns to the standby mode automatically when you change the channel or device. you can use the PAUSE key for standard full-screen picture freeze. select the Off or On Request setting for TV Pause. You can begin watching a program after the start of the broadcast and still be able to view the part already broadcast. You can also press GUIDE to display ChannelView or TV Guide On Screen® to make a recording. With this option. continued TV Pause Figure 11 • With TV Pause. Press FF to forward picture scan. When TV Pause is set to Off. If pressed when TV is paused. Ant-2. will reverse at half speed. Limit of backward scan. The PIP/ POP features are available only when TV Pause is in standby mode and not enabled. the TV Disc is continuously recording while the TV is on. FF can be used to open the view shown in figure 15. Off: This option prevents operation of the TV Pause feature. the PIP/POP features are not available.NetCommand® Menu . will move forward at half speed. 1. If you do not expect to use the TV Pause features. you can scan or skip backwards in the TV program to the point where the TV Disc started recording. Use TV Pause with the TimeShuttle feature if you want to search visually for a specific program segment.

In the NetCommand menu. • Press PAUSE to freeze the image. You can then search backward as far as the point where you To Turn Off TimeShuttle When TimeShuttle is turned off. Press HOME to close the menu. TV Pause with TimeShuttle To Enable TV Pause with TimeShuttle 1. Select On for TimeShuttle. you can: • Press PLAY to start watching the program from that frame. 2. 3. TimeShuttle search. Select On for TimeShuttle. TimeShuttle and TV Disc Recordings To Enable TimeShuttle for TV Disc 1. allow more time for the recording to continue before trying again. TimeShuttle becomes available when TV Pause is active. Select Off for TimeShuttle. In the NetCommand menu. To display the TimeShuttle screen and search for the segment you want: • Press REW to search backward. you can: • Press PLAY to start watching the program from that frame.NetCommand® Menu . 2. Press REW or FF up to three additional times to increase the search speed. When a frame of the desired program segment appears. If TV Pause is set to On Request. 3. You can then search visually forward or backward to the exact program segment you want to watch. the FF and REW keys perform normal full-screen video scanning. Turn off TimeShuttle if you wish to use the FF and REW keys for standard full-screen video scanning. With TimeShuttle enabled. • Press REW or FF up to three additional times to increase the search speed. • Press FF or REW to change the direction of the search. Press PAUSE again to return to normal full-screen viewing. Press HOME to close the menu. Figure 15. Press PLAY to view a program starting with the highlighted frame in front. continued TimeShuttle Figure 15 first pressed the PAUSE key for the current channel and input. Note: If the TimeShuttle screen does not appear. Press REW or FF. Press PAUSE to activate TV Pause for the current channel or device. To Use TimeShuttle while Viewing TV Disc: 1. 2. Press HOME to close the menu. 1. To Use TV Pause with TimeShuttle 1. 2. If you also wish to use the PIP/POP features. Chapter 5. TV Menu Operations 69 . select Always or On Request for TV Pause. When a frame of the desired program segment appears. the FF and REW keys open a frame-by-frame view of the program. • Press FF to search forward. • Press FF or REV to change the direction of the search. select Off for TV Pause. 2.

To exit. 3. IMPORTANT Recordings scheduled on this screen are independent of recordings scheduled through TV Guide On Screen®. 70 Chapter 5. a confirmation message will be displayed. Recordings scheduled with TV Guide On Screen have priority if there is a conflict between the two recording schedules. you will see a message stating there is a conflict. Review the Record To (destination) device (TV Disc) and duration. During recording. To initiate recording now: 1. or destination devices. Figure 15. Select Add and press ENTER to add the recording to the record list. Recording Setup screen In the recording Setup screen you tell the TV what. This allows you to record analog programs to a digital recording device (TV Disc. 5. you can: • view a different device • view a different channel (in most cases) • power off the TV. TV Menu Operations . When recording to a VCR or A/V disc. A/V Disc. If you pick overlapping times. Press REC (record) on the TV remote or press ENTER if the Record menu is displayed. If you have a digital source and make an analog recording to a VCR. the TV converts the digital signals to analog format and sends the analog output to the VCR through the RECORD OUTPUT jacks. Press REC a second time to initiate recording. Figure 14. Record Menu Recording Setup Figure 15 Recording Now Can be used when viewing Antenna 1 or 2. and set defaults for your recording devices. When a digital recording is being made. If your selection is successful. an IEEE 1394 device. The default is one hour. the TV can direct the same source signals to an external recording device using the IEEE 1394 cable. Use the PAUSE key in this manner to selectively record only the program segments you want. The TV can convert analog programs to digital format. press PAUSE to temporarily stop recording and press PAUSE again to resume recording. day(s). 4. view the record list. or a non-recording traditional device. 2. 3. device to record to. press HOME on the TV remote after all recordings have been added. • press REC on the remote control when viewing a recordable source. Change if necessary. The default recording device is the TV Disc. Time-Delayed Recording To initiate a time-delayed recording: 1. which can record both digital and analog programs. start time (press ENTER after selecting hour and minutes to set the time) and day. There are two ways to open the Recording Setup screen: • select Record from the Record menu. Set the TV to the source you want to record. IMPORTANT See Appendix I for a list of recording and viewing combinations available for this TV. where. Press ADJUST or to select the channel. 2. and when to record. Press REC (record) on the TV remote or press ENTER if the Record menu is displayed.Record Menu Record Figure 14 The Record menu allows you to set up recordings. duration time. DVCR). Your TV can stop recordings automatically and it can send the signals from one external playback device to a different external recording device. You can schedule the recording to take place at a later time and program the recording duration for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of six hours in 30-minute increments.

select the record list option on the Record menu or press GUIDE while viewing the Recording setup screen. Refer to the separate TV Guide On Screen® User’s Guide for information regarding scheduling recordings with TV Guide On Screen. Note that digital programs can be recorded on either a digital or analog device. IMPORTANT When setting up analog recordings in TV Guide On Screen. A maximum of 32 recordings can be scheduled. The default is High. The device specified here is the default device used when initiating a recording with the REC key from within ChannelView™ (page 58). Analog Recordings When you record a 16:9 digital channel to an analog VCR or recording device. Cancel Scheduled Recordings To remove a recording from the record list. Setting Up Analog VCR Recordings with TV Guide On Screen® • • When setting up a recording using TV Guide On Screen. choose the anamorphic picture display and ensure that the TV screen format is set to standard (see the section on TV formats in this Owner’s Guide). The destination recording device for analog recordings must be the analog device connected to the TV’s RECORD OUTPUT jacks. This setting does not affect recording from analog devices. Default Digital (Record) Device Chapter 5. however. The Low quality takes less disc space. press CH or . Record List screen Analog Quality TV Guide On Screen® and the Record List Programs scheduled through TV Guide On Screen do not appear on this record list. This option remains grayed out (unavailable) until you connect an external recording device and add it to the NetCommand setup. High has the best quality. the TV Guide On Screen recording takes priority.Record Menu. note that: You must select the desired recording device in the TV Guide On Screen Record Options menu. The internal TV Disc appears as the initial default recording device set by the factory for recording both analog and digital programs. For analog programs recorded on the TV Disc or an A/V Disc. analog channels. record digital programs on a digital recording device. press ADJUST or to select the recording. To cancel a recording on the Record List. TV Menu Operations 71 . then press CANCEL. or 4:3 digital channels. If there is a conflict between recordings scheduled through TV Guide On Screen and the Record List. there is a mismatch between the picture shape of the 16:9 ratio of the source and the narrower 4:3 ratio of the analog recorder. continued Record List Figure 16 To see a list of all currently programmed recordings. For best playback quality. After the device is added. choose the cropped display to remove the top and bottom sections. For cropped playback on an older style 4:3 TV. highlight the box and press ADJUST to select the added device. but takes more disc space. you can select the recording quality. you must set the destination recording device as the analog device connected to the TV’s RECORD OUTPUT jacks. • • Figure 16. For anamorphic playback on this widescreen TV. use or to highlight the scheduled recording and then press CANCEL. To page through the list.

2. Press ADJUST or to select each letter. it will appear on the TV screen. a check mark in the Prefer Digital box causes digital channels to be displayed and analog channels to be hidden (when using CH or ).Channel Menu Channel Figure 17 After the available channels have been memorized with Memorize Channels on the Setup menu. Name Antenna Select the antenna for the channels you want to edit. 1. Channel Menu Analog channels shown on Antenna-1 or Antenna-2 can be named (up to four characters). weaker channels can be added or unwanted channels can be deleted. 72 Chapter 5. This option is not available when TV Guide On Screen® is enabled. After you enter a name. Memory Figure 17. analog or digital (up to the number 16383). depending on the broadcaster’s channel information. the virtual channel number is shown in the text box and the original digital channel is shown below on screen as a reference. TV Menu Operations . Press CH or on the remote control to see the channels in memory. Press ENTER to set the letter and move to the next letter position. Press ADJUST or to select Added or Deleted for the channel shown in the Channel number box. For a two-part digital channel. Prefer Digital Channel • • • Channels can be changed in three ways: Press ADJUST Pressing CH memory. to select channels already in Enter the number directly. next to the channel number. when the broadcaster has sent a virtual channel number. Remove the check mark to show both analog and digital choices. When a memorized channel number is available as both analog and digital. You can select Ant-1 (main) or Ant-2 (Aux). second or third number. or two part for digital channels (these use a separator). 3. Digital channels are automatically named if the broadcaster sends the information. For digital channels. Channel numbers can be one part. press SUB/CANCEL on the remote to enter a separator after the first. or or to select the channel. Press CANCEL to move back one position. One original channel number can be associated with several different virtual channels.

4. press CH or ADJUST to display the desired channel number. Use this indicator to help you adjust the antenna direction for optimal signal strength. To change memory banks. The higher the bar. continued SQV (SuperQuickView™) Using The Menu Screen Figure 17 Removing SQV channels using the remote control: 1. Adding SQV channels using the remote control: 1. You can also store the same channel in multiple memory banks. Adding SQV Channels 1. and press ENTER. 3. either: • Highlight the channel box. Press the SQV button and then the memory bank number. the channel has successfully been removed only from that bank. press a number button within 5 seconds of pressing the SQV button. Press the SQV button repeatedly to cycle through the channels available in that bank. • Enter the channel number on the remote control and press ENTER. Press CH . press the CANCEL button. Removing SQV Channels 1. the channel will not be removed. 1. Displays the approximate signal strength of the currently tuned digital channel. If the CANCEL button is not pressed before the SQV indicator disappears automatically. SQV (SuperQuickView™) allows you to put together lists of your favorite channels from Antenna 1 and Antenna 2.Channel Menu. the channel has successfully been added. 2. To change the channel. Chapter 5. . Once you have added a channel to an SQV memory. While the channel number and SQV indicator (with correct bank number) are still displayed on the screen. 2. Does not apply to analog channels. 3. Signal Strength SQV (SuperQuickView™) Using The Remote Control Viewing and changing SQV banks using the remote control: Press the SQV button. Highlight the bank (SQV1-SQV9). Select the channel using the “Channel” option box or press CH or . When the SQV indicator disappears. You can change the tuned channel while in this menu so that you can see the effects of antenna adjustments. TV Menu Operations 73 . “SQV” and the memory bank number will appear under the tuned channel number on the TV screen. Repeat for additional channels or banks. Press and hold the SQV button for about 2 seconds. 2. Press the SQV button repeatedly until you see the desired channel. 4. You can store channels in any of the 9 different SQV memory banks. 2. Highlight the box for the SQV bank number. Press ENTER to remove the check mark. “Other” banks remain unchanged. the stronger the signal. Press ENTER to check mark the selected SQV memory bank. or number buttons to select the channel you want to add to the current SQV memory bank. 3. When “SQV” and the memory bank number appear under the channel number. 2.

Background The TV can display one of the following Captions for Digital sources: • • Captions 1-6. Off. broadcasters can send up to six different captioning selections or can send analog captions the same as the analog station sends. The Digital Settings menu allows you to customize the appearance of the closed captions sent by the broadcaster. Standard Closed Captions follows the dialogue of the characters on screen and displays in a small section of the screen. you can choose to display the background color as either black or gray behind the captions. No closed captions. Figure 19. No closed captions. CC2. Closed captions when mute. then the analog captions settings apply. broadcasters can send either Standard or Text closed captioning. (Standard closed captioning signals).Captions Menu Captions Menu Figure 18 For analog channels. Text3. When selected. if the broadcaster is sending only analog captions converted to digital. Digital settings do not apply to analog closed captions converted to digital. Note: For digital programs. These settings do not apply to analog Closed Captioning converted to digital. Text Closed Captions often contain information such as weather or news and covers a large portion of the screen. To make the analog closed captions easier to read. Each TV station may broadcast only one or two types of captions or none at all. a large black or gray box appears on your TV screen if no signal is broadcast. On digital channels. Figure 18. The TV cannot decode Closed Captions received on COMPONENT 1–3 or HDMI 1 or 2. the standard closed captioning signal (CC1) will turn on/off by pressing MUTE on the TV remote control. When selected. TV Menu Operations . Text2. Digital Captions • Appearance Closed Captions provider selects the Default options when sending digital closed captions. Text1. CC3. Analog Captions Move the highlight to the Digital Settings icon and press ENTER. Closed Captions Menu Digital Settings 7 Chapter 5. Captions Menu Digital Settings Figure 19 The TV can display one of the following captions for Analog sources: • • • CC1. On if Mute. On if mute. (Text closed captioning signals). Off. the captioning signal (Caption 1) will turn on/off by pressing MUTE on the TV remote control. • IMPORTANT When analog text closed captioning is selected. Sent by broadcaster. Closed captions when mute. You may select the Custom option to override and customize Closed Captions appearance. or Text4. or CC4.

Your choice may change the legibility or readability of captions. To make the digital closed captions easier to read. Chapter 5. misspellings. The available background colors are listed below. covers TV program • Flashing—Background flashes at intervals Background Opacity You can customize the text of digital captions by selecting the font color. Size You can customize the background for digital captions using the following categories: • Translucent—TV program is dimly visible behind the background • Transparent—See-through background reveals the TV program • Opaque—Solid background. or odd grammar. The available font colors are listed below. it is not a malfunction of the TV. Large is the recommended font size. TV Menu Operations 75 . Text and background cannot be set to the same color. continued You can customize the text of digital captions by selecting the font of your choice. Text and background cannot be set to the same color.Captions Menu. you can choose the background color. Black translucent background combined with a white font make and easy-to-read combination. If your captions show strange characters. blocks the TV program • Flashing—Text flashes at intervals Opacity (Font) You can also customize the text of digital captions by selecting your desired size of font. White Black Magenta Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Background IMPORTANT The content of captions is determined by the broadcaster. Use care when selecting custom colors. White Black Magenta Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Color IMPORTANT We recommend you use contrasting colors for captions and background. The available font options are as follows: • • • • • • • • Default—Selected by the Closed Captions provider Font 1—Monospaced font with serifs Font 2—Proportionally spaced font with serifs Font 3—Monospaced font without serifs Font 4—Proportionally spaced without serifs Font 5—Casual font Font 6—Cursive font Font 7—Small Capitals font Fonts You can customize the visibility of your fonts using the following categories: • Translucent—TV program is faintly visible behind the text • Transparent—See-through text reveals the TV program • Opaque—Solid color text.

there may be a delay of up to five seconds before the V-Chip lock takes effect. Figure 21. You must use a pass code to open this menu to enable/disable the lock options. Press ADJUST or to select the TV rating level you want to allow. V-Chip menu Setting V-Chip Options 1. 4. these presets will allow only programs rated TV-PG/PG or lower. If you selected On. Lock TV by Time Front Button Lock On/Off If you forget your four-digit pass code. To set a pass code for the first time: 1. highlight V-Chip Lock. The V-Chip Lock menu gives you access to three different types of TV locks. 2. The three different types of locks available are: • V-Chip Lets you restrict access to programming based on program-rating signals sent by the broadcaster. TV Menu Operations . A screen prompting you for a pass code displays. To reset the pass code. 2. V-Chip Lock menu  5 6 7 8 Setting a Pass Code You are prompted to enter a pass code whenever you select V-Chip Lock on the menu or press the V-CHIP key on the remote control. After changing channels or devices. press ADJUST to move to the TV Rating box. Use this option if there are small children near the TV who may be tempted to press the frontpanel buttons. Highlight the V-Chip icon on the V-Chip Lock menu (figure 20) and press ENTER to open the V-Chip menu (figure 21). • Press TV MENU. Press ENTER to confirm the pass code just input. IMPORTANT • • V-Chip Menu Figure 21 The V-Chip menu allows you to: • Turn the V-Chip Lock on or off • • Change the permitted V-Chip rating level Set the time of day to enforce rating restrictions V-Chip Icon The TV comes from the factory with pre-set V-Chip ratings and with the V-Chip Lock turned off. Use the V-Chip menu to change the permitted rating levels. 2 Figure 20. then press ENTER. • Press MENU or HOME to exit without setting a pass code. 76 Chapter 5.V-Chip Lock Menu V-Chip Lock Menu Overview Figure 20 3. If you turn on the V-Chip. see the procedure in Appendix C. Front Button Lock Gives you a way to disable the controls on the front of the TV. see Appendix C. 3. Input a four-digit pass code using the number keys on the remote control. You can also set the time of day for these restrictions to be in effect. Press ADJUST or to select On or Off. The preset ratings are TV-PG (TV rating) and PG (movie rating). You can turn on V-Chip from this menu or by using the V-CHIP button on the remote control. Do one of the following: • Press V-CHIP on the remote control. Lock by Time Lets you restrict all TV viewing by time of day. • Press CANCEL to delete a number and move back one space.

a notice appears prompting you for a pass code. News programs and emergency bulletins carry the “None” or “NR” (Not Rated) V-Chip rating. Press ADJUST to move to the Movie Rating box. continued 5. 2. prompting you for your pass code. • Press ADJUST or to move between categories. press ADJUST or repeatedly to change the minutes. To set the time of day when these restrictions will be in effect. If you try to watch blocked programming. Press ADJUST to move to the Lock Time box. press ADJUST or repeatedly to change the hour. NOTE: To make the V-Chip restrictions active twentyfour hours a day. d. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the minutes. Press ADJUST or to make a selection. you must open the V-Chip Lock Menu and then open the V-Chip menu. b. power the TV off and then on. d. Press ADJUST to move to the Programs Not Rated box. To change V-Chip settings. and these are blocked with this option active. To make Lock by Time active 24 hours a day. Lock by Time Lock by Time allows you to entirely block use of the TV during specified hours. With the highlight on the minutes number. Press ADJUST to move to the TV content categories. a. a similar screen appears. • Press ENTER to add check marks to the TV content categories you want to block.V-Chip Lock Menu. press ADJUST or repeatedly to change the hour. You can also just press and hold to change the hour. To lock the TV by time: 1. Select On to disable the buttons and select Off to restore their operation. a message will display confirming release of the Front Button Lock. TV Menu Operations 77 . During the lock time. b. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the am/ pm option. set the Lock and Unlock Times to the same time. To use the TV: • Input your four-digit pass code and press ENTER. Press TV MENU to save the settings and close the menu. press ADJUST to move to the Start box. See the next page for detailed information on rating guidelines. Press ADJUST or to make a selection. With the highlight on the minutes number. 6. Press ADJUST or to select the movie rating level you want to allow. To set the time: a. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the am/ pm option. If the TV is on. c. 8. 7. • Change to a channel airing an allowed program or change to another device. you must use your pass code to view the TV. 9. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the minutes. You can also just press and hold to change the hour. With the highlight on the hour number. c. To disable the front button lock without using the remote control. Just press and hold to move quickly through the numbers. Press ENTER to add or delete a check mark to allow or block programs that are not rated. press and hold the MENU button on the front panel for more than eight seconds. To reactivate the V-Chip lock or TV lock by time after using the pass code. The V-CHIP Button Bypassing V-Chip Lock and Lock by Time Press the V-CHIP button on the remote control to turn the V-Chip lock on and off without going through the menu. set the V-Chip Start and Stop to the same time. NOTE: Use care when choosing to block unrated programming. If you try to use the TV when it is locked by time. Just press and hold to move quickly through the numbers. A screen will appear prompting you for your pass code. With the highlight on the hour number. Press ADJUST or to select On or Off for Lock by Time. press ADJUST or repeatedly to change the minutes. Front Button Lock Figure 20 Front Button Lock lets you disable controls on the front panel to prevent inadvertent changes to TV settings. Chapter 5.

emergency bulletins. X Adult—Designed for and restricted in the theater to adult audiences only. you will also block any program that has the V category listing at the TV-PG rating level as well. for children under the age of 7. D Sexual Dialog—applies in different degrees to TV-PG and TV-14. when “None” or “NR” Not Rated V-Chip rating is included. V-Chip is not effective for programs viewed on devices connected to component inputs or HDMI. and X. Broadcasters are not currently required to include V-Chip rating signals at this time. For example. G General Audience—Designed for the entire family to view. TV-G General Audience. This does not include programs without V-Chip signals.” you may block news or emergency bulletins. if you select a movie rating of PG-13. TV-14. For adults only. Use care when blocking programming that is not rated. you will block all TV programs that have the same content category listing. if you select TV-PG. may not be suitable for some children. When you select a movie rating. Videotapes.V-Chip Ratings V-Chip Signal Information When provided by the broadcaster. however. If they don’t contain the V-Chip signal. TV Menu Operations . TV Rating FV TV-Y TV-Y7 X TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA D L S V X X X X X X X X X X X Content Categories: Used in association with the TV ratings above. you are allowing movies rated G. and TV-MA V Violence (graphic or realistic)—applies in different degrees to TV-PG. TV-MA Mature Audience. R Restricted—Restricted in the theater to 17 years old and older unless accompanied by an adult. TV ratings apply to programs and movies developed for TV and may have supplemental blocking by content categories. TV-Y7. Many of these devices. laser discs and DVDs may not contain V-Chip rating signals. 78 Chapter 5. For the entire family to view. TV-14. such as news. Parental Guidance is recommended. NC-17 No Children 17 or under—Restricted in theater to 18 years old and older. S Sexual Situations—applies in different degrees to TV-PG. you will see the ratings when you change the channel or when you press the INFO button on the remote control. For example. TV-PG Parental Guidance. For example. you are selecting the least-restrictive program level that can be viewed. you are selecting the least-restrictive program level that can be viewed. TV-G and TV-PG to be seen and blocking programs rated TV-1 and TV-MA. 7 years old and older. PG and PG-13 to be seen and blocking movies rated R. may not be suitable for some children. TV-Y7 Youth. and TV-MA. PG-13 Parental Guidance 13 years old and older—Not recommended for children under the age of 13. When you select a TV Content category. or movies prior to or without MPAA Ratings. V-Chip cannot block the program. you are allowing programs rated TV-Y. PG Parental Guidance—Parental Guidance is recommended. 2. Movie Ratings: Used with theater released movies and direct-to-video movies. NC-17. V-Chip ratings can be used to control which programs can be viewed or will be blocked. When you select a TV rating. if you select to block V (Violence) at the TV-1 level. 3. IMPORTANT If you elect to block programs that carry the V-Chip rating “Programs Not Rated. TV Ratings: Used with TV programs and Made-for-TV movies. sports. Not recommended for children under the age of 14. have their own parental control systems. V-Chip cannot block the program or movie. and TV-MA. TV-1 Adolescent 14 years old and older. If the broadcaster does not include the V-Chip rating signal. When V-Chip ratings are sent. FV Fantasy Violence—applies to TV-Y7 only. L Adult Language—applies in different degrees to TV-PG. weather. TV-14. TV-Y Youth. Programs Not Rated: Used for programs that are not rated. Both TV and Movie ratings will display. V-CHIP EXCEPTIONS: 1. Movie ratings use MPAA ratings for movies released in theaters.

the TV automatically detects and applies film-decoding correction for images that originated on 24-frameper-second film cameras and were then converted to 30-frame-per-second video for broadcast. Using the AUDIO or VIDEO Button on the Remote Control 2. the Auto setting automatically applies video decoding. Video Mute Video Mute lets you display a blue background when no signal is being received on Inputs 1–3. To adjust individual Audio or Video settings directly with the remote control: 1. including the three general settings. Note that the audio settings of Balance. A/V Memory Reset This option is unavailable (grayed out) when NetCommand® is enabled and you have selected the A/V receiver icon from the Device Selection menu. Note: To prevent damage from a sudden increase in volume. COMPONENT 1–3. the same as used with the Off setting. Netcommand automatically turns the TV speakers off. In that case. TV Speakers When an A/V receiver has not been set up in NetCommand. then select Audio or Video to adjust the device’s individual settings. Select the device in A/V Memory Reset. For descriptions of the individual A/V settings see A/V Setting Descriptions. Film Mode is not effective for high-definition signals. and Language are general TV settings unaffected by A/V Memory Reset. TV Menu Operations 79 . To reset all A/V settings at once. See the NetCommand information for further instructions. the setting display will disappear. pages 80 and 81. Press ENTER. Try the Off setting if the TV adds too many jagged edges to the images. Select the device name in the box and press ENTER. and HDMI 1 and 2. Audio/Video Menu A/V Memory Reset allows you to reset a specific device’s A/V settings to the original factory settings. Listen to. Use ADJUST or to make the adjustment. Press AUDIO or VIDEO to cycle through the available settings. Press ADJUST or to adjust the setting. Settings Each device has its own A/V memory. After five seconds of inactivity. Auto is the default setting. You may select Off when sending the sound through a separate stereo system or surround sound A/V receiver.Audio/Video Menu Audio/Video Figure 22 When the original video was filmed on 30-frame-persecond cameras. press the front-panel buttons GUIDE and FORMAT simultaneously (A/V Reset). make sure the TV volume is set to low before setting speakers to On. this selection will turn the TV’s internal speakers on or off. Figure 22. With Auto selected. Film Mode Chapter 5. and the menu is removed and the individual settings are displayed. Use ADJUST or to select the individual settings to be adjusted.

Balance and Surround affect the sound heard through the TV speakers only. Listen to is not available for devices connected to the TV Inputs. between regular programming and commercials. Your choices are: English French German Italian Portuguese Spanish Other Digital-Only Audio Settings ◊ IEEE 139 Amplifier Settings ◊ Balance Adjusts the level of sound between the left and right speakers. When the slider is displayed. • Analog and Digital Audio Settings (such as a sound track in a foreign language). Balance Adjusts the level of sound between the left and right speakers. ◊ ◊ ◊ Bass Enhances or reduces low-pitched sound. Analog-Only Audio Settings ◊ ◊ Equalizer Equalize the sound. and 0 is the minimum. All audio is played mono with this setting. A slider displays on screen for most settings. 31 is the mid-point. or it might be unrelated (such as a weather report). The SAP signal might be related to the program you are watching. ◊ Listen to Determines how your TV receives a broadcast audio signal and plays the sound you hear. Your choices are: • Off: No surround effects. The word “Stereo” is displayed when you tune to a channel broadcasting in stereo. e. Your choices are: • Stereo: Default setting. component inputs. set level sound to OFF and turn the TV speakers off to send full dynamics to the A/V receiver. Preset Select the mode that matches the audio source. The TV plays stereo broadcasts in stereo and mono broadcasts in mono. 80 Chapter 5. it has a numeric value. To receive the best fidelity with music programs. The slider range is 0–254. or 1394 devices. ◊ You can set digital-only audio settings while viewing either analog or digital sources.Audio Settings NOTE: The effects of the audio settings of Bass. Treble. Your choices are: • • • ◊ Off Jazz Rock • • • Classical Music Movie Speech You can set analog-only audio settings while viewing either analog or digital sources. If an SAP signal is broadcast. Surround Creates simulated stereo and surround effects through the TV speakers. Loudness Set to On to make the audio level more uniform. Mono: Reduces background noise. the letters “SAP” are displayed when you tune to the channel. ◊ Language Determines what possible language you can hear. but the settings affect broadcast or recorded analog content. TV Menu Operations . Level Sound Turn On or Off to automatically equalize the volume level when there are significant sound-level differences between program segments. turn this setting to Off. • SAP (Second Audio Program): Additional monaural sound track that you cannot hear during normal TV viewing.g. • Surround Sound: Your TV will create a simulated surround effect when watching a stereo program. Use when receiving a weak stereo audio signal. so that 63 is the maximum. When connecting to an A/V receiver. • Simulated Stereo: Your TV will create a simulated stereo effect when watching a non-stereo program.. Treble Enhances or reduces high-pitched sound. with 127 at the center. but the settings affect only broadcast or recorded digital content.

or Color Temperature. Manually adjust the picture quality of the PC. a medium contrast looks best. When the slider is displayed. TV Menu Operations 81 .Video Settings Video Settings adjusting. Press ENTER to automatically center the position of the PC video. ◊ Contrast (Bright/Natural) Provides a slider to adjust the white-to-black level. the entire screen adjusts the contrast the same. PC Video Settings ◊ ◊ Auto Position. Your choices are: • Low: White images will have a warm cast to them. When Demo is selected. Natural/Color Temp at the low setting displays video at the 6500K industry standard for NTSC pictures. and HDMI 1 and 2. one for each of the two modes. Use the Standard setting with good-quality signals. Low contrast shows a variety of shades in darker images. When Off is selected. special edge sharpness enhancements are applied to the vertical edges of images. Brightness (Bright/Natural) Provides a slider to adjust the overall brightness of the picture. and 0 as the minimum. This selection overrides the Auto Position selection. and the TV’s age. a split screen picture appears and you can see how the picture will look when DeepField Imager is On (right side) or when it is Off (left side). SharpEdge™ When ON is selected. VertPosition (Vertical Position). NOTE: A slider displays on screen for most settings. Bright/Natural Modes Bright and Natural modes are available for some settings and allow you to optimize the image for a brighter (daytime) or dimmer (nighttime) viewing environment. Press the VIDEO key repeatedly to cycle through the Video options to the one you want to change. your TV remembers two independent Contrast. Cyan and Blue) to create color balance. you can adjust the colors automatically or manually (individually). Sharpness Provides a slider to adjust the detail and clarity. ◊ ◊ ◊ Chapter 5. Inputs 1–3. press CANCEL if you want to reset the colors to the default settings. Whenever you change settings for Contrast. Yellow. Manually adjust the vertical position of the PC. the black levels are dynamically enhanced in portions of the screen to provide strong contrast with detail over mixed screen content. This selection overrides the Auto Position selection. first check which of the two modes (Bright/Natural) is active. To do this. Color Provides a slider to adjust the color intensity. This setting may provide the most realistic picture under bright lighting. and Color Temperature settings. it represents numeric values. Red. • High: White images will have a cool cast to them. Fine Detail. 31 as the mid-point. video scene brightness. Color Temp (Bright/Natural) Allows you to adjust how white images are displayed. In most home lighting situations. PerfectColor™ Adjusts any or all of six colors (Magenta. Tint Provides a slider to adjust the ratio of red to green. Component 1–3. Individual sliders for each color are displayed. HorizPosition (Horizontal Position). Highlighted text shows which slider you are ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ Video Noise Use to reduce minor noise (graininess) in the broadcast received on Ant-1 and Ant-2. Use ADJUST to change settings. Green. This adjustment is an average and can vary due to ambient room lighting. When you select PerfectColor and press ENTER. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the PC. While using the PerfectColor option. This selection overrides the Auto Position selection. while high contrast shows darker images more uniformly black and makes colors appear more vibrant. with 63 as the maximum. Brightness. Each TV input or device has a memory for PerfectColor. Brightness. High contrast is good for brightly lit environments. DeepField™ Imager When On is selected.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 6 Additional Features CableCARD™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 85 87 88 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TV Display Formats . . . . . . . . MediaCommand™ and Memory Card Playback . . . . . . Operation of PIP and POP . . . . .

you simply return the CableCARD to the original cable provider and get a new card from your new cable provider. the TV cannot send back signals such as requests for Video-On-Demand or Pay-per-View programs by remote control. and data-enhanced television services. you can press TV MENU on the remote and then enter the number 999 and the screen will re-display.CableCARD™ CableCARD™ Technology CableCARD is a nationwide system standard that allows your local cable TV provider to supply you with an access card customized to your account. They will need these numbers: Host ID X-XXX-XXX-XXX-XXX CableCARDTM ID: X-XXX-XXX-XXX-XXX See owner's manual for further information An example of an initial screen is shown here. Some digital channels or programs may not be copied or recorded because of copy restriction limits set by the content owners or copyright holders. the primary incoming cable must be connected to ANT-1 MAIN. A security card (CableCARD) provided by your cable operator is required to view encrypted digital programming. As time passes. You can also press DEVICE MENU when the CableCARD is the selected source and you will be able to select the startup application. For more information. digital basic. Additional Features . It also allows your cable provider to automatically update and change your subscription. Using a CableCARD™ After inserting a CableCARD into the TV back panel CableCARD slot and powering On the TV. When you move to a new cable provider’s area. Please see page 19 for instructions on inserting the CableCARD. a cable operator’s enhanced program guide. call your local cable operator. however. with information that your Cable Provider will need in order to start service. Digital cable channels authorized by the CableCARD will be available on the Firewire® IEEE 1394 network and can be shared by other products on the network. The CableCARD system is “unidirectional” which means your cable provider can send updates to the access card and TV. The digital television is capable of receiving analog basic. decode and unscramble the premium digital channels included in your cable TV subscription without the use of a cable box. 8 Chapter 6. and digital premium cable television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such programming. Please write down this information before calling your cable provider. IMPORTANT To use a CableCARD. An initial screen will automatically display for a few minutes. the initialization process begins. such as video-on-demand. Please note that CableCARD is a new technology and your local cable provider may not currently be offering this service. may require the use of a set-top box. Your screen will display specific information from your cable provider and may not look like this screen. If you were unable to record the information. This card allows your TV to receive. this system will become broadly supported by most cable providers. Please call XYZ Cable at xxx-xxx-xxxx to activate cable service. Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services.

3. REW: skips to the first track/song on the page. Memory Card Slots Inserting a memory card 1. Figure 2. 3. JPEG Thumbnails Chapter 6. Card 4 accepts MEMORY STICK™ and Memory Stick Pro. try turning the card over and insert again. The Thumbnail menu will be taken down. STOP: Stop slide show. press DEVICE MENU. The Media Dialog box (figure 1) will automatically display. Using the Picture Thumbnail Menu or Audio Playlist Menu For JPEG Picture Thumbnail Menu: Figure 2 1. If you experience problems with the reading of your file.MediaCommand™ and Memory Card Playback Warning: Some memory cards available on the market are not properly certified to follow the card type specifications noted below and cannot be used by the card reader. 2. On the remote control. For Playlist. return to memory card screen. STOP: Stop playback and returns to memory card screen. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the Device Selection Menu and then select the correct card slot from the list. Insert a card into a matching card slot on the front of the TV. For Slideshow. press: PLAY: to start the slide show or play audio. For Thumbnails. FF: skips to the last slide on the page. FORMAT: single press rotates the slide 90˚. Card 1 accepts SmartMedia™. GUIDE: to display the JPEG Thumbnail menu (Figure 2) or Audio track playlist (Figure 3) DEVICE MENU: to display the Media Setup menu (Figure 4). the light next to the slot will light up. Additional Features 85 . Cards up to 1 GB. REW: returns to the first slide on the page. please transfer your files to a properly certified card. FF: skips to the last track/song on the page. Press FORMAT to rotate the selected image 90˚ (pressing FORMAT four times will rotate the image completely around to the original position). using ADJUST . with a file format of FAT 16 (block size = 1024 or 2048) are supported. Normally the label side should be up. Media Dialog Box 4. Card 2 accepts MultiMediaCard™ and SD Media Card. 4. Don’t pull the memory card out while it is playing. press GUIDE. Multiple presses continue to rotate the slide. Use the AUDIO button to switch from JPEG Picture Slide show setup to MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist setup or use the VIDEO button on the remote to switch from the MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist setup to JPEG Picture Slide show setup. When properly inserted. For MP3 or WMA Audio Playback PLAY: begins or resumes playlist playback. Press GUIDE on the remote to display the JPEG picture Thumbnail menu. Card 3 accepts CompactFlash® and MicroDrive®. 2. Use REW to go to the first slide and FF to go to the last slide on the page. Remote Control Buttons for Controlling the Playback For JPEG Picture Slide show: PLAY: begins or resumes slide show playback PAUSE: pauses or resumes playback while in the automatic advance mode. PAUSE: pauses or resumes playback. To redisplay this menu or to setup. press PLAY. but if the card does not fit. Figure 1. press AUDIO. Press PLAY to begin playback of the Slide show from the selected image. Press ADJUST to move the highlight to different images (CH up/down will change pages of the Thumbnail menu). Be sure to use the correct card slot.

Media Command™ and Memory Card Playback, continued
For MP3 or WMA Playlist Menu:
Figure 3

1.

Press GUIDE to display the Playlist menu.

2. Press ADJUST or to select different tracks (CH up/down will change pages of the Playlist). Use REW to go to the first track on the page and FF to go to the last track on the page. 3. Press PLAY to begin playback. The Playlist menu will be taken down. The song currently playing will be highlighted.

For MP3 or WMA Audio files: • Files recorded with sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. • Files recorded with fixed bit rates • File names with .mp3 or .wma extensions NOTES • During MP3 audio playback, audio from the card is sent to the A/V receiver as analog audio. Digital out is not available. • Repetitive noise may be present when playing WMA digital audio files from memory files. Media Setup Menu
Figure 4

Press DEVICE MENU at any time to display the Media Setup screen, where you can adjust the Slide show Display, Frequency, Interval or Playlist Frequency. For JPEG Picture Slide Show Setup • For JPEG picture slide show playback, select Automatic or Manual advance. For manual operation, press PLAY or ENTER on the remote control to advance each slide. • For automatic advance, select the frequency or number of times to show the complete slide show, Once, Twice or Continuously. • For automatic advance, select the interval time each slide is shown, for example, five seconds, or 30 seconds For MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist Setup Select the frequency or number of times to play the complete playlist. Once, Twice or Continuously. To exit, press DEVICE MENU on the remote control to redisplay the memory card screen.

Figure 3. Audio Playlist COMPATIBLE PICTURE OR AUDIO FILES: For JPEG Pictures up to 1 GB: 1. Still images recorded on digital cameras using the Exchangeable Image File Format, version 2.1 (EXIF 2.1) standard for digital still cameras and Design Rules for Camera File Systems version 1.0 (DCF 1.0) Some images opened and resaved on a computer may not play back or may not be able to display a picture in the thumbnail list because the computer program that opened and resaved the images changed the file to an incompatible format. 2. Standard digital images with a maximum size of 5 megapixels for each image, or 2560 x 1920 pixels. Pictures will be scaled to the TV display. Some pictures may be cropped to fit. 3. Full path file names can be no longer than 50 characters and must end in a .jpg extension. Not all 50 characters will display. Images stored on cards larger than 256MB can take a longer initial time to display.

JPEG images cannot be edited through the TV. Only name changes should be made on your PC to avoid file incompatibility problems. MP3s must have at least 32-kHz sampling rate.

IMPORTANT

Figure 4. Media Setup Menu

86

Chapter 6. Additional Features

Operation of PIP and POP
The Side-by-Side and PIP/POP features let you view pictures from two different sources at the same time. In summary: View as either main picture or sub-picture • • • • • • • • Analog channels Devices on Video/S-Video inputs Devices on Component inputs Devices on either HDMI input Digital channels received from CableCARD™ or either Antenna input TV Disc IEEE 1394 devices PC images Changing PIP/POP Device When PIP/POP is displayed, press PIP DEVICE to change the PIP/POP picture source device. A menu similar to the Device Selection menu will be displayed. Changing PIP/Side-by-Side Channels Press PIP CH to scroll up and down through memorized channels on ANT-1 and ANT-2. Exchanging Program Images Press EXCH to exchange the main picture and the PIP/ POP picture. Pictures from digital channels can only be shown as the main picture. PC images can only be the main picture. If you press EXCH while viewing images from a PC, the TV exchanges audio with the PIP but leaves the main image in place. Moving a PIP Image If no menus are on screen, press ADJUST to move the PIP display anywhere on the main screen. When the main picture is from a PC, the PIP can be moved through four designated positions. Automatic POP Switching During POP display, the TV cycles through memorized analog channels on Ant-1 or Ant-2 or displays “strobed” images from playback of other A/V components. Press PAUSE to pause or restart automatic POP switching. Selecting POP “Live” Image Press ADJUST to select a different POP “live” image (automatic POP switching must be paused.)

View as main picture only

Press PIP/POP to activate the PIP/POP option. Repeatedly press the PIP/POP button on the TV remote control and within seconds of each press, the PIP/POP cycles through the display options below. To turn PIP/POP off: • Press PIP/POP repeatedly until the TV returns to fullscreen mode. • Press PIP/POP and wait at least 10 seconds. Press PIP/POP again. The next time you activate PIP/POP, the last-used PIP/POP option will be displayed. Side-by-side pictures (Not available when PC is one source)

3 POP
(Not available when PC is one source)

PIP
(Available for PC with PC as main picture only)

Freezing the PIP and Side-by-Side Pictures Press PAUSE to freeze the PIP and side-by-side images. Press PAUSE again to return to a “live” image. IMPORTANT The Side-by-Side feature cannot show the picture from the same device or the same channel from the same antenna input on both sides. The main picture and a different subpicture cannot both be from Ant-2. Pictures from HDMI-1 and HDMI-2 cannot be shown together as main and subpictures A PC picture can only be the main picture.


Ant-1 2 XXXX Standard Stereo SAP TV-PG DLSV SQV1

PIP off

• •

Chapter 6. Additional Features

87

TV Display Formats
This is a widescreen TV, also known as a 16:9 TV. This shape reflects the new types of images available from HDTV and many DVDs. There are still many older style narrow-screen images (called 4:3 aspect ratio) you will encounter. While there will never be a perfect solution for displaying a narrow image on a wide screen, Mitsubishi offers several display formats from which to choose. Press FORMAT on the TV remote control to cycle through the available display formats. The last-used format for each device is used when you return to that device. Note: Not all formats are available for PIP/ POP. Side-by-Side is only available in Standard and Expand formats. Three-POP is available in Standard format only. PC formats vary depending on the PC signal.

Standard: This is the full-screen format. HDTV signals use this format. This format is useful for displaying Anamorphic DVDs that have 1.78:1 or 1.85:1 aspect ratios. Anamorphic DVDs that have a 2.35:1 aspect ratio are displayed with black bars at the top and bottom, but show the entire image correctly. Narrow (4:3) images are stretched evenly from side to side. Available for all signals. Expand: This enlarges the picture to fill the screen, cropping off some of the image at the top and bottom. This is useful for reducing the letter box top and bottom bars of non-anamorphic DVD images. Available for analog 480i, 480p and digital SD 4:3 signals only. Zoom: This enlarges the picture, cropping off some of the image at each side and top and bottom. This is useful for removing or reducing the black top and bottom bars on anamorphic DVDs with a 2.35:1 aspect ratio. Available for analog 480i and 480p and SD 4:3 signals only. Stretch: This format stretches a narrow (4:3) image across the screen; there is less stretch in the center than at the sides, however. This allows the entire narrow image to be displayed across the screen with less distortion than is seen in the Standard format. Available for analog 480i and 480p and SD 4:3 signals only. Stretch Plus: Similar to stretch mode, but to minimize distortions on the side, the picture is expanded to crop off portions of the top and bottom. When no PIP is displayed, you can press ADJUST up or down to vertically adjust the position of the picture. Available for analog 480i and 480p and SD 4:3 signals only. Narrow: This format displays narrow (4:3) images in their original shape, and adds stationary black side bars to fill the screen. Available for 480i, 480p and digital SD 4:3 signals only. Wide Expand: Enlarges the picture, cropping some of the image on both sides. This Expand format is useful to remove or reduce black side bars added to narrow images that are converted to 16:9 signals for digital broadcast. Available for analog 1080i, 720p, digital SD 16:9 and digital HD signals.

Format Definitions

DVD Definitions:

Anamorphic (or Enhanced for Wide-Screen TV’s): These DVDs are recorded in a special way to properly show widescreen images on 16:9 TV sets in the Standard format mode. This is the recommended choice. Non-Anamorphic (or :3, 1:33:1, Letter box or Full Screen): These DVDs are recorded for use with traditional shaped TVs. They may be full screen (4:3 or 1:33:1) which crops movies to fit the narrow TV, or Letter boxed, which adds black top and bottom bars. This information may or may not be listed on the DVD case. Some DVDs support both types of recordings. 

80i Signals: Traditional analog interlaced signals from or through ANT-1 and 2, INPUT 1 and 2, COMPONENT 1–3, and HDMI 1 and 2. 80p Signals: Progressive-scan analog DVD signals on COMPONENT inputs and HDMI 1 and 2. 720p & 1080i Signals: High-definition analog signals received through COMPONENT 1–3 and HDMI 1 and 2. These signals are always 16:9 (widescreen). SD :3: Standard-definition narrow-screen format signals from digital channels and IEEE 1394 devices. SD 16:9: Standard-definition widescreen format signals from digital channels and IEEE 1394 devices. HD: High-definition wide-screen format signals from digital channels and IEEE-1394 devices. These signals are always 16:9 (widescreen).

Signal Definitions

88

Chapter 6. Additional Features

TV Display Formats

Chapter 6. Additional Features

89

2 – 480i. V-Chip Ratings 8. Day and Time 10. Analog channel being received: If antenna being viewed 3. Status of D-VHS VCR or IEEE 1394 device Counter of D-VHS VCR Media type in D-VHS VCR Special message line (shows only when a special message is needed. Copy-Protection Status Possible: COPY FREE: Program can be recorded COPY ONCE: Program can be recorded COPY NO MORE: Program can never be recorded 1 2 6 3 5 Ant-1 2-1 XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX HD Standard  English TV-PG DLSV Copy Once SQV2 7 Monday 11:00 AM Sleep Timer: 30 TV Disc or Digital IEEE 139 Device 1.Standard. Additional Features .Standard. Screen format being used Possible: SD 4:3 . Audio Mute on (shown with digital signals) 2 1  6 3 12 11 Ant-1 3 XXXX 80i Standard Stereo SAP TV-PG DLSV SQV2 Monday 11:00 AM Sleep Timer: 30 XXXXXXXXX 5 7 8 ANT-1 3 9 10 13 MUTE Digital Program 1. Program name (if provided by TV Guide On Screen®) 13. Zoom. may be seen with Analog signals) 1 3 DVCR HD Standard English TV-PG DLSV Copy Once Play 01:20:15 2 DVHS Monday 11:00 AM Sleep Timer: 30 Special Message Line Note: When viewing TV Disc. Screen format being used Possible: Analog 480i /480p signals – Standard. change devices. 720p or 1080i 5. Please note that seldom or never do all of the different status indicators appear at the same time. Stretch Plus. SD 16:9 or HD 4. Narrow SD 16:9 or HD . Expand. Below are the most common displays. Narrow 720p/1080i signals . Program Name (if broadcast) 7. Antenna or Device being viewed 2. Channel name (if manually programmed) 4. or when you press the INFO button on the remote control. Analog Program 1. 480p. Wide Expand 5. Digital Major and Sub channel number 2.Standard. 2.On-Screen Information When you turn on the TV. Expand. press INFO a second time to display the TV Pause slider. change channels. Channel in SuperQuickView bank 2 9. Signal Type being broadcast/received Possible: SD 4:3. Stretch. Ant-2 or Input 1–3 – 480i Component 1. Digital Channel Name (only if broadcast) 3. Zoom. 3. Stretch Plus. PIP source and channel 12. the TV will display the current status. Sleep Timer remaining time 11. 4. Stereo and/or SAP being broadcast 7.  90 Chapter 6. Stretch. Signal Type being received Possible: Ant-1. Wide Expand 6. Language(s) being broadcast 6.

. . . . . . . . 92 Connecting a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC Display Formats . . . . . . . . 92 Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output Computer with a DVI Monitor Output . . Computer with a 15-Pin Monitor Output Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 7 Using the TV with a PC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 93 93 9 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. 3. Connect the Computer to the TV See the connection diagrams in this chapter to find the method best suited to your needs. 4. Press DEVICE again to close the menu. HorizPosition (Horizontal Position). This selection overrides the Auto Position selection. 4. See chapter 3 for more information. Perform the NetCommand PC setup described in step 2 under “Overview” on this page. 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the PC. Select the PC in the Device Selection menu 1 Press DEVICE to open the Device Selection menu. Figure 1 An HDMI-to-HDMI cable is required. This selection overrides the Auto Position selection. See Appendix A for signal compatibility. Connect an HDMI cable from HDMI 2 on the TV back panel to the PC’s HDMI output.Connecting a PC Overview 1. Connecting a Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output CAUTION: To ensure continued FCC compliance. Perform TV video adjustments Press VIDEO repeatedly until you see the PC video settings displayed on screen. 5. select Add and follow the on-screen prompts to add the PC. In the Connection for PC screen. It may be available at your local electronics retailer Computer with an HDMI Monitor Output 1. or at any time afterwards with the NetCommand Add function. IMPORTANT • • After connecting the PC. Fine Detail. This is not included with the TV. Do this either during initial NetCommand setup (in the Device Setup screen). 6. 2. (3) Highlight Change and press ENTER. Move the highlight to the PC icon. Advance to the finish screen to complete the change. Select the NetCommand Change option as follows: (1) Press TV MENU. b. In the Edit NetCommand screen. This selection overrides the Auto Position selection. 3. (2) Highlight the NetCommand icon and press ENTER. Manually adjust the vertical position of the PC. Press ENTER to automatically center the position of the PC video. Change the TV picture format Press FORMAT to cycle through the available picture formats. Your choices are: Auto Position. 92 Chapter 7. Change the resolution of the PC image Maximize the resolution while maintaining a suitable aspect ratio for the image. See the chart later in this chapter showing how various PC resolutions are displayed on the TV. VertPosition (Vertical Position). Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 only: a. activate the PC option in NetCommand. See the explanation later in this chapter. Using the TV with a PC . change TV Input from PC to HDMI-2. Perform NetCommand Setup for the PC • For first-time NetCommand setup: Start NetCommand setup as described in chapter 3 and check mark the PC check box in the Device Setup screen. 2. Both video and audio are provided through this single cable. 3. See chapter 3. • If NetCommand has already been set up: Press TV MENU and select the NetCommand icon. Manually adjust the picture quality of the PC. the user must use a shielded video interface or HDMI cable with bonded ferrite cores at both ends when using the PC input.

See Appendix A for signal compatibility. NOTE: The HDMI connection supports copy protection (HDCP). Connecting a Computer with DVI Monitor Output Figure 3. it is important to connect the adaptor to the DVI device for best performance. AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) 2 AUDIOLEFT/ (MONO) Figure 2. the user must use a shielded video interface or HDMI cable with bonded ferrite cores at both ends when using the PC input. These cables are not supplied. • CAUTION: To ensure continued FCC compliance. These are not included with the TV. Computer with a DVI Monitor Output Computer with a 15-Pin Monitor Output Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 Figure 3 A 15-pin PC monitor cable and stereo audio cables are required. Note: To receive the benefits of a digital A/V receiver. if available. 1. 1. or at any time afterwards with the NetCommand Add function. If the computer’s audio output is a single mini-jack. Do this either during initial NetCommand setup (in the Device Setup screen). See Appendix A for PC signal compatibility. connect your computer’s digital audio out. 2 2. Using the TV with a PC 93 . Connecting a computer with monitor output. Connect the L (left) and R (right) audio cables from the computer to INPUT DVI Analog Audio 2 on the TV back panel. If the computer’s audio output is a single mini-jack. Chapter 7. Please review your equipment instructions for DVI connectivity and compatibility. They may be available at your local electronics retailer. See chapter 3. Connect PC Monitor Out from the computer to PC INPUT on the TV back panel using a 15-pin PC monitor cable. a mini audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adaptor cable is needed to complete this connection. Connect the L (left) and R (right) audio cables from AUDIO OUT on the PC back panel to INPUT/ DVI Analog Audio 2 on the TV back panel. IMPORTANT • After connecting the PC. NOTE: If you are using a DVI/HDMI adaptor. activate the PC option in NetCommand. 2. Connect the DVI-to-HDMI cable (recommended) (or DVI/HDMI adaptor with an HDMI cable) from the PC DVI output to HDMI 2 on the TV back panel.Connecting a PC Figure 2 A DVI-to-HDMI cable or DVI/HDMI adaptor and HDMI cable and audio cables are required. a mini audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adaptor cable is needed to complete this connection. Some devices require that you connect to an analog input first before you can view on-screen menus and select DVI as the ouput. to a digital input on your digital A/V receiver.

5. Hint: Whenever the TV is powered on. Choose the Settings tab. 3. The instructions below are for setting the resolution on most PCs. As a reminder that the TV is powered on and that time is being added to the lamp’s elapsed hours. 5. Using the TV with a PC . 9 Chapter 7. 1. Change the resolution to the highest resolution with the aspect ratio best suited for the image. 1. Depending on your PC. Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 additionally support 1920 x 1080 signals on the 15-pin PC INPUT.Adjusting Image Resolution Adjusting Image Resolution Figure 4 Your Mitsubishi TV can display resolutions from standard VGA (640 x 480) through XGA (1024 x 768) at 60-Hz refresh rates. Select Display. select Settings. 2. 2. 4. • the Screen Resolution slider You may need to restart the PC for this change to take effect. Figure 4. See Appendix A in this book for more on compatible screen resolutions. 4. See the table on the next page showing possible PC formats. set the computer’s screen saver to a pattern that will display after several minutes of inactivity. adjust the resolution with either: • the Screen area slider. PC resolution XGA selection 3. Select Control Panel. In the PC’s Start menu. the lamp is in use. even if the TV screen appears dark.

Using the TV with a PC 95 .PC Display Formats Format VGA 640 X 480 16 X 9 Standard 1696 X 960  X 3 Standard 1280 X 960 WVGA 848 X 480 1696 X 960 1280 X 960 SVGA 800 X 600 1702 X 960 1280 X 960 WSVGA 1064 X 600 1702 X 960 1280 X 960 Format XGA 1024 X 768 Standard Zoom 102 X 768 1280 X 960 PC720p 1280 X 720 WXGA 1365 X 768 (Accepted via PC Input on models WD-62927 and WD-73927) 1280 X 720 1706 X 960 1365 X 768 1706 X 960 Additional Formats Accepted via PC Input on WD-62927 and WD-73927 Format SXGA 1280 X 1024 1200 X 960 1280 X 102 Reduce Standard PC 1080p 1920 X 1080 1706 X 960 1920 X 1080 Chapter 7.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendices Appendix A: Appendix B: Appendix C: Appendix D: Appendix E: Appendix F: Appendix G: Appendix H: Appendix I: Appendix J: Specifications . Cleaning and Service . . . . Device Control with NetCommand® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetCommand® Specialized Device Keys . . . Remote Control Programming Codes . . . . . . . Diamond Shield Removal and Installation. . . Bypassing the V-Chip Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording and Viewing Combinations . . . . 98 100 101 103 106 108 109 111 11 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

60-Hz XGA (1024 x 768).843” chip. When using an authorized CableCARD. Inputs Antenna/Cable input Qty.1 & EIA 770.3 Standard Levels and Timing) Y: 1. 2 HDMI (digital video/audio). UHF 14–69 Analog Cable: 1–125 Digital Cable: 1–135 Over the Air: Analog NTSC.0 Vp-p (includes sync). 60-Hz W-VGA (848 x 480). 480p. 75-ohm Pr: 700 mV p-p. Mitsubishi may offer software updates to expand the features or operation of this TV.286 Vp-p (burst signal). the channel numbers are determined by the cable company. Qty. If there is no channel number information included from the broadcaster or cable company. with your model and serial number. Digital ATSC with sub-channels (all 18 video formats) Cable: Analog NTSC (non-scrambled) Digital QAM 64 and 256 with sub-channels (nonscrambled) CableCARD™: Authorized scrambled and non-scrambled digital channels Channel Type Note for Digital Channels: The channel numbers displayed on screen are determined by the broadcaster or cable company and can vary from the standard frequency number. Qty. 60-Hz 1280 x 720. 60-Hz SVGA (800 x 600). 43-k ohm 98 Appendices . Qty.com. Video: 480i. 2 rear) Signal Type Component Video (Y/Pr/Pb). 8 pairs RCA Pin Plug 500 mV (full scale). 1920 x 1080 pixels with Smooth Picture™ 150-watt VIP type Over-the-Air: VHF 2–13. 720p. 60-Hz W-SVGA (1064 x 600).2 480i. 1080i Audio: PCM stereo HDMI 1: Not intended for use with personal computers. 2 Signal Type F connector. 480p. 1.0 V p-p.3 720p and 1080i (video standards) Signal Type Audio Inputs: Qty. 60-Hz (EIA standards) Video/S-Video.Appendix A: Specifications From time to time. 0. When these updates are available they will be announced on our web site. VGA (640 x 480). 3 sets Video: RCA Pin Plug. Mitsubishi-tv. 75 ohm S-Video: Four-Pin DIN Plug Y: 1. EIA 770. you may receive written notification of available software updates. 75-ohm HDMI standard connector HDMI EIA-861B standard for digital audio and video. 75-ohm Pb: 700 mV p-p. If you return your owner’s registration card. HDMI 2: Accepts PC input.0 Vp-p 75-ohm C: 0. TV Specifications Projection System Lamp Channel Frequency Reception DLP. 75-ohm EIA-770. 75-ohm NTSC 480i only RCA Pin Plug (EIA-770. 3 each (1 front. then the TV will create a channel number based on the frequency number as the main channel number and the program number as the sub-channel number.

75-ohm NTSC 480i only RCA Pin Plug. Qty. 310 watts Appendices 99 . continued PC Input (RGB).2" D. Mitsubishi cannot be responsible for their efforts. Dolby Digital. Qty. as well as compatibility testing with other products.5 Vrms (full scale) for digital sources. 60-Hz SXGA (1280 x 1024). 60-Hz WSVGA (1064 x 600). is not intended for use with personal computers or devices outputting video signals with computer resolutions. 2 pairs Video: RCA Pin Plug 1. 44. 146 lbs. S400 Qty. 350 watts 40. As other manufacturers distribute products that use the IEEE 139 AV/C standards.5 Vrms + 0. 1 Signal Type Audio:. 60-Hz (EIA Standards) Outputs Video. and control. Any compatibility problems with other manufacturers products should be brought to the attention of those manufacturers. Mitsubishi D-VHS VCRs are fully compatible with this TV in audio. Signal Type. making the product easier to use. 60-Hz SVGA (800 x 600).2".8" H x 69. extended and high definition video. This exciting new networking and control technology is designed to provide high-performance digital connections and product control. 1. 60-Hz 720 P 1280 x 720. 1 IEEE 139. PCM IEEE 1394 Four-Pin-Type Terminal.5" round WD-62827 WD-62927 WD-73827 WD-73927 Power Consumption WD-62827 WD-62927 WD-73827 WD-73927 NetCommand® IEEE 139 System Compatibility: This television is designed to conform to IEEE 139 AV/C Software standards in effect at the time of development. they will be responsible for developing products that meet the standards of the technology. Qty. however. 1 D-Subminiature. 500 mV rms + 200 mV (full scale) for analog sources.Appendix A: Specifications. 2 Woofers 5.8" W x 21.3" D. Qty. 150 lbs. 15-Pin PC Monitor Input VGA (640 x 480).5" H x 59. 60-Hz (EIA standards) 1080P 1920 x 1080. HDMI input 1. Qty. digital audio and HDCP copy protection. 2 rear) Audio/Speakers Dimensions: RCA Pin Plug. 3 (1 front. 60-Hz XGA (1024 x 768). 60-Hz WXGA (1365 x 768). video. and therefore cannot promise compatibility with these other products. The HDMI input is compliant with EIA-861B standards for standard.5" x 2. 2 Tweeters 1. 60-Hz WVGA (848 x 480).6" W x 20. Digital Interfaces: Digital Audio Output. Qty.0 Vp-p.

7.3.9.5.7. Power and Power Off).6.2. learn the Enter key used for channel selection here.0 Input Change Digital Sub channel Chapter Skip Forward Chapter Skip Reverse NAME ON TV REMOTE POWER** POWER** VOL VOL MUTE GUIDE** GUIDE** Automatic (when device is selected) CHAN CHAN QV GUIDE ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ENT DEVICE MENU CANCEL INFO CHAN CHAN PLAY STOP FF REW PAUSE REC ENT FORMAT** FORMAT** 1.5.9.3. The ENT button on the remote sends the correct IR code when digits are entered. When the original remote control uses a single button for both functions.Appendix B: NetCommand® Specialized Device Keys A/V RECEIVER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X * X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X CABLE or SAT X X VCR X X DVD X X LEARNING SCREEN CHECK BOX NAME Power* Power (Off)* Volume Up Volume Down Mute Analog to Digital* Digital to Analog* Input (1-7) Channel Up Channel Down Recall Guide Adjust Up Adjust Down Adjust Left Adjust Right Enter Menu Cancel Info Page Up Page Down Play Stop Forward Rewind Pause Record Enter (digits)† Low Speed Out* High Speed Out* 1.7. Press the CANCEL button on the remote to add the separator ** This function is performed only when the Device Selection Menu is displayed and the device icon is highlighted.2.8.6.2. † If there are two Enter keys.3.0 GUIDE** CANCEL CHAN CHAN *** *** These are paired functions (e.9. ‡ Learn the subchannel separator if a special key is used to add a separator (dash or dot) in a digital channel. *** Channel Up/Down as Guide Page Up/Down happens only after pressing GUIDE and returns to channel functions after pressing ENTER or CANCEL.4.8. learn only the first of the paired functions.g.4.6.0 Input Sub channel separator‡ Chapter + Chapter FUNCTION Power On or Power On/Off Power Off Volume Up Volume Down Mute Analog/Digital Switch Digital/Analog Switch AVR Input Select Channel Scan Up Channel Scan Down Last Channel Recall Guide Arrow/move Up Arrow/move Down Arrow/move Left Arrow/move Right Enter/Select Device Menu or Setup Menu Cancel or Exit Status Information Display Guide Page Up Guide Page Down Play Stop Fast Forward/Fwd Search Rewind/Reverse Search Pause Record Enter for channel numbers Low Speed 480i out Hi Speed 480p/1080i out 1.5.4. 100 Appendices .8.

When you are prompted for your pass code. press the number 9 and QV buttons on the TV remote control at the same time. IMPORTANT Cut along the dotted line and file bypass instructions in a safe place for future reference. IMPORTANT When changing or deleting your pass code. Deactivating the Front Button Lock Press and hold the MENU button on the TV front panel for over eight seconds. or enter the V-Chip Lock menus. If you forget your pass code.Appendix C: Bypassing the V. This process temporarily unlocks the TV When entering the V-Chip Lock menu. this process deletes your old pass code and prompts you to enter a new pass code. Press HOME to exit the menu. you must use the remote control included with this TV. you need your pass code to view a V-Chip locked program. you can view the locked TV without entering your pass code. view the locked TV. You cannot use a Mitsubishi remote control from another component or a “universal” remote. cancel the lock. Appendices 101 .Chip Lock Lock Bypass Instructions Have Been Filed for Future Reference Bypassing the V-Chip Lock After you set the lock.

This page intentionally blank 102 Appendices .

235. 242. 228 224. 4. 124. 359. Press and hold POWER on the remote control. Move the slide switch at the top of the remote to the product you want to control. 237 354. 207 353 219. 210 221. GENERAL INSTRUMENT/ JERROLD/MOTOROLA 121. 120. 202. 227. 362 223. 113 122 119. 229 232. 105 128. 122 HAMLIN 112 HITACHI 103. 106. 133. If the equipment responds. PANASONIC 114 PARAGON 117 128. 129. 361 204 213 215. 106. 218. 3. and then release POWER. 208 363 357 227. 116 PULSAR 105 RCA 115 REGAL 112 REMBRANDT 105. 130. it is now programmed to send NetCommand signals to the TV so the TV can control the IEEE 1394 devices and NetCommand-supported or learned IR devices. 355 222. 133. 124 MACOM 103. 244 Programming the Remote to Control NetCommand A/V Products 1. 217 209. 146 MEMOREX 130 MOVIETIME 105. the remote control is properly programmed to operate the equipment. 138 MOTOROLA 123. 249. 214. 233 200. 3. 2. 106. 236.Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes IMPORTANT The remote control may return to its initial setting when the batteries are changed. You may need to reprogram. 130. 241 351 352 234. 360 216 206. 245. 364. and then release the POWER button on the remote control. 230 366 203. 122. 240. 365 212. Point the remote control at the equipment and press the POWER button. 218. 230 219. repeat steps 2–4 with the next three-digit code listed in step 3 for your equipment. 123. 211. 138 SAMSUNG 105 SONY 147. 211. 106. 221 203. Appendices 103 . 107 112. 012. PHILIPS 138 PIONEER 101. 127. 221 356 223. 218. 130. 239 234. 223. 219 232. 104. 107 128. If the equipment does not respond. 226. Cable Boxes Cable Brand ABC ARCHER CABLEVIEW CITIZEN COLOR VOICE COMTRONICS CURTIS DIAMOND EAGLE GCBRAND GE GEMINI Code 124 125 105. Enter the first three digit code listed for your equipment. When the remote control is in the TV position. Programming the Remote to Control Other Brands of Audio and Video Products 1. Enter the three digit code of 935. 108 MAGNAVOX 128. 129. 113 124. Move the slide switch at the top of the remote to the TV position. 243. 227. 205. This is the default setting for the remote control. 177 ZENITH/DRAKE SATELLITE 100 2. 106. 105. Press and hold POWER on the remote control. 129. 213. 125 129 105 112. 014 225. 107. 246. 248 205. 126. 4. 131. 247 203. 125. A/V Receivers A/V Receiver Brand MITSUBISHI AIWA BOSE B&K DENON FISHER GARRARD HARMAN KARDON JENSEN JVC KENWOOD KLH KOSS MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MCINTOSH NAKAMICHI ONKYO OPTIMUS PANASONIC PARASOUND PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO QUASAR RCA ROTEL SANSUI SHARP SHERWOOD SONY TEAC TECHNICS VICTOR YAMAHA Code 010. 107. 231. 350. 011. 231. 233 201. 129. 013. 130.

274 266. 060. 031 041. 020. 053 046. 029 051. 176 HITACHI 173. 049. 028.127. 047 020. 022.E. 047 044. 031 064. 273 251 282. 021. 038. 172 PROSCAN 176. 021. 043. 289 285 251 267. continued Cable Boxes.100 Code 003 261. 062. 044 030. 043. 053 041. 029. 062 020. 047 063. 044. 042 044. 025. 030. 045. 022.120. 067. 027 047. 055 048. 172 WEBTV 187 ZENITH/LG 193 VECTOR RESEARCH 10 Appendices . 031 030. 030. 002 049.121. 020. 049. 040 043. 026 046.TERRESTRIAL 192 SONY 177 STAR CHOICE 173 TOSHIBA 170.121. 064. 055. 040. 256 292 251 261 263 260 264 254. 046 043. 070. 180.125. 074. 044. 040 025. 071 026 043. 042.124. 270 257 271.130 117. 028. 179. 026. 078 030. 066 044. 283 286 250. 042. 025. 279 251 253 291 250. 031 065 063. 056. 272. 050.120. 069. 061. 021. 183. 287 259 VCRs VCR Brand MITSUBISHI AKAI AUDIO DYNAMIC BELL & HOWELL BROKSONIC CANON CITIZEN CRAIG CURTIS MATHES DAEWOO DBX DIMENSIA EMERSON FISHER FUNAI GE GO VIDEO GOLDSTAR HITACHI INSTANT REPLAY JVC KENWOOD LXI MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MARTA MEMOREX MGA MINOLTA MULTITECH NEC OLYMPIC OPTIMUS ORION PANASONIC PENNEY PENTAX PHILCO PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN QUASAR RADIO SHACK RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SANSUI SANYO SCOTT SEARS SHARP SIGNATURE 2000 SONY SV2000 SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC TASHIRO TATUNG TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA TOSHIBA TOTEVISION WARDS YAMAHA ZENITH Code 001. 179. 044 043 065. 065 067.125. 043. 060. 029.126. 029. 268 250 258. 047 030. 185 RCA 176. 067. 056 047. 185 SAMSUNG .Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes. 040 053. 034. 181.122 105 101. 040. 180. 031 047.101 105 119. 066. 044. 047. 113. 044. 029 021. 031 044. 272. 043.126. 029. 047. 044. 026 065. 280 263. 029 060. 060. 041.105 135. 043. 077 030. 073. 027. 041. 046. 047 021. 031. 065. 051.125. 066 026 031 055. 184 HNS (Hughes) 173 JVC (ECHOSTAR) 175 MAGNAVOX 171. 182. 194 119.120. 025. 056. 276. 044 044.126.124. 047 057. 045 026 025. 079 057. 026. 043 030. 043. 172 PANASONIC 174 PHILIPS 171. 043. 023. continued SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA SIGNATURE SLMARK SPRUCER STARCOM STARGATE TELEVIEW TOCOM TOSHIBA UNIKA UNITED CABLE UNIVERSAL VIDEOWAY VIEWSTAR ZENITH 112. 026 DVD Players DVD Brand MITSUBISHI AIWA APEX BOSE DENON FERGUSON HARMAN KARDON HITACHI JVC KENWOOD MINTEK NORDMENDE ONKYO ORITRON PANASONIC PHILIPS/MAGNAVOX PIONEER RCA/GE/PROSCAN ROTEL SABA SAMSUNG SAMPO SHARP SYLVANIA SONY THOMSON TOSHIBA V INC. 278. 062. 020. 075 047 051.122 122 106 129. 044. 036 031 025. 031. 029. 060. 061. 056. 028. 046. 046. 025. 047 047 026 030. 039. 040 025. 027. 044. 290 252 251. 188 EXPRESS VU 175 G. 288 . 043 048.127. 026 025. 076. 043. 026. 049.124. 065. 068. 063 051. 044. 068.121. 065. 051. 065. 190. 044 053. 020 055. 040 025. 044. 031 026 044. 068. 189. 065 051. 022. 046. 035. 022. (BRAVO D1) YAMAHA ZENITH Satellite Receivers/SAT/DTV Brand MITSUBISHI Code 006 (same as 173) same ) ECHOSTAR/DISH NETWORK 175. 067. 191 UNIDEN 171. 020.136 104 125 119. 031 020. 253.122 105.127. 053.

Appendix D: Remote Control Programming Codes, continued
When your remote control has been programmed to operate another manufacturer’s product, the function performed on each layer can vary. The most common functions are: VCR • POWER • CHANNEL up/down • PLAY • REC • PAUSE • STOP • FF/FWD • REW/REV Mitsubishi VCRs will be compatible with some additional buttons Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers • POWER • CHANNEL up/down • 0-9 number buttons (on some models) • ENTER (on some models) • CANCEL (on some models) • ADJUST up/down/ left/right (on some models) • GUIDE (on some models) A/V Receivers • POWER • VOLUME • MUTE Mitsubishi A/V Receivers • Direct Input Selection buttons: numbers, SQV and QV (on some models) Mitsubishi CD Players (not all functions for all models) • PLAY • FF/FWD • REW/REV • PAUSE • STOP DVD and Laser Disc Players (not all functions for all models) • POWER • MENU • 0-9 number buttons (on some models) • PLAY • STOP • ARROW up/down/left/right (on some models) • FF/FWD • REW/REV • PAUSE • CANCEL (on some models) • ENTER • CHANNEL (on some models)

IMPORTANT
Some manufacturers may change their products, or they may use more than one remote control system. If this is the case, the TV remote control may not be able to operate your VCR, DVD, cable box, satellite receiver, or A/V receiver. After entering the correct codes in each position of the remote control, use the slide switch to select which product will respond when an operational button is pressed. Only one of the below devices is allowed for each slide switch position. TV position: TV, NetCommand® Controlled Devices Cable/SAT/DTV position: Cable box Satellite receiver DTV receiver VCR position: VCR DVD position: DVD LD Player Audio position: A/V receiver Mitsubishi CD player If you have a Mitsubishi A/V receiver, the audio position may be used in conjunction with select Mitsubishi CD players. Your audio position must be programmed to 010.

Appendices

105

Appendix E: Device Control with NetCommand®

NetCommand Compatible Traditional Devices (Analog)
When Device Selection Menu is Displayed and the Device is Highlighted (Yellow Outline)
Device Remote Control Button
A/V RECEIVER VCR DVD CABLE BOX/SAT

POWER GUIDE

Power On/Off (toggle) Changes between digital and analog audio n/a

Power On/Off (toggle) Changes VCR inputs

Power On/Off (toggle) n/a

Power On/Off (toggle) Changes antenna inputs (RCA model DTC-100 only)

FORMAT

n/a

Changes output between interlaced and progressive

Changes output between HD and SD select models

When NetCommand® Compatible Traditional Device is Viewed or Played
Device Remote Control Button
A/V RECEIVER VCR DVD CABLE/SAT

CH up/down VOL up/down MUTE 0-9 (digits) QV DEVICE Menu HOME ENTER CANCEL GUIDE ADJUST PLAY STOP RECORD REW/REV FF/FWD
Volume Up/Down Mute On/Off

Channel up/down

Skip Forward/Backwards Chapter or Track

Channel up/down Page up/down when guide showing

number functions 1st press Transport Menu, 2nd press Setup Menu display

number functions 1st press Transport Menu, 2nd press Setup Menu display Enter or select

number functions Last Channel Recall Setup menu display or Action function Enter or select Exit or return Channel Guide up/down left/right

Counter Reset

Exit or return Disc menu display up/down left/right

Play Stop Record Rewind/Reverse Fast Forward or Fast Play

Play Stop Reverse Fast Play

106

Appendices

Appendix E: Device Control with NetCommand®, continued

IEEE 139 Devices
When Device Selection Menu is Displayed and the Device is Highlighted (Yellow Outline)
Device Remote Control Button
TUNER/ CABLE BOX/ SAT A/V DISC DVCR AMPLIFIER

POWER GUIDE FORMAT

Power On/Off (toggle) n/a n/a

Power On/Off (toggle) n/a n/a

Power On/Off (toggle) n/a n/a

Power On/Off (toggle) n/a n/a

When an IEEE 139 Device is Viewed or Played
Device Remote Control Button
CABLE/SAT TV Disc or A/V DISC DVCR AMPLIFIER

CH up/down VOL up/down MUTE 0-9 (digits) QV DEVICE Menu HOME ENTER CANCEL GUIDE ADJUST

Channel up/down

Page up/down (when track list is displayed)

Index search forward/reverse (if supported by DVCR) Volume Up/Down Mute On/Off

number functions Last Channel Recall n/a Exit menus/displays Enter or select Cancel function Digital Channel Guide up/down left/right

Search by time (when followed by ENTER) Transport Menu redisplay Exit menus/displays Enter or select Cancel function Track or program list display Skip Forward 30 seconds (during playback) Skip Backwards 12 seconds (during playback) Skip to end or beginning of program Page up/down in track list Play Stop Record Transport Menu redisplay Exit menus/displays Enter or select Cancel function or Counter Reset Program Guide up/down left/right up/down left/right Device Menu Exit menus/displays Enter or select Cancel function

PLAY STOP RECORD REW/REV FF/FWD

Play Stop Record

Reverse picture scan or Slow Play Fast picture scan or Fast Play

Reverse or Slow Play Fast Play

Appendices

107

lightly moistened with water. Do not allow liquid to drip down the grooves of the screen. Rinse with a second cloth moistened only with water. • • DO NOT adjust any controls other than those described in this Owner’s Guide. following the grooves in the screen. wiping gently in an up and down motion. Dry with a second dry. turn off the TV and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. If you are unable to correct a problem with your TV. 108 Appendices . soft. not just sections of the screen. General Cleaning Warnings • • • • • DO NOT allow liquid to enter the TV through the ventilation slots or any crevice. Wipe it gently. please use the following guidelines: First. non-scratching duster will keep your TV clean. WD-73927). bleach. non-abrasive cloth such as cotton flannel or a clean cloth diaper. Damage caused to the TV by non-authorized changes or changes to these menus made by non-authorized persons are not covered under warranty. benzine. as some liquid may enter the TV between the screen and the screen frame. alcohol. soft. non-abrasive cloth. DO NOT use any cleaners with ammonia. to the water used to moisten the cloth. You may purchase Mitsubishi Screen Cleaner. Models WD-62927. WD-73927 • Clean with a soft non-abrasive cloth moistened with water only. For oily dirt. DO NOT scrub or rub the TV harshly. or thinners as these can dull the surfaces. by calling (800) 553-7278. DO NOT spray liquids or cleaners directly on the TV’s surfaces. If cleaning beyond this is needed. such as dishwashing detergent. non-abrasive cloth. Cleaning Normally. part number CLEANER-VSS. light dusting with a dry. Top and Sides of the TV • • Gently wipe down your TV with a soft. add a few drops of mild liquid detergent. Dry with a third dry.Appendix F: Cleaning and Service IMPORTANT DO NOT use any kind of abrasive cleaner on the surface of the TV screen or Diamond Shield. Clean the entire screen evenly. Diamond Shield™ Screen • • • • Follow the instructions for the top and sides. consult your Mitsubishi dealer or a Mitsubishi Authorized Warranty Service Center. Service Menus not described and shown in this owner’s guide are designed for factory use and for authorized service personnel. Avoid using this cleaner on the Diamond Shield (models WD-62927. DO NOT use any strong or abrasive cleaners as these can scratch the surfaces. DO NOT remove the protective back cover of your TV.

LAMP LIFE The light source for this television is a lamp. you must reset the lamp reminder through the TV Setup menu. as it may cause fire or electrical shock. TOUCH THE LAMP CARTRIDGE BY THE HANDLE ONLY BURN DANGER! Do not touch the glass parts of the lamp cartridge. press POWER to turn it off. you may continue to use the current lamp until it stops working. Mitsubishi warrants the lamp for one (1) year from date of the original purchase at retail.Appendix G: Lamp Cartridge Replacement CAUTION During normal operation. unplug the AC cord of the TV and contact your dealer for service. WARNING: Do not remove the lamp cartridge immediately after turning off the television. Install the lamp cartridge securely. the surfaces inside the TV near the lamp are extremely hot.org. You may get burned because of the lamp’s high temperature. Failure to do so may cause a fire.eiae. that the lamp will last significantly longer than this. If you wish. causing injuries or burns. The lamp in this product contains mercury. Otherwise. serial number. It is likely. The actual life of the lamp in this television can vary. CAUTION: If the television is on. Allow the television to cool for one hour before attempting to replace the lamp cartridge. the warning message will appear again earlier than necessary. the lamp warning message will reappear sooner than necessary. Please have model number. Allow the television to cool for one hour before attempting to replace the lamp cartridge. Oils from your fingers may cause premature lamp failure. Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations. which is part of a lamp cartridge assembly. and your viewing patterns. as does turning the television on and off frequently. If any object is inserted into the opening. Do not touch the lamp glass element. For disposal or recycling information. TO ORDER A NEW LAMP: While Under Warranty Call (800) 332-2119. Order lamp part number 915P027010. Careless treatment can result in injury or fire. Do not remove the lamp cartridge except when replacing it. and TV purchase date available. After you change the lamp cartridge. When the end of the lamp’s average life is approaching. Do not touch the lamp glass elements. IMPORTANT Reset the lamp hours through the TV setup menu each time you replace the lamp cartridge. After Warranty Call (800) 553-7278. based on the lamp itself. however. Be sure not to insert any metal or flammable object into the lamp cartridge opening. It may be very hot and break. the air temperature around the TV while it is operating. Warmer air or poor ventilation shortens the lamp life. Appendices 109 . Otherwise. please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance at: www. the TV displays a warning message for one minute when you power on the TV. The message will reappear the next five times you turn on the TV.

continued WARNING THE GRILLE/COVER IS PROVIDED WITH AN INTERLOCK TO REDUCE THE RISK OF EXCESSIVE ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION. Without tilting or putting down the lamp cartridge. See figures 2 and 3. See figure 1. 11. AVOID OVERTIGHTENING! 9. c. Reset the Lamp Reminder from the TV Setup menu as follows: a. Close the bag while being careful that no glass particles fall out. With either your fingers or the screwdriver. 2. Fully open up the bag supplied with the replacement lamp and set the opened bag aside. 3. 1. DO NOT DEFEAT ITS PURPOSE OR ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE TV WITHOUT REMOVING THE GRILLE/COVER COMPLETELY. Do not dispose of the old lamp with common trash. b. Push on the cartridge housing until it is fully seated. Do not touch the glass parts of the new lamp cartridge. use only two fingers for final tightening. Figure 1. If using a screwdriver. insert it into the opened bag. Move the highlight to Lamp Reminder. Press TV MENU to open the Setup menu. 110 Appendices . loosen the three shiny screws securing the lamp cartridge until they disengage from the mating threads. 6. Handle Figure 3. These are captive screws and cannot be separated from the lamp cartridge. After the lamp has cooled.eiae. 8. AS THIS LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY. Turn TV power off and allow the lamp to cool at least one hour before proceeding.com for lampdisposal or recycling instructions. 7. 4. With a large flat-blade screwdriver.Appendix G: Lamp Cartridge Replacement. 12. CAUTION: Do not tilt or rotate the cartridge. 10. Insert the new cartridge into the TV in the same orientation as the old cartridge. Note the orientation of the cartridge. Press ENTER twice. Contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance at www. gently tighten the three screws. as small glass fragments may fall out. remove the plastic air exhaust grille/cover by removing two screws with a #2 (large) Phillips screwdriver. WASH YOUR HANDS THOROUGHLY. Replace the plastic grille/cover and retaining screws. Grasp the wire handle of the lamp cartridge and pull the old cartridge straight out towards you. Figure 2. 5.

Figure 1. Models WD-62927 and WD-73927 come from the factory with the Diamond Shield installed.Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation The Diamond Shield ™ is an optional protective cover for the front of the TV screen. remove the screws that secure the top plate and lift off the plate. Soft cotton gloves Note: Use care to avoid scratching the TV screen or Diamond Shield. Remove the screws securing the top plate and lift off the plate. Locating the clips Figure 2. Appendices 111 . This procedure is best performed by two people. Six clips hold the Diamond Shield on the TV. See figures 2 and 3. See figure 3 detail Diamond Shield Slide card in channel to locate clips. Note the location of the six clips that hold the Diamond Shield in place. An expired credit card or similar expendable card works well. The clips are visible at the edge of the Diamond Shield. Slide the card along the channel until it meets each clip. 2. For Models WD-62827 and 73827. You need the following for this procedure: Trim kit (included with the TV) Phillips screwdriver Small plastic card or plastic putty knife. See figure 1. Figure 3. Keep the plate and screws for reuse. the Diamond Shield may be purchased separately. Using a Phillips screwdriver. These instructions explain removal and installation of the Diamond Shield™ and the decorative trim that covers gaps around the TV screen when the shield not installed. Top Plate Remove the Shield 1.

Follow these steps: (1) Refer to figure 4. dust-free area. With the trim piece resting in the channel. (2) Insert the card into the channel. alongside the clip. Store the Diamond Shield protected from scratches in a clean. Install the lower trim piece as follows: (1) Center the trim piece in front of the TV. Hold the plastic card vertically. insert the card alongside the clip at the angle shown. a. notched side down. and set it in the channel below the screen. away from the middle of the screen. Press down firmly on the top edge of the trim piece to push it snugly into place over the raised lip and into the channel. angled slightly toward the middle of the screen. TV Screen Trim Piece Raised Lip Channel Figure 7. starting with the top clip. Gently press the trim piece against the TV frame. Pry the clip out of the channel. 5. See figure 6. b. c. Figure 6. 112 Appendices . Push the trim up slightly to clear the raised lip. When all clips are released. Figure 5. Release the six clips that hold the Diamond Shield in place. To do this. and remove the Diamond shield. Be sure to press along the entire length of the trim to fully seat it. Top View Note Angle of Card Top View Diamond Shield Clip Notched edge down Install Trim Note: Install the trim pieces in the order described here.Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation. Angle card toward shield before inserting Figure 4. 4. continued 3. 6. To release the clip. Work on one side at a time. and pry out the clip. notched edge down. lift. While keeping the card pressed in on the clip. lift the shield up out of the lower channel and away from the TV. Center the trim piece. The lower trim piece fits snugly into the channel and over the raised lip that runs along the bottom of the TV screen. and set it in the channel below the screen. WARNING Sharp edges! Always wear gloves to handle. install. (2) Refer to figure 7. hook the trim piece onto the raised lip at the bottom edge of the TV screen. angle the card outward. (3) Refer to figure 5.

9. Pry off the lower trim piece last. See figure 1. Hook the ends of the trim piece over the raised lip at the top and side of the TV screen. 4. (2) While keeping the end of the trim hooked on the raised lip. Press the full length of the trim onto the raised lip. Set the top plate in position and secure it with the original screws. Keep the plate and screws for reuse. Pull off the four trim pieces surrounding the TV screen. (2) Push the full length of the trim in place over the raised lip. (4) Push the top end of the trim up against the edge of the screen. 2. (3) Hold the bottom end of the trim in place and hook the top end on the raised lip that runs along the top edge of the screen. 8. Support the Diamond Shield at both ends and set it into the channel located below the TV screen. slide the trim down until it meets the lower trim piece. See figure 10. Pry up from the notches at both ends Figure 10. (5) Press the outer edge of the trim so that the entire length snaps into place. Pry the lower trim piece off from the notches at both ends. remove the screws that secure the top plate and lift off the plate. 5.Appendix H: Diamond Shield Removal and Installation. Using a Phillips screwdriver. 3. Press the shield clips into the channels running alongside the screen. Step (1) Hook the lower end over the raised lip. Appendices 113 . Figure 9. Refer to figure 8 and install the two side-trim pieces as follows: (1) Hook the lower end of the trim over the raised lip running down the side of the TV screen. Center the upper trim piece and press it onto the raised lip that runs along the top of the TV screen Install the Diamond Shield 1. Step () Figure 8. Step (3) Hook the top end over the raised lip. The trim piece may bow out slightly. continued 7. Set the top plate in position and secure it with the original screws. Refer to figure 9 and install the upper trim piece as follows: (1) Center the upper trim piece in front of the TV and hook both ends of the trim on the raised lip running along the top of the TV screen.

Analog VCR Connected to Audio and Video Record Outputs You can watch any one of these (viewing device) When recording this (source device) Ant-1 Air/Cable Analog or Digital Channel Ant-1 CableCARD Analog or Digital Channel Ant-2 Air/Cable Analog or Digital Channel Input 1–3 Video or S-Video Device IEEE-139 Device Component 1–3 HDMI Device Same as Recording Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ant-1 Channels Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ant-2 Channels Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Input 1–3 Devices Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Component IEEE-1394 1–3 Devices Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes. same as recording HDMI Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (same channel only) (same channel only) Cannot record from this source Cannot record from this source Digital VCR or A/V Disc Connected to IEEE-139 Port You can watch any one of these (viewing device) When recording this (source device) Ant-1 Air/Cable Analog or Digital Channel Ant-1 CableCARD Analog or Digital Channel Ant-2 Air/Cable Analog or Digital Channel Input 1–3 Video or S-Video Device IEEE-139 Device Component 1–3 HDMI Device Same as Recording Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ant-1 Channels Yes Yes Ant-2 Channels Yes Yes Yes Input 1–3 Devices Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Component IEEE-1394 1–3 Devices Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes HDMI Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (same channel only) Yes Yes Yes (same channel only) Yes Yes Cannot record from this source Cannot record from this source 11 Appendices .Appendix I: Recording and Viewing Combinations The tables in this appendix show which program sources you can watch while a recording is in progress.

TV functions do not respond to the remote control Use the System Reset button. TV turned itself off and the light on the front panel started to blink. • Make sure the selected device is turned on. • The clock may not be set. 7. Only memorized analog channels can be named. The TV takes several seconds to respond. • Check that the TV is turned to the correct device or antenna for that channel by pressing the DEVICE button. V-Chip is not working. either change the physical connections on the back panel. 6. Remarks • • • • • • • • Check that the batteries are installed correctly. or to front panel control and TV will not power off. Use a 4-digit number for an over-the-air digital channel. The TV remote control does not work. If this happens frequently. 8. When a device is selected from the Device Selection menu.Appendix J: Troubleshooting General TV Operation Symptom 1. Name options not available for some channels. Use a 6-digit number for digital cable channels (your cable service must be able to recognize 6-digit channel numbers). • Use number keys instead of CHANNEL up/down. 9. press TV MENU and then enter the numbers 999 to display the Host ID and CableCARD™ ID information. 11. obtain an AC line power conditioner/surge protector. • Momentary power fluctuation caused the TV to turn off to prevent damage. then press Power again. 10. • If you cannot tune to a virtual digital channel even though the TV has already memorized digital channels. Check that the selected switch is set to “TV. 4. You cannot program the TV to turn on automatically (timer function) You have forgotten your V-Chip pass code. • If V-Chip Hours are currently set to disable the V-Chip lock. • Be sure the channel you want to view is in memory. • An unusual digital signal may have been received. wait for at least one minute for the light to turn off. • A time-delayed recording may have started. Press ENTER after a channel number to avoid delays. • Begin play of the VCR. This is part of normal TV operation. 12.” Be no more than 20 feet from the TV when using the remote control. See page 65. 2. or select the Change setting on the Edit NetCommand menu to change the TV NetCommand’s settings for the connection. If they are not. tune to the actual channel number used by the broadcaster. The TV will not turn on after being plugged in. • The TV may be locked. 13. If green light on front panel is blinking. • From the Edit NetCommand® menu select Review setting. • Make sure that V-Chip is On. Verify that the devices are physically connected to the TV inputs as listed. • Make sure the V-Chip lock is off. See Appendix C. Wait for the green light to stop flashing and turn On again. triggering a protection circuit. On the remote control. 5. use the System Reset button. 3. Cable provider needs information to start CableCARD™ service. The virtual channel will then be automatically added to memory. Wait for the light to stop flashing and turn TV on. You cannot access a channel. Bypassing the V-Chip Lock. the V-Chip will not block programming. • If the TV does not stay turned On. On-screen displays appear each time you change a function. the screen is blue (no signal source). It is normal for digital channels to take longer to tune in. Program the remote control to operate the TV (Appendix D). Appendices 115 .

causing double signals. No appears incomplete other data is available. 21. you can only use ENTER to play and CANCEL on the TV remote to control the memory cards. Make sure the IR emitter is facing the IR sensor in the device. The message “Lamp will soon exceed. • The IR emitter is incorrectly placed. Change if necessary. and PCs cannot display in the PIP. See Appendix D for programming the remote control. • Digital channels. 19. NetCommand unable to learn specific device keys. • Device does not use IR format for remote control signal. Reset the lamp reminder in the setup menu. information Available information is sent from the broadcaster or cable provider.Appendix J: Troubleshooting. ITT and RF formats cannot be learned. but not all. turn the input On to view the A/V Receiver menu. • Reset the TV using the SYSTEM RESET button. 116 Appendices . • The incorrect manufacturer was selected during setup. 17.. • Turn the TV off for 5 to 10 seconds and then turn it back on. 16. digital devices. make sure slide switch is not set to TV position. • Turn the TV off and then back on. 22. Cannot see the A/V Receiver menu. • Press STOP or wait until playback is complete before removing memory card. 18 When ChannelView™ list is displayed. Insert fresh batteries and try Learning again. device key functions can be learned by NetCommand. 20. TV is not responding after pulling out a memory card during playback. • A recording is in progress. Verify that the function is supported or keys are learned. but other functions may not • The signal from the remote control ay not be strong enough. The A/V Receiver is not connected to any video input of the TV. or can’t see a track/song name in the Playlist menu. • The requested function is not supported by NetCommand. TV can’t play or stop a memory card. 15.. To check the A/V Receiver menu. • Room lighting may affect the signal. Have the remotes very close (6 inches or less) to the TV during Learning. • If learning a Mitsubishi remote control. continued General TV Operation Symptom 14 A device does not respond to button presses from the remote. • The IR emitter is not plugged into the IR emitter Output NetCommand. Cancel the recording to select the device. Select the Change setting from the Setup menu and then the device to display the manufacturer selection. • The device is not supported and keys have not been learned. File does not meet file standards for playback. Can’t see a thumbnail picture in the JPEG menu. For example. memory cards.” keeps displaying after the lamp has been replaced. Devices are grayed out in the Device Selection menu or the PIP Selection menu. Without NetCommand enabled. POWER and PLAY may be learned. Then select Review from the Setup Menu. temporarily plug into an unused input of the TV. Be sure that the IR emitter cannot send to the TV. • Some. • The IR emitter is facing the TV screen. • NetCommand was not set up. Remarks • Remote has not been set up for NetCommand® use.

Screen is black when trying to view digital channels or IEEE 1394 device. so you must specify it manually. try digital. Record programs in Cropped mode if playing back on a 4:3 TV. there may be a mismatch of the media with the display. 8. Appendices 117 . Press DEVICE to display the Device Selection menu. Purchase a new lamp. Contact your dealer or a Mitsubishi Authorized Service Center to arrange for a service evaluation. then select the camcorder.Appendix J: Troubleshooting. 5.com or by calling 1-800-332-2119. Due to the limitations of unidirectional CableCARD service. You cannot see a picture when playing a VHS tape. 4. Open the Edit NetCommand screen. See Appendix G for lamp replacement information. mitsubishi-tv. 3. DVCR analog/digital problems. Status indicator light is a constant/flashing red. There is a large black or gray rectangle on the screen. • Turn off video mute for the VCR. Turn back on. Service is required. white lines are rolling on the screen. or recorded at a time. Replace it. 9. 6. Remarks • Make sure the V-Chip lock is off. Lamp cover door is open or lamp cartridge is not secure. Cool the room. Room temperature has exceeded proper levels. • Check your VCR’s owner’s guide for further troubleshooting. See Appendix G for lamp replacement information. Press ENTER for the DVCR device. CableCARD channel is not shown as PIP image when CableCARD channel is the main image. When viewing a stopped VCR. only one scrambled CableCARD channel can be tuned. Lamp indicator light is a constant red. check mark the DV box. and in the Name for 1394 Device screen. Remarks Turn the TV off for at least 2 minutes. 3. The PerfectColor™ color balance has been incorrectly set. try analog. 2. • Change the VCR input to the antenna input. Lamp indicator light is a constant yellow. • Not all inputs can be displayed as a PIP. 4. Open the Record menu and select Cropped before making such a recording. www. See Appendix G for lamp replacement information. continued Picture Symptom 1. The TV’s analog closed captioning has been set to “text” mode in the Captions menu. If the tape is currently playing but no picture displays. TV was set to Anamorphic when program was recorded. A program recorded on your widescreen TV is distorted when played on a 4:3 TV. Status indicator light is a constant yellow. 2. viewed. If light is still red. Listings of Mitsubishi Authorized Service locations can be obtained from our web site. Indicators Symptom 1. 7. Lamp may fail soon. • Display the Device Selection menu and select the correct VCR. Press VIDEO repeatedly until you see the PerfectColor option and press ENTER. DV formatting was not detected during automatic discovery. Lamp indicator light is a flashing yellow. 5. Add. PIP does not display a picture. the lamp has failed. If digital is selected. Cannot see a picture from a DV Camcorder. select Change. or if analog is selected. Turn off because there is no text information being broadcast. • Begin playing the tape.

Select the Change setting from the Edit NetCommand menu. If they do not match. This may include too many Firewire devices in use at one time.. if any. either change the physical connections or change the NetCommand setup. 4. The sound does not match the screen picture. The REC button is not working. 3. The A/V Receiver is the selected audio source but there is no sound. The TV Speaker icon or A/V Receiver icon is grayed out and not selectable. • Television lost power long enough to lose current clock time. Press REC instead. Check to see if the MUTE button is on. ChannelView program recording failed. There is no sound even when the volume is turned up. From the NetCommand menu. 2. The TV’s “Listen to:” setting may be set to SAP.” Remarks Some recording(s) on the Track List need to be deleted. Recording device may lack sufficient blank space to make a full recording. 118 Appendices .. 2. the record key is grayed out and • Recordings cannot be initiated from the Transport menu when using an IEEE not available. and then select the device (for example VCR). check if the audio check box is selected for the TV input and/or AVR input. Check the Review screen to see if the A/ V Receiver inputs and device listed correspond to the physical connections on the A/V Receiver. check that AUDIO OUTPUT on TV’s back panel is connected to the A/V receiver. After the power is turned on. If using stereo or A/V receiver. Once the Connection screen is displayed. NetCommand® is set up incorrectly. Highlight program(s) to delete and press CANCEL twice to confirm. The broadcaster supplied program information that was incorrect and/or was changed after a recording was added to the Record List. The TV’s “Listen to:” setting may be set to SAP. then select TV Disc. incorrect program was recorded. does not support recording. The Record menu displays allowing setup of a recording Program to be recorded was correctly selected from ChannelView. • Check to see if the A/V Receiver power is turned on. To change the NetCommand setup. • Analog VCR power was left off. 3. Recording Symptom 1. continued Sound Symptom 1. Remarks • • • • • • • • Check audio source in Device Menu. on the • The device. 1394 device. See on-screen message “TV Disc is full. make the audio source the TV speakers and select a source other than the one you want to change. such as a DVD player. Check that the “TV Speakers” setting is On in the Audio/Video menu. Next select the Change option on the Edit NetCommand menu to change the A/V receiver input for the device on the Connection screen. 4. Press DEVICE to display the Device Selection menu. or. • Connection and compatibility issues with IEEE 1394 (FireWire®) digital devices. check their input selection. If using stereo or A/V receiver speakers.Appendix J: Troubleshooting. Press GUIDE to display the track list. redisplay the Device Selection menu and press ENTER to allow NetCommand to correctly select the A/V Receiver input. • Verify the connections and NetCommand setup for the A/V receiver and the desired source device. select Review. however. Transport menu. or the recording device not understanding the record command. Incomplete ChannelView program recorded.

D-VHS recordings for digital cable have dropouts (loss of picture or sound). There is no audio and video from the IEEE 1394 device. Replace them one by one to locate the problem device or cable • Use System Reset (front control panel). The device is already in use (for example. • • • • • • The IEEE 1394 connection to the TV or another device is not secure or is loose. Select NetCommand from the Main menu. • The device is unchecked in the Review screen. • The device has not been discovered. The source is copy-protected or violates copy protection. A device in the IEEE 1394 chain is not powered on. Cancel the recording or peer-to-peer connection. Turn on. Through Review. Remarks • The IEEE 1394 cable is too long. Go to the Edit NetCommand menu. See page 58. • There may be a slow device in the middle of the IEEE 1394 network. 2. • The device is not an Audio/Video device The device may be busy. verify the device is checked. • The IEEE 1394 Device has not been powered On. 6. The IEEE 1394 device is not powered on. The device is not an audio/video device. 8. IEEE 1394 cable is too long (maximum of 15 feet between devices). 3.Try pressing play again on the device’s remote control or front panel. The media is blank (has no recording). Make sure a device is connected at the end. continued IEEE 139 Devices Symptom 1. The IEEE 1394 device cannot be selected (is grayed out). Plug it in. 9. 7. Appendices 119 . The play command failed . Digital cable signals on IEEE 1394 can exceed the data rate standards supported by DVCR. • The device is unchecked in the Review screen. • The device has been disconnected. • The TV cannot support IEEE 1394 menus. No media (tape or disc) is inserted into the device.Appendix J: Troubleshooting. the device is currently recording). The IEEE 1394 Device is not listed in the Device Selection menu. if available. either recording or a peer-to-peer connection has been established. • • • • • • • • • The device is not turned on. 15 feet between devices is the maximum. Move the slow devices to the end so that connections for faster devices do not pass through them. Delete the IEEE 1394 device. • The IEEE 1394 device does not provide a menu. All IEEE 1394 devices disappear. Use analog connections instead. The device discovery can take as long as a minute to initiate. Remove or stop some devices and try again. Turn the device power on. Turn on all the devices. as may be the case with an IEEE 1394 signal from a computer. The device’s digital video signal is not supported by the TV. • Disconnect all the cables and devices from the TV. • The connected devices must not be in a loop that returns to the TV. The IEEE 1394 device uses an incompatible protocol and will not be discovered 5. Too many other devices are already communicating over IEEE 1394. • The IEEE 1394 plug is disconnected or loose. • Remove IEEE 1394 plug. Check the device. DEVICE MENU button does not display a menu. Excessive digital artifacts when viewing an IEEE 1394 device. Plug the device in again so it can be discovered again. Select the NetCommand menu. then select Review. An IEEE 1394 device has been plugged in but does not appear in the Device Selection menu (not discovered). or no playback. Cannot rediscover a deleted IEEE 1394 device. 4.

the destination device for the recording is not powered on. TV Guide On Screen system program listings don’t match actual programs • Incorrect ZIP code was entered at initial TV Guide system setup. • Source Device has higher speed (S 400) than record device. • The recording device can not decode the copyright signal included in the signal source (try another device if available). there may be more than one cable company in your ZIP code. • Source for recording is copyrighted • Too many IEEE 1394 devices in network. including dubbed recordings. Disconnect unused devices. • The source device for the recording is not powered on. It may take up to one week to receive all eight days of TV program listings. box is left on. • The playing device (for dubbing) does not support copyrighted material. antenna or cable box and IR cable). • Selected function is gray (such as Record for a DVD. 120 Appendices . TV Guide On Screen system does not change channels on the cable box. 11. select NetCommand from the main TV menu. which does not support the Record function. • Unapproved source device for copy protected material. press the REC key.Appendix J: Troubleshooting. See page 31. Remarks • To initiate a recording to IEEE 1394 device. TV Guide On Screen Symptom 1. • For cable programs. reverse devices. • The wrong medium (analog tape for digital recording. 3. The TV Guide On Screen system uses NetCommand to control the cable box and VCR. 2. • The program is copy protected. Cannot record to or from the IEEE 1394 device. play in the slower device and record in the faster device. If possible. The Record menu displays allowing setup of the recording. It may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings. Cannot control the IEEE 1394 device from the Transport Menu. Refer to the TV Guide On Screen system manual for instructions on the Setup Service. then Guide to enter the correct ZIP code. • Invalid ZIP code was entered at the initial TV Guide On Screen system setup. (see the separate TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed information) Remarks TV Guide On Screen® system shows no program • Program listings are downloaded while the TV is off and the cable listings. To correct. • Cable box is not set up in NetCommand. Insufficient bandwidth available. then Guide and enter the correct ZIP code. or digital tape for the analog recording) is in the device. • When dubbing. then select Change or Add on the NetCommand menu and select Cable Box. continued IEEE 139 Devices Symptom 10. Select NetCommand from the main TV menu. • NetCommand IR emitter is not in place or properly positioned in front of the cable box remote sensor. At least one antenna connection must be associated with the TV Guide On Screen system to receive program listings. • Device may not support the command. • The program has already been recorded once and the copy protection only allows one recording. Select NetCommand menu. • Check the connections between the TV and the TV Guide On Screen input (cable.

LLC.877.203. SD logo is a trademark. Inc. DCR™ Certification Logo is a trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association. CompactFlash® and CF are trademarks of the CompactFlash Association. CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision.498. MonitorLink™.073.895.” “PLC” and “PLC Content Ready” word marks are trademarks of Silicon Image. Inc. Memory Stick™ and Memory Stick PRO™ are trademarks of Sony Corp.S. 6.Trademark and License Information LICENSOR’S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY. patents and other intellectual property rights. 6.794. in the United states and/or other countries. Dolby® and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ViewPoint®.940. 6. Firewire® is a trademark of Apple Computer. ANY EXPRESS. Inc.331. Inc. BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT.706. The PanelLink Cinema Partners logo and the “PanelLink Cinema. Reverse engineering or disassembly prohibited. TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International. HDMI™ the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. The TV Guide On Screen® system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International. MultiMediaCard™ is trademark of Infineon Technologies and licensed to the MultiMediaCard Association. Playstation® 2 is a trademark of the Sony Corporation.239.418. 5. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.556. 4. ChannelView™. Diamond Shield™ are trademarks of Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America. and/or one of its affiliates. Inc. DTVLINK™ Certification Logo is a trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U. and other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing. In the United States. SmartMedia™ is a trademark of Toshiba Corp. Trademark and License Information 121 .S.751.908.713.154. registered in the U. The TV Guide On Screen® system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents: 6. 6.121. IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH SUPPLIERS. and is intended for home and other limited pay-per-view uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. QuickView™. 4. SuperQuickView™.578. 4. Inc or PanelLink Cinema. and/or one of its affiliates. MediaCommand™. Lifestyle® 28 is a trademark of the Bose Corporation. INCLUDING. Inc. Inc. Inc. XBox™ is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. NetCommand®. Microdrive® is a registered trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technology. TITLE. MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PerfectColor™. and are used under a license from Silicon Image. Digital Light Processing™ and DLP™ are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

The Software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the Software is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. Decompilation and Disassembly. except that you own the media on which the Software is recorded. Trademarks.S. or sublicense the Software. 2. lease. North Korea. WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and/or birth defects or other reproductive harm. Separation of Components. government.S. LICENSE GRANT. Iraq. No Rental. COPYRIGHT. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. SPECIAL. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE OR IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE TV. has embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services. which currently include. audio. text. 4. and any accompanying printed materials are owned by or licensed to MDEA. you agree to be bound by the terms of this License Agreement. export transactions by any federal agency of the U. except to the extent that the foregoing restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law. or to any national of any such country. You specifically agree not to export or re-export the Software: (i) to any country to which the U. LOSS OF GOOD WILL OR EXPENDITURES MADE OR COMMITTED FOR IN RELIANCE ON THE CONTINUATION OF THIS LICENSE. INDIRECT. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTIES FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE. IN CONTRACT. who intends to transmit or transport the Software back to such country. or induced by your failure to abide by the terms of the License. and “applets” incorporated into the Software).MITSUBISHI TV SOFTWARE END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IMPORTANT – READ CAREFULLY: This License Agreement is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or an entity) and Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America. but MDEA and its licensors retain ownership of the Software itself. THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. All rights not expressly granted are reserved by MDEA. encouraged. Sudan. IN TORT OR OTHERWISE. The Software is licensed. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. music. and Syria. ERROR OR BUG SHALL CONSTITUTE A FAILURE OF THE ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE. except in conjunction with a sale of the TV that Software has been pre installed. INCLUDING. INCIDENTAL. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. non-transferable.S. Libya. or disassemble. This License Agreement does not grant you any rights to any trademarks of MDEA. RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. chemical. 6. You agree that you will not export or re-export the Software. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES. (ii) to any person or entity who you know or have reason to know will utilize the Software in the design. FOR ANY DIRECT. THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. not sold. photographs. 7. Inc. ANY CLAIMS FOR LOST PROFITS. By utilizing this television and Software. 1. wherever located. or (iii) to any person or entity who has been prohibited from participating in U. as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. SPECIAL. decompile. lend. may subject you to serious criminal and civil penalties including damages and an award to MDEA of attorneys’ fees in connection with any violation of this License. This license is effective until terminated. 3. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California. or biological weapons. except as permitted pursuant to this License. limited right and license to use one copy of the Software only with the Mitsubishi television model that included this owner’s guide and owned by you. INCLUDING. The Software is licensed as a single product. you may not reverse engineer. 122 Trademark and License Information . INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE. Iran. You further understand that you may be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement or other violation of intellectual property rights that is caused. This License Agreement grants you no rights to use such content. YOU AGREE THAT NEITHER MDEA’S BREACH OF THIS LICENSE NOR ITS FAILURE TO REPAIR A DEFECT. will be limited to the money paid by you for the TV (based on fair market value of the TV) that caused the damages. GENERAL. 8. development. or production of nuclear. You may not rent. and will terminate immediately without notice from MDEA or judicial resolution if you fail to comply with any provision of this License. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED BY MDEA. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the Software (including but not limited to any images. MDEA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE SOFTWARE AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER. VIOLATIONS. WHETHER INDIRECT. Software Not for Resale. WITHOUT LIMITATION. Prohibition on Reverse Engineering. (MDEA) for all software pre installed and/or provided along with this television (“Software”). or denied your export privileges. You understand that any use. You may not resell or otherwise transfer for value the Software. MDEA SHALL NOT. or otherwise reduce the Software to any human perceivable form. copying or transfer of the Software. but are not necessarily limited to Cuba. IN NO EVENT SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTIES. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one TV. MDEA’s liability to you for direct damages for any cause whatsoever and regardless of the form of the action. You warrant and represent that neither the BXA nor any other U. revoked. MDEA grants you a non-exclusive. 5. video. MDEA is licensing the Software for use within the United States.S. federal agency has suspended. animations. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHERWISE. The Software contains trade secrets or other proprietary material in its human perceivable form and to protect them.

d. or picture elements (pixels). The lenticular (i. If the problem persists please arrange for warranty service. Proof of purchase date from an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer is required when requesting warranty service. any defective part without charge for the part. modification or misapplication of the Embedded Software. BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE. TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: a. 1. whose name and address can be obtained from your MITSUBISHI dealer. INC. Your DLP Projection TV is manufactured to a high level of performance and quality. at an authorized service shop. Parts used for replacement may be replaced with those of like kind and quality and may be new or remanufactured.e. but MDEA does not warrant that the Embedded Software is error-free. then MDEA shall modify or replace the nonconforming Embedded Software at no charge to you. THE RETURN OF THE OWNER REGISTRATION CARD IS NOT A CONDITION OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. we will repair or replace. Labor. If. b. This DLP Projection Television uses a single DLP chip to create the screen image. However. please review the instruction booklet to insure proper installation and correct customer control adjustment. calling MDEA at the 800-332-2119. MDEA also does not warrant that the Embedded Software will be compatible under IEEE 1394 AV/C and HAVi software standards with products produced by any other manufacturer. the lenticular screen if it proves defective. (“MDEA”) warrants as follows to the original purchaser of this television from an authorized MITSUBISHI Audio/Video Dealer. sometimes a pixel is continuously active. All rights under this limited warranty on the Embedded Software also subject to your acceptance of and compliance with the terms of the Software License Agreement applicable to this television. Notice. 123 .Mitsubishi DLP™ Projection Television Limited Warranty MITSUBISHI DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AMERICA. b. or pay for any travel and/or transportation costs the service center may charge to and from your home. at our option. you must notify an authorized MITSUBISHI service center of any defect within the applicable warranty time period. Parts. which at MDEA’s sole discretion may be fulfilled by means of modification or replacement software contained on a replacement memory card for Customer installation. MDEA warrants only that the percentage of properly functioning pixels will be not less than 99.99% of all pixels. misuse. Our standard is clear. after prompt notice within the warranty period. and this limited warranty on the Embedded Software shall be null and void if the Embedded Software is modified or changed in any manner except as specifically authorized by MDEA. we will provide the labor for a warranty repair by an authorized MITSUBISHI service center without charge for one (1) year from the original date of purchase at retail. please return the Owner Registration Card so that we can contact you should a question of safety arise which could affect you. should it prove defective by reason of against defects arising from improper workmanship and/or material: a. by writing at the address provided below. As in other display technology. Actual service labor will be provided without charge. MDEA determines that the Embedded Software has failed to perform in accordance with such functional description in all material respects and if such failure is not due to accident. c. including (but not limited to) some Embedded Software. at our option. Embedded Software. c. The foregoing shall be MDEA’s sole obligation to you under this limited warranty. you must either deliver your television to an authorized service location at your own expense. the consumer is solely responsible for any replacement labor. Present your sales receipt or other document which establishes proof and date of purchase. MDEA warrants that all software incorporated into this television set (the “Embedded Software”) will perform in accordance with the functional description of Embedded Software in all material respects. For certain items that are designed to be replaced by the consumer. We will repair or replace. For all other parts. Warranty service will be provided in your home or. provided that your television is located within the geographic territory customarily covered by an authorized MITSUBISHI service center. If not. or by using the support feature of our website at www. For thirty (30) days after the original purchase at retail. Parts used for replacement are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period. 99. This technology creates the image using small dots.com. in fact.99% perfect in the number of properly functioning pixels.Mitsubishi-tv. The limited warranty contained in this section shall continue for a period of one (1) year from the date of the original purchase at retail. To obtain warranty service. inactive or the incorrect color. if required. e. Contact your nearest authorized MITSUBISHI service center. front picture) screen is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of the original purchase at retail. The lamp and all other parts (except any software incorporated into this television) are warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of the original purchase at retail.

freight damage. repairs to or service of the product by anyone other than an authorized MITSUBISHI service center. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts.01% pixel outages (small dot picture elements that are dark or incorrectly illuminated). physical abuse to or misuse of the product (including any failure to carry out any maintenance as described in the Owner’s Guide including air filter cleaning or any product damaged by excessive physical or electrical stress). product use in any manner contrary to the Owner’s Guide. or consequential damages. Up to . 4. BREACH OF CONTRACT. 5. connection with any external audio receiver. expenses or any other damages arising from product installation. sharpness). such as power surge damage caused by electrical system or lightning. color. alteration. 6. brightness. SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. any adjustments of user controls (including contrast. AND ANY REMEDY WHICH.A. CA 92618-1904 12 . THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR. ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY NOT PROVIDED HEREIN. 9351 Jeronimo Road Irvine. defaced or removed. MITSUBISHI DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AMERICA. b. or service of products purchased or serviced outside the U. OR OTHERWISE. INC. and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. all costs. other adjustment necessary to prepare the unit for display or use. so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. To obtain a replacement lamp during the warranty period. special. Damage to the lenticular screen or Fresnel lens.S. service calls related to unsatisfactory audio or visual reception or signal unless caused by a defect in the product that is covered under this limited warranty. or set-ups. tint. antenna. fine tuning. BUT FOR THIS PROVISION. IS HEREBY EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED. or any damage caused by acts of God or other factors beyond the reasonable control of MDEA.d. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INCIDENTAL. This limited warranty also excludes service calls where no defect in the product covered under this warranty is found. or the exclusion or limitation of incidental. Please consult the operating instructions contained in the Owner’s Guide furnished with the product for information regarding user controls. After the warranty period you may order the lamp directly from the MDEA Parts Department at (800) 553-7278. 3. MIGHT ARISE BY IMPLICATION OR OPERATION OF LAW. WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY. screen frame. 2. please contact the MDEA Consumer Relations Department at (800) 332-2119. cosmetic damage or to any other damage where such damage is caused by unauthorized modification. any products that have had a serial number or any part thereof altered. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER: a. cable or satellite systems.

19. TV Pause Front Button Lock 77 Front Control Panel 14 G H GUIDE Key (button) 14. See also SQV and PIP viewing 87 Changing 72 Memorizing 65 Name 72 ChannelView 58 Channel Menu 72 Cleaning and Service 108 Clock Set Date. 36. 90 Date. 37 Device 48 Device Key Reference Chart 100 GUIDE Key 34 IEEE 1394 Devices 53 Troubleshooting 116 Learn Screen. See NetCommand Channels 66. 19. Connecting 28 DVI Analog Audio 19 DVI Device 28 DVR (Digital Video Recorder). 84 CableCARD™ Menu 57 Cable Box 51. See NetCommand Advanced Learn Screen. See Reset A/V Receiver Adding 43 Connecting 27 Inputs 43 Input Learn Screen 44 Learn Screen 44 A/V Reset. 86 Mute Audio 74. See Pause. 22. [Device] 48 Anamorphic Picture Format 71 Antenna inputs (ANT-1 MAIN. 33. See Remote Control F C CableCARD™ 11. 52. 117 and TV Disc 59 Captions Menu 64. 32. Time 65 Color Adjustments 81 Component Inputs (YPbPr) 18 Computer. 41. 90 MUTE key 16 Video Mute 79 Index 125 . ANT-2 AUX) 18 Antenna with Leads.Index A A/V Memory Reset. 13. See TV Disc HDMI Device 29 HDMI Input 19 HDTV Receiver with Component Video. 27. 34. Connecting 29 Lamp Cartridge Replacement 109 Lamp Indicator. 58 Hard Drive. See Channels Memory Cards 12 Media Setup Menu 86 Memory Card Reader 13. 44 Code Reference Chart 103 Description 22. See PC Computer with a PC Monitor Output 93 Film Mode 79 Format Definitions 88 Freeze Picture. 61. 31 D J JPEG Picture Thumbnails (Media Dialog Box) 85 L B Back Panel (illustrated) 18 Batteries. TV 10 Add Device. See Reset A/V Settings Descriptions Audio 80 Video 81 Accessories. 85. 79 Audio Inputs 18 Connecting: Helpful Hints 34 Connecting External Devices 22 Connection for [Device] Screen 48 Connection Screen 53 Copy Restrictions 60. 74 Change Device Screen. See Clock Daylight Savings Time 66 Demo Track 20 Device Menu 57 Device Selection Menu 56 Diamond Shield 111–113 Digital Audio Output 19 Display Formats 88 DTV Link 19 DVD Player with Component Video. 46. 16. See Indicator Lights Lamp Reminder 66 Language 65 “Learn” Feature A/V Receiver 43. 26 Camcorder 13. 90. 106 Connecting 23. 34. 85 Playback 85 MP3 Audio 12. See TV Disc Name for 1394 Device Screen 52 and NetCommand 51 New 1394 Device Screen 52 On-Screen Displays 90 Indicator Lights 117 Lamp Indicator 14 Power/Timer 15 Status 15 INFO Key On-Screen Information 90 Inputs (Audio/Video) 18 IR (Infrared) IR Code for [Device] Screen 49 IR Emitter NetCommand® 18. [Device] 47 Lock Front Button Lock 77 Lock TV by Time 77 V-Chip Options 76 I Icon Order 67 IEEE 1394 Devices Adding IEEE 1394 Devices Automatically 52 Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices 33 Connecting IEEE 1394 Devices 33 IEEE 1394 Device Type Screen 53 Inputs 19 M M-Link Control 30 Memorize Channels. 72. Connecting 24 Audio/Video Menu 64. 33.

TV Pause Select Viewing Device. 20. 93 Peer-to-Peer Connection 62 PerfectColor 81 PIP/POP (Picture in Picture/Picture outside Picture) 16. See also TV Pause and Automatic POP Switching 87 Freezing PIP and Side-by-Side Images 87 and Memory Cards 85 PAUSE key 100 Operation Described 16 and Recording 70 Standard Pause 16. 105 Screen Protector. 18.N Name Screen 45. TV 98 SQV (SuperQuickView™) 73 Stand Requirements 2 Status Indicator. See TimeShuttle. 29. 71 Record Menu 70 REC Button 16. 53. 107 NetCommand Default Input 22 NetCommand Pre-Memorized Models 37 NetCommand Specialized Device Keys 100 Programming Codes 104 Restrictions for Traditional VCRs 60 VCR for Recordings Screen 49 Video Inputs 18 Video Settings 81 W Wall Outlet Cable 23 WMA Audio 12. 22. 46. 65 V-Chip 78 Bypassing the V-Chip Lock 101 Ratings 78 V-Chip Lock Menu 64. 115 TV 20 TV Disc 20 VCR Counter 106 Review Screen 42 RF Connection for Cable Screen 49 RS-232C 19. 60. TV 79 Specifications. 87 PIP Device Selection Menu 56 Playlist Menu. 52. See Reset T Time. 120 Setup 59. 70 Time-Delayed 59. 13. 76 V-Chip Menu 76 VCR 16. 16. 71. 18. 117 Connecting 25. 23. See Indicator Lights Stereo. 58. 52. 118 Analog Recording Quality 71 Copying or Moving Recordings 61 Description 11 and the Remote Control 16 TV Guide On Screen 12. 85. 27. 104. 56. 88 Connecting 92. See Device Selection Menu Setup Menu 64. 68 PC 19. 60. 70 VCR Recording from an Antenna or Cable Source 60 Remote Control and NetCommand® 37 Batteries 17 Functions 16 Programming 103 Programming Codes (reference chart) 103 Transport Buttons 67 Reset A/V (all settings) 14 A/V Memory (for individual devices) 79 DVCR Counter 107 Lamp Reminder 66 Pass Code 101 PerfectColor 81 Remote Control 17 System Reset Button 14. MP3 or WMA7 86 Copying or Moving TV Disc Recordings 61 Default Digital (Record) Device 71 Digital VCR or A/V Disc and Viewing 114 Record List 71 Record List Screen 59. 26 and NetCommand Control 106. 37. 72 Access Requirements 2 Setup 41 TV Pause 68 V S Q R QV (QuickView™) 16 Recording Analog and Digital Formats 70 Analog VCR and Viewing 114 Cancel Scheduled Recordings 71 S-Video 27 Satellite Receiver 16. 58. 48 NetCommand Add Device 46 Change Device 50 Connecting External Devices 22 Default Inputs 22 Delete Device 50 Description 11 Device Control (reference chart) 106 Device Setup Screen 41 Edit NetCommand Screen 46 Initial Setup 40 IR Emitters 31 NetCommand Menu 67 Pre-Memorized Devices 37 Specialized Device Keys 100 O P On-Screen Information 90 Pass Code Resetting 101 Setting 76 Pause. 52. 70. See Diamond Shield Search. See A/V Receiver System Reset. 33. See A/V Discs Search Current Broadcast. 107. See Clock Timer 66 TimeShuttle 69 Time Zone 66 Track List Screen 60 Transport Menu 67 TV Disc 59. See TimeShuttle. 46. 86 126 Index . 58. 51. 30 Setup Reminder 42 Signal Definitions 88 Speakers. TV Pause Search A/V Disc. 118.

.

853B540A40 Written and Printed in U.S.com To order replacement or additional remote controls.Website: E-mail: www.com MDEAservice@mdea.A. . lamp cartridges. Inc.mitsubishi-tv. call Consumer Relations at 800-332-2119 © 2005 Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America. or Owner’s Guides. call 800-553-7278 For questions.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful